O-Level Accounting Paper 2 Topical and y

1
O-LEVEL ACCOUNTING
PAPER 2 (TOPICAL & YEARLY)
All Variants (2017 edition)
Muhammad Nauman Malik

FCMA, MS Accounting (Gold Medalist), MBA (Finance), DCMA, PIPFA, B.Com (Gold Medalist)
Keynesian Institute of Management & Sciences (KIMS)
9-F, Main Market Gulberg II, Lahore.

Tel: 042-35714038 Cell: 0336-5314141
E-mail: [email protected]
2
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of the Author.
Cambridge International has not provided these questions or answers and can take no responsibility
whatsoever for their accuracy or suitability for the examinations.
Title O-Level Accounting Paper 2 (Topical/Yearly)
Author Muhammad Nauman Malik

Cell: 0321-8414262, 0300-8414262
E-mail: [email protected]
Published by Read & Write Publications
Printed by Sadaat Printers Urdu Bazar Lahore
Composed by Asif Bernard, Yasir Abbas Fraz
Title designed by Mukhtar Ali
Legal Advisor Mian Tariq Ahmad (Advocate Supreme Court)

Room No. 10, 11, 12 Al-Majeed Centre
1-Mozang Road, Lahore.
Tel: 042-37236145, Fax: 042-37241367
Edition: 2017
Price Rs.520/-
DISTRIBUTORS
1 BOOK WISE 2 NATIONAL BOOK SERVICE
12-Urdu Bazar, Lahore 22. Urdu bazar lahore.
Tel 042-37112265, 042-37361468 Ph. 042-37247310, 042-37355262
Fax 042-37361469 Fax. 042-37247323,
3 BOOKLAND 4 BOOK VALLEY
16-Urdu Bazar, Lahore Shop No. A.B-2,3, New Urdu Bazar, China
Tel 042-37124656, 042-37223210 Market, 5 Brothers Plaza, Gordon College
E-mail: [email protected] Road Rawalpindi
Tel: 051-35770894, 051-35551630
5 BURHANI BOOK CENTRE 6 MARYAM ACADEMY

Shop # 6 Hashmi Trust Building Rotson Road Mool Chand Diya Raam Building Sindh
New Urdu Bazar Karachi Karachi.
Tel 021-32212640 Tel: 021-32214243 , 021-32634243
3
PREFACE
Being in accordance with the GCE O Level – 7110 (syllabus followed in Pakistan), the book provides an
opportunity to strengthen the level of understanding and preparation for Cambridge exams.
The other books available in the market is based on Singaporean exams and does not include exams taken
in Pakistan for November session. Moreover that book includes past papers on yearly basis whereas the
book under review categorises them on topical as well as yearly basis.
In the book under review, the varying topics of the last nine years’ papers have been categorised in such a
way that one can attain optimum skills in each of these. This can be very helpful in revising the syllabus
and for preparing their final exams. In addition, the last five years’ papers at the end of the book provide
compact questions with given references.
It is, however, advised that students must supplement their studies with the textbooks recommended by
their teachers, since it is by no means a replacement for a good book.
I am indeed grateful to the students and the teachers who motivated me to undertake this task. Any
further suggestions for improvement and intimation of errors will be much appreciated and
acknowledged.
Muhammad Nauman Malik

Email: [email protected]
Mob: 0300-8414262
0321-8414262
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS (TOPICAL)

PREFACE 3
CHAPTER 1 ACCOUNTING BASICS 18
QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q1 (E) ............................................................................................... 18
QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (C & D) ......................................................................................... 18
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P22 Q1 ........................................................................................................... 18
QUESTION 5 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q2 (D)/NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q2 (F)/MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (E) .......... 19
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q1 (E) ........................................................................................... 19
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q4 (D) .......................................................................................... 19
QUESTION 8 MAY 2014 P22 Q1 (A & E) ................................................................................................ 20
QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P21 Q2 (D) ...................................................................................................... 20
QUESTION 11 MAY 2015 P21 Q4 (D) ...................................................................................................... 21
QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q4 (C) ........................................................................................... 21
CHAPTER 1 SOLUTIONS 22
QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (C & D) ......................................................................................... 22
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P22 Q1 ........................................................................................................... 22
QUESTION 5 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q2 (D)/NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q2 (F)/MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (E) .......... 23
QUESTION 8 MAY 2014 P22 Q1 (A & E) ................................................................................................ 23
QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P21 Q2 (D) ...................................................................................................... 24
QUESTION 11 MAY 2015 P21 Q4 (D) ...................................................................................................... 24
CHAPTER 2 BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY 26
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q1 ............................................................................................................. 26
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q1.................................................................................................. 26
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q1 (A TO D) ........................................................................................ 27
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P21 Q1 (A & B) ................................................................................................ 27
QUESTION 5 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q1................................................................................................ 28
QUESTION 6 MAY 2011 P21 Q1 ........................................................................................................... 29
QUESTION 7 MAY 2011 P22 Q1 (D) ...................................................................................................... 29
QUESTION 8 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q1 (A & B) ..................................................................................... 29
QUESTION 9 MAY 2012 P21 Q1 (A TO C) ............................................................................................... 30
QUESTION 10 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (B & C) ................................................................................................ 30
QUESTION 11 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q1 (A TO D) ................................................................................... 31
5
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2012 P21 Q1 ............................................................................................... 31

QUESTION 14 MAY 2013 P21 Q1 (A TO E) ................................................................................................ 33
QUESTION 16 MAY 2013 P22 Q1 (A TO D) ............................................................................................... 33
QUESTION 19 MAY 2014 P21 Q1 (D TO F) ............................................................................................... 35
QUESTION 20 MAY 2014 P21 Q2 (A) ...................................................................................................... 35
QUESTION 21 MAY 2014 P22 Q1 (B TO D) ............................................................................................... 36
QUESTION 24 MAY 2015 P21 Q1 (C) ...................................................................................................... 37
QUESTION 25 MAY 2015 P22 Q1 ........................................................................................................... 38
QUESTION 26 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q1 (A TO C) .................................................................................... 39
QUESTION 27 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q1 (C TO F) .................................................................................... 39
QUESTION 28 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q1 ................................................................................................... 40
QUESTION 29 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (A, B & E)" ................................................................................ 41
QUESTION 31 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (A)........................................................................................... 42
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q1 ............................................................................................................. 43
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q1.................................................................................................. 43
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q1 (A TO D) ........................................................................................ 44
QUESTION 5 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q1................................................................................................ 44
QUESTION 6 MAY 2011 P21 Q1 ........................................................................................................... 45
QUESTION 7 MAY 2011 P22 Q1 (D) ...................................................................................................... 45
QUESTION 10 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (B & C) ................................................................................................ 46
QUESTION 16 MAY 2013 P22 Q1 (A TO D) ............................................................................................... 49
QUESTION 19 MAY 2014 P21 Q1 (D TO F) ............................................................................................... 51
QUESTION 20 MAY 2014 P21 Q2 (A) ...................................................................................................... 51
QUESTION 24 MAY 2015 P21 Q1 (C) ...................................................................................................... 53
QUESTION 25 MAY 2015 P22 Q1 ........................................................................................................... 53
6
QUESTION 26 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q1 (A TO C) .................................................................................... 54

QUESTION 28 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q1 ................................................................................................... 55
QUESTION 29 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (A, B & E)" ................................................................................ 55
QUESTION 31 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (A)........................................................................................... 56
CHAPTER 3 BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENTS 57
QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q2 .................................................................................................... 57
QUESTION 2 MAY 2010 P21 Q1 (C & D) ................................................................................................ 57
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (C & D)" ................................................................................... 59
QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q2 .................................................................................................... 60
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (C & D)" ................................................................................... 62
CHAPTER 4 PAYROLL ACCOUNTING 63
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q3 (A & B) .................................................................................................. 63
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q2 (F & G) ....................................................................................... 63
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (D) ............................................................................................... 63
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P21 Q3 (D) ...................................................................................................... 63
QUESTION 6 MAY 2011 P21 Q2 (D) ...................................................................................................... 64
QUESTION 9 MAY 2013 P22 Q3 ........................................................................................................... 65
QUESTION 10 NOVEMBER 2013 P21 Q2 (D & E) ..................................................................................... 65
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q3 (B & C) ..................................................................................... 66
QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q3 (A TO C)" ................................................................................. 66
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q3 (A & B) .................................................................................................. 67
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q2 (F & G) ....................................................................................... 67
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (D) ............................................................................................... 67
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P21 Q3 (D) ...................................................................................................... 68
QUESTION 6 MAY 2011 P21 Q2 (D) ...................................................................................................... 69
7
QUESTION 9 MAY 2013 P22 Q3 ........................................................................................................... 69

QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q3 (B & C) ..................................................................................... 70
QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q3 (A TO C)" ................................................................................. 71
CHAPTER 5 ACCOUNTING FOR DEPRECIATION 72
QUESTION 1 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q2 (A TO E) ...................................................................................... 72
QUESTION 5 MAY 2013 P21 Q4 ........................................................................................................... 74
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2013 P22 Q1 (C & D)..................................................................................... 75
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q2 (A TO E) .................................................................................... 75
QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P22 Q2 ........................................................................................................... 76
QUESTION 10 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (A TO D) ....................................................................................... 77
QUESTION 1 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q2 (A TO E) ...................................................................................... 79
QUESTION 5 MAY 2013 P21 Q4 ........................................................................................................... 81
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2013 P22 Q1 (C & D)..................................................................................... 82
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q2 (A TO E) .................................................................................... 82
QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P22 Q2 ........................................................................................................... 83
QUESTION 10 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (A TO D) ....................................................................................... 84
CHAPTER 6 BAD AND DOUDTFUL DEBTS 85
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2013 P21 Q2 ( A TO C) ................................................................................... 85
QUESTION 4 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (E TO H) ....................................................................................... 86
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2013 P21 Q2 ( A TO C) ................................................................................... 87
QUESTION 4 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (E TO H) ....................................................................................... 88
CHAPTER 7 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF SOLE TRADERS 89
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q5 ............................................................................................................. 89
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q1 (C TO E) .................................................................................... 90
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q5) .............................................................................................. 91
8
QUESTION 5 MAY 2012 P21 Q1 (D) ...................................................................................................... 92

QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P21 Q5 ........................................................................................................... 92
QUESTION 7 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (A & D) ................................................................................................ 93
QUESTION 9 MAY 2013 P22 Q5 ........................................................................................................... 95
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P22 5 .............................................................................................................. 96
QUESTION 13 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q5 ................................................................................................... 99
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q5 ........................................................................................................... 101
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q5 ............................................................................................. 102
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q1 (C TO E) .................................................................................. 103
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q5) ............................................................................................ 104
QUESTION 5 MAY 2012 P21 Q1 (D) .................................................................................................... 105
QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 105
QUESTION 7 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (A & D) .............................................................................................. 106
QUESTION 9 MAY 2013 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 108
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P22 5 ............................................................................................................ 109
QUESTION 13 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q5 ................................................................................................. 113
CHAPTER 8 PARTNERSHIP ACCOUNTS 115
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 116
QUESTION 4 MAY 2011 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 117
QUESTION 5 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q5.............................................................................................. 118
QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 119
QUESTION 9 MAY 2014 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 123
QUESTION 11 MAY 2015 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 126
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q3 (A TO C) .................................................................................. 127
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 132
QUESTION 4 MAY 2011 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 133
QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 136
9

QUESTION 9 MAY 2014 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 140
QUESTION 11 MAY 2015 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 144
CHAPTER 9 AMALGAMATION OF SOLE PROPRIETORSHIPS 148
QUESTION 1 MAY 2010 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 148
QUESTION 1 MAY 2010 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 149
CHAPTER 10 CAPITAL & REVENUE 151
QUESTION 1 MAY 2010 P21 Q2 (F)..................................................................................................... 151
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (G & H) .................................................................................. 151
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P22 Q2 (F)..................................................................................................... 151
QUESTION 4 MAY 2013 P21 Q1 (F & G) .............................................................................................. 151
QUESTION 5 MAY 2013 P22 Q1 (E & F) ............................................................................................... 152
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q2 (F) ......................................................................................... 152
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2014 P22 Q2 (E & F) ................................................................................... 152
QUESTION 8 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q1 (D & E) ................................................................................... 152
QUESTION 9 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (C & D)................................................................................... 153
QUESTION 1 MAY 2010 P21 Q2 (F)..................................................................................................... 154
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (G & H) .................................................................................. 154
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P22 Q2 (F)..................................................................................................... 154
QUESTION 4 MAY 2013 P21 Q1 (F & G) .............................................................................................. 154
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q2 (F) ......................................................................................... 155
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2014 P22 Q2 (E & F) ................................................................................... 155
QUESTION 8 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q1 (D & E) ................................................................................... 155
QUESTION 9 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (C & D)................................................................................... 155
CHAPTER 11 CORRECTION OF ERRORS 157
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q2 ........................................................................................................... 157
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P21 Q2 (C) .................................................................................................... 157
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q2 (A TO E) .................................................................................. 158
QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P22 Q2 ........................................................................................................ 159
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2012 P22) Q2 ............................................................................................ 159
QUESTION 8 MAY 2013 P22 Q2 ......................................................................................................... 160
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P21 Q2 (B & C) )............................................................................................. 161
10
QUESTION 11 MAY 2014 P22 Q2 (B TO D) ) ........................................................................................... 161

QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q1 (C) ) ....................................................................................... 162
QUESTION 13 MAY 2015 P21 Q1 (A & B) .............................................................................................. 162
QUESTION 15 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q2 (B TO D).................................................................................. 163
QUESTION 16 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q2 (C & D) .................................................................................. 164
QUESTION 17 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q1 (A & B) ................................................................................... 164
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (B) ......................................................................................... 165
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q2 ........................................................................................................... 166
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P21 Q2 (C) .................................................................................................... 167
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q2 (A TO E) .................................................................................. 167
QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P22 Q2 ........................................................................................................ 168
QUESTION 8 MAY 2013 P22 Q2 ......................................................................................................... 169
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P21 Q2 (B & C) )............................................................................................. 170
QUESTION 11 MAY 2014 P22 Q2 (B TO D) ) ........................................................................................... 171
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q1 (C) ) ....................................................................................... 171
QUESTION 15 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q2 (B TO D).................................................................................. 173
QUESTION 16 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q2 (C & D) .................................................................................. 173
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (B) ......................................................................................... 174
CHAPTER 12 CONTROL ACCOUNTS 175
QUESTION 1 MAY 2010 P22 Q2 (A) .................................................................................................... 175
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q2 (A & B)A ................................................................................ 175
QUESTION 6 MAY 2014 P22 Q2 (A) .................................................................................................... 176
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q2 (A) ........................................................................................ 177
QUESTION 8 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q2 (A & B) .................................................................................. 177
QUESTION 1 MAY 2010 P22 Q2 (A) .................................................................................................... 178
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q2 (A & B)A ................................................................................ 178
QUESTION 6 MAY 2014 P22 Q2 (A) .................................................................................................... 179
11
QUESTION 8 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q2 (A & B) .................................................................................. 180

CHAPTER 13 ACCOUNTS FROM INCOMPLETE RECORDS 181
QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (A TO C, E & F) ............................................................................. 181
QUESTION 2 MAY 2010 P21 Q3 (A TO C) ............................................................................................. 181
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 182
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2012 P22) Q3 (A TO C)................................................................................. 183
QUESTION 7 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q3 ................................................................................................. 185
QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (A TO C, E & F) ............................................................................. 186
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 188
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2012 P22) Q3 (A TO C)................................................................................. 189
QUESTION 7 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q3 ................................................................................................. 191
CHAPTER 14 ACCOUNTS OF NON PROFIT ORGANISATIONS 193
QUESTION 3 MAY 2012 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 194
QUESTION 5 MAY 2014 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 196
QUESTION 6 MAY 2015 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 197
QUESTION 3 MAY 2012 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 199
QUESTION 5 MAY 2014 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 202
QUESTION 6 MAY 2015 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 202
CHAPTER 15 MANUFACTURING ACCOUNTS 204
QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q6 .................................................................................................. 204
QUESTION 2 MAY 2010 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 205
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 206
QUESTION 6 MAY 2013 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 209
QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 212
12
QUESTION 11 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q3 (D) ........................................................................................ 214

QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q6 .................................................................................................. 217
QUESTION 2 MAY 2010 P22 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 218
QUESTION 3 MAY 2011 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 219
QUESTION 6 MAY 2013 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 223
QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 227
QUESTION 11 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q3 (D) ........................................................................................ 229
CHAPTER 16 COMPANY ACCOUNTS 232
QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q5 (A TO D) ...................................................................................... 232
QUESTION 3 MAY 2010 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 233
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (A TO F) .................................................................................. 234
QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 235
QUESTION 8 MAY 2015 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 236
QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q5 (A TO D) ...................................................................................... 239
QUESTION 3 MAY 2010 P21 Q5 ......................................................................................................... 239
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (A TO F) .................................................................................. 240
QUESTION 6 MAY 2012 P22 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 242
QUESTION 8 MAY 2015 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 244
CHAPTER 17 RATIO ANALYSIS 246
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q4 (D & E) ................................................................................................ 246
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (A & B) ....................................................................................... 247
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 247
QUESTION 5 MAY 2010 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 248
QUESTION 7 MAY 2011 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 249
13
QUESTION 8 MAY 2011 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 250

QUESTION 11 MAY 2012 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 251
QUESTION 12 MAY 2012 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 252
QUESTION 15 MAY 2013 P21 Q2 (C TO E) .............................................................................................. 254
QUESTION 16 MAY 2013 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 254
QUESTION 17 MAY 2013 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 254
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2013 P22 Q 4 ............................................................................................. 255
QUESTION 20 MAY 2014 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 256
QUESTION 21 MAY 2014 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 257
QUESTION 25 MAY 2015 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 260
QUESTION 28 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q4 ................................................................................................. 263
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q4 (D & E) ................................................................................................ 266
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (A & B) ....................................................................................... 267
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 267
QUESTION 5 MAY 2010 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 268
QUESTION 7 MAY 2011 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 269
QUESTION 8 MAY 2011 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 270
QUESTION 11 MAY 2012 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 272
QUESTION 12 MAY 2012 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 272
QUESTION 15 MAY 2013 P21 Q2 (C TO E) .............................................................................................. 274
QUESTION 16 MAY 2013 P21 Q3 ......................................................................................................... 275
QUESTION 17 MAY 2013 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 275
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2013 P22 Q 4 ............................................................................................. 276
QUESTION 20 MAY 2014 P21 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 277
QUESTION 21 MAY 2014 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 278
14

QUESTION 25 MAY 2015 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 281
QUESTION 28 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q4 ................................................................................................. 283
MAY 2014 - PAPER 21 285
MAY 2014 - PAPER 22 291
NOVEMBER 2014 - PAPER 21 297
MAY 2015 - PAPER 21 308
MAY 2015 - PAPER 22 313
MAY 2016 - PAPER 21 & P22 328
15
TABLE OF CONTENTS (YEARLY)
2009 MAY P2 Q1 (e) ............................................................. 18, 22

Q1 ................................................................... 26, 43 Q2 .................................................................. 57, 60
Q2 ............................................................... 157, 166 Q3 (a to c, e & f) ........................................ 181, 186
Q3 (a & b) ....................................................... 63, 67 Q3 (d) ............................................................. 63, 67
Q3 (c & d) ................................................... 193, 198 Q4 (a & b) ................................................... 247, 267
Q4 (a to c) ................................................... 115, 130 Q4 (c & d) ....................................................... 18, 22
Q4 (d & e) ................................................... 246, 266 Q5 (a to d) .................................................. 232, 239
Q5 ................................................................. 89, 101 Q5 (e) ............................................................. 18, 22
2009 NOVEMBER P2 Q6 .............................................................. 204, 217
Q1 ................................................................... 26, 43 2011 MAY P21
Q2 (a to e) ....................................................... 72, 79 Q1 .................................................................. 29, 45
Q2 (f & g) ........................................................ 63, 67 Q2 (a & b) ................................................... 175, 178
Q3 ............................................................... 232, 238 Q2 (c) ......................................................... 157, 167
Q4 ............................................................... 246, 266 Q2 (d) ............................................................. 64, 69
Q5 ............................................................... 115, 131 Q3 .............................................................. 116, 132
2010 MAY P21 Q4 .............................................................. 249, 269
Q1 (a & b) ....................................................... 27, 44 Q5 .............................................................. 206, 219
Q1 (c & d) ....................................................... 57, 60 2011 MAY P22
Q2 (a to e) ....................................................... 72, 79 Q1 (a to c) ...................................................... 57, 60
Q2 (f) .......................................................... 151, 154 Q1 (d) ............................................................. 29, 45
Q3 (a to c) ................................................... 181, 187 Q2 (a to e) ...................................................... 73, 80
Q3 (d) .............................................................. 63, 68 Q2 (f) .......................................................... 151, 154
Q4 ............................................................... 247, 267 Q3 .............................................................. 182, 188
Q5 ............................................................... 233, 239 Q4 .............................................................. 250, 270
2010 MAY P22 Q5 .............................................................. 117, 133
Q1 ................................................................... 18, 22 2011 NOVEMBER P21
Q2 (a) .......................................................... 175, 178 Q1 (a & b) ....................................................... 29, 46
Q2 (b to d) ...................................................... 64, 68 Q1 (c to e) .................................................... 90, 103
Q3 ............................................................... 148, 149 Q2 (a to e) .................................................. 158, 167
Q4 ............................................................... 248, 268 Q2 (f) .............................................................. 19, 23
Q5 ............................................................... 205, 218 Q3 .............................................................. 193, 198
2010 NOVEMBER P22 Q4 .............................................................. 250, 270
Q1 ................................................................... 28, 44 Q5 .............................................................. 118, 134
Q2 (a to c) ................................................... 157, 166 2011 NOVEMBER P22
Q2 (d) .............................................................. 19, 23 Q1 (a to d) ...................................................... 31, 47
Q3 (a to f) ................................................... 234, 240 Q1 (e) ............................................................. 19, 23
Q3 (g & h) ................................................... 151, 154 Q2 (a & b) ................................................... 175, 178
Q4 ............................................................... 248, 268 Q2 (c to f) ....................................................... 85, 87
Q5 ................................................................. 89, 102 Q3 .............................................................. 235, 241
2010 SPECIMEN P2 Q4 (a to c) .................................................. 251, 271
Q1 (a to d)....................................................... 27, 44 Q4 (d) ............................................................. 19, 23
16
Q5 ................................................................. 91, 104 Q4 .............................................................. 254, 275

2012 MAY P21 Q5 ................................................................ 95, 108
Q1 (a to c) ....................................................... 30, 46 2013 NOVEMBER P21
Q1 (d) ............................................................ 92, 105 Q1 .................................................................. 34, 49
Q1 (e & f) .................................................... 158, 168 Q2 (a to c) ...................................................... 85, 87
Q2 (a & b) ................................................... 176, 179 Q2 (d & e)....................................................... 65, 70
Q2 (c & d) ....................................................... 64, 69 Q3 .............................................................. 160, 170
Q3 ............................................................... 194, 199 Q4 .............................................................. 256, 277
Q4 ............................................................... 251, 272 Q5 .............................................................. 120, 137
Q5 ................................................................. 92, 105 2013 NOVEMBER P22
2012 MAY P22 Q1 (a & b) ....................................................... 35, 50
Q1 (a & d) ..................................................... 93, 106 Q1 (c & d) ....................................................... 75, 82
Q1 (b & c) ....................................................... 30, 46 Q2 (a to c) .................................................. 176, 179
Q1 (e) .............................................................. 19, 23 Q2 (d & e)....................................................... 86, 88
Q2 ............................................................... 159, 168 Q3 .............................................................. 195, 200
Q3 ............................................................... 235, 242 Q4 .............................................................. 255, 276
Q4 ............................................................... 252, 272 Q5 .............................................................. 122, 139
Q5 ............................................................... 119, 136 2014 MAY P21
2012 NOVEMBER P21 Q1 (a to c) ...................................................... 58, 61
Q1 ................................................................... 31, 47 Q1 (d to f)....................................................... 35, 51
Q2 ................................................................... 74, 80 Q2 (a) ............................................................. 35, 51
Q3 ............................................................... 207, 221 Q2 (b & c) ................................................... 161, 170
Q4 ................................................................. 93, 107 Q3 .............................................................. 196, 202
Q5 ............................................................... 252, 273 Q4 .............................................................. 256, 277
2012 NOVEMBER P22 Q5 .............................................................. 123, 140
Q1 ................................................................... 32, 48 2014 MAY P22
Q2 ............................................................... 159, 168 Q1 (a & e) ....................................................... 20, 23
Q3 (a to c) ................................................... 183, 189 Q1 (b to d) ...................................................... 36, 51
Q3 (d) .............................................................. 65, 69 Q2 (a) ......................................................... 176, 179
Q4 ............................................................... 253, 274 Q2 (b to d) .................................................. 161, 171
Q5 ............................................................... 208, 221 Q3 (a & b) ................................................... 210, 224
2013 MAY P21 Q3 (c & d) ....................................................... 65, 70
Q1 (a to e) ....................................................... 33, 48 Q4 .............................................................. 257, 278
Q1 (f & g) .................................................... 151, 154 Q5 ................................................................ 96, 109
Q2 (a & b) ....................................................... 33, 49 2014 NOVEMBER P21
Q2 (c to e) ................................................... 254, 274 Q1 (a & b) ....................................................... 36, 52
Q3 ............................................................... 254, 275 Q1 (c) ......................................................... 162, 171
Q4 ................................................................... 74, 81 Q2 (a to e) ...................................................... 75, 82
Q5 ............................................................... 209, 223 Q2 (f) .......................................................... 152, 155
2013 MAY P22 Q3 .............................................................. 236, 243
Q1 (a to d)....................................................... 33, 49 Q4 .............................................................. 258, 279
Q1 (e & f) .................................................... 152, 154 Q5 .............................................................. 211, 225
Q2 ............................................................... 160, 169 2014 NOVEMBER P22
Q3 ................................................................... 65, 69 Q1 .................................................................. 37, 52
17
Q2 (a to d)....................................................... 76, 83 Q5 ................................................................ 98, 111

Q2 (e & f) .................................................... 152, 155 2016 MAY P21
Q3 ............................................................... 183, 189 Q1 .................................................................. 40, 55
Q4 ............................................................... 259, 280 Q2 (a to d) ...................................................... 77, 84
Q5 ............................................................... 124, 142 Q2 (e to h) ...................................................... 86, 88
2015 MAY P21 Q3 .............................................................. 185, 191
Q1 (a & b) ................................................... 162, 172 Q4 .............................................................. 263, 283
Q1 (c) .............................................................. 37, 53 Q5 ................................................................ 99, 113
Q2 (a to c) ................................................... 184, 190 2016 MAY P22
Q2 (d) .............................................................. 20, 24 Q1 .................................................................. 40, 55
Q3 ............................................................... 236, 244 Q2 (a to d) ...................................................... 77, 84
Q4 (a to c) ................................................... 260, 280 Q2 (e to h) ...................................................... 86, 88
Q4 (d) .............................................................. 21, 24 Q3 .............................................................. 185, 191
Q5 ............................................................... 212, 227 Q4 .............................................................. 263, 283
2015 MAY P22 Q5 ................................................................ 99, 113
Q1 ................................................................... 38, 53 2016 NOVEMBER P21
Q2 ................................................................... 76, 83 Q1 (a, b & e) ................................................... 41, 55
Q3 ............................................................... 197, 202 Q1 (c & d) ....................................................... 59, 62
Q4 ............................................................... 260, 281 Q2 (a & b) ................................................... 177, 180
Q5 ............................................................... 126, 144 Q2 (c & d) ................................................... 164, 173
2015 NOVEMBER P21 Q2 (e) ............................................................. 21, 24
Q1 (a to c) ....................................................... 39, 54 Q3 (a to c) ...................................................... 66, 71
Q1 (d & e) ................................................... 152, 155 Q3 (d) ......................................................... 214, 229
Q2 ............................................................... 163, 172 Q4 .............................................................. 264, 283
Q3 (a to c) ................................................... 127, 145 Q5 .............................................................. 127, 146
Q3 (d) .............................................................. 20, 24 2016 NOVEMBER P22
Q4 ............................................................... 261, 281 Q1 (a & b) ................................................... 164, 174
Q5 ................................................................. 97, 110 Q1 (c) ............................................................. 41, 56
2015 NOVEMBER P22 Q2 (a) ............................................................. 42, 56
Q1 (a & b) ....................................................... 59, 61 Q2 (b) ......................................................... 165, 174
Q1 (c to f)........................................................ 39, 54 Q2 (c & d) ................................................... 153, 155
Q2 (a) .......................................................... 177, 179 Q3 .............................................................. 237, 244
Q2 (b to d) .................................................. 163, 173 Q4 (a & b) ................................................... 264, 284
Q3 (a) .......................................................... 213, 228 Q4 (c) ............................................................. 21, 25
Q3 (b & c) ....................................................... 66, 70 Q5 .............................................................. 214, 229
Q4 ............................................................... 262, 282
Chapter 1 18 Accounting Basics
CHAPTER 1 ACCOUNTING BASICS

QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q1 (e)
John Trail recently started using computerised accounts software. State two benefits John Trail gains from
using Information and Communications Technology (ICT) in book-keeping. *2+
QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (c & d)

Jack Lightbourne is concerned that his business is not performing as well as those of his competitors. He is
considering changing some of the figures in the final accounts so the results look better. He suggested the
following:
1 Inventory should be valued at sales price because that is how much it will bring into the business.
2 An existing provision for doubtful debts based on past experience should be eliminated.
Bad debts should only be written off when clearly a customer will not pay.
REQUIRED
(c) (i) State the bases on which inventory and trade receivables should be valued. *2+
(ii) Identify and explain the accounting concept which should be applied when valuing
inventory and trade receivables. *3+
(d) Explain two reasons why an accountant would consider it is professionally unethical to improve
the financial results of Jack Lightbourne by making the adjustments suggested. *4+

Large companies apply international accounting standards when preparing their accounts.
REQUIRED
Explain two benefits of a system of international accounting standards. *2+
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P22 Q1

Leung commenced business on 1 April 2010 with inventory $500 and bank $6 000.
Leung also has a bank loan of $3 500 which is repayable in full on 31 March 2013.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate on 1 April 2010, the
(i) owner's capital *1+
(ii) capital employed *1+
In the first days of trading, Leung completed the following transactions.

(i) Paid rent, $200, by cheque.
(ii) Purchased goods, $1 500, on credit from Ying.
(iii) Sold goods costing $1 000, for $1 800, on credit to Tung.
(iv) Purchased office equipment, $4 000, paying by cheque.
(v) Paid his account to Ying of $1 500 and was allowed 4% cash discount.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table below. The first item has been completed as an example.
Book of prime Effect on current Effect on current

Item Effect on capital
entry assets liabilities
(i) Cash book -$200 No effect -$200
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
*16+
On 31 May 2010, Leung extracted the following balances from his books.
$
Gross profit 6 650
Inventory 4 600
Bank loan 3 500
Trade Receivables 1 200
Trade Payables 2 100
Office equipment 4 000
Bank (Dr) 1 750
Discount received 150
Rent and expenses 3 850
Capital ?
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the trial balance at 31 May 2010. *10+
QUESTION 5 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q2 (d)/NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q2 (f)/MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (e)
Jayani is considering the purchase of a new computerised book-keeping system.
State two benefits that Jayani will gain from using Information and Communications Technology (ICT) in
book-keeping. *2+
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q1 (e)
Complete the table below to show the effect of each transaction on the assets, liabilities and capital of
Akrnal. The first transaction has been completed as an example.
Assets Liabilities Capital

(i) Purchased goods on credit $130 +$130 +$130 No effect
(ii) Goods costing $800, sold on credit for $1 130
(iii) Paid creditor $500 by cheque, less 3% cash discount.
*6+
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q4 (d)
Anika is considering taking the following actions to improve her working capital.
1 Obtain a long-term loan of $10 000.
2 Hold a sale of 'slow moving' inventory with original cost of $4 000, the sale to raise $3200 in cash.
3 Purchase non-current assets of $8 000 and additional inventory of $2 000.
4 Pay accounts payable of $5 000, taking a cash discount of 4%.
REQUIRED
Complete the following table showing the changes to working capital. The first transaction has been
completed as an example.
(Increase, decrease, Amount of

Action
unchanged) change ($)
Obtain a long term loan, $10 000. Increased $10,000
Sale of inventory (cost $4 000) for $3 200 cash.
Purchase non-current assets $8 000 and inventory $2 000, on credit
Pay accounts payable, $5 000, taking cash discount of 4%.
*6+
QUESTION 8 MAY 2014 P22 Q1 (a & e)
(a) (i) Explain the difference between book-keeping and accounting. [2]
(ii) Explain the accounting entity principle. [2]
The following balances were extracted from the books of Fashran on 30 April 2014.
$
Trade payables 6 450
Trade receivables 9 230
Revenue 68 400
Purchases 29 800
Inventory 1 May 2013 5 100
Expenses 22 350
Bank overdraft 830
Non-current assets 24 000
Provision for depreciation – Non-current assets 7 800
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare the trial balance showing Fashran’s capital at 30 April 2014. [5]
QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P21 Q2 (d)

State two benefits to Arden of using Information Communication Technology (ICT) in his bookkeeping and
accounting. [2]

Aina and Barry are considering ways to improve the profit for the year of the business. They suggest the
following changes.
1 Remove the provision for doubtful debts from the income statement.
2 Increase the value of the premises from cost to the current market value.
3 Reduce the depreciation rate on computers from 30% to 10% per annum.
4 Record expenses paid without adjustment for amounts owing.
REQUIRED
Name the accounting principle/concept which would not be complied with if Aina and Barry implemented
the suggestions.
Accounting
Suggestions
principle/concept
[4]

John is considering the following proposals to improve his profit for the year.
1 Change the depreciation methods for non-current assets.
2 Remove the provision for doubtful debts from the financial statements.
3 Value the inventory at market price.
4 Place a value on the skill of the workforce in the financial statements.
5 Exclude expenses owing from the income statement.
REQUIRED
Name the accounting principle/concept which would not be complied with if each proposal was
implemented. The first one has been completed as an example.
Proposal Accounting principle/concept

1 Change the depreciation methods for non-current Assets Consistency
2 Remove the provision for doubtful debts from the financial
statements
3 Value the inventory at market price
4 Place a value on the skill of the workforce in the financial
statements
5 Exclude expenses owing from the income statement

Valda is considering the use of Information and Communications Technology (ICT) to prepare her books of
account.
REQUIRED
State two benefits to Valda of using Information and Communications Technology (ICT). [2]
QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q4 (c)

Zahin is considering changes to his accounting policies.
REQUIRED
Complete the table naming one principle or concept which has not been complied with if each proposed
action is implemented. The first item has been completed as an example.
Proposed action Principle or concept

Revalue his premises, recording the increase in market value as a profit Historic cost
Include a value for business reputation in his income statement
Record his drawings in the income Statement
Stop charging depreciation on non-current assets for the year
Do not provide for trade debts which are probably irrecoverable
[4]
CHAPTER 1 SOLUTIONS
 Improved accuracy
 Faster to process transactions
 Ability to process high volumes of information
 Automatic performance of reconciliations
 Ease of storing large amounts of data
 Security of data on computer records
QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (c & d)

(c) (i) Inventory - lower of cost and net realisable value
Trade receivables - expected collectible amount
(ii) Prudence
The correct valuation base ensures profit is not overstated and assets are not overstated
OR True and fair view is shown
(d)  Accountants work with generally accepted rules such as accounting standards
 Accountants are expected by profession and public to produce reliable financial
information.
 Professional standards are more important than individual organisations
 Preparing accounts for the temporary benefit of one individual or organisation, even an
employer, is against these rules and training
 An accountant could be penalised legally or professionally for not following agreed
practice.

 They improve comparability between financial statements internationally
 Fewer rules make accounts more understandable to an international audience
 Information is more reliable with fewer rules and practices to follow
 Reduces variability in accounting rules and practices internationally.

(a) (i) Owner's capital is $3 000 ($6 000 + $500  $3 500)
(ii) Capital employed is $6 500 ($6 000 + $500)
(b) Book of prime Effect on current Effect on current

Item Effect on capital
entry assets liabilities
(i) Cash book  $200 No effect  $200
(ii) Purchase journal + $1 500 + $1 500 No effect
(iii) Sales journal + $800 No effect + $800
(iv) Cash book  $4 000 No effect No effect
(v) Cash book  $1 440  $1 500 + $60
(c) Trial balance at 31 May 2010

$ $
Gross profit 6 650
Inventory 4 600
Bank loan 3 500
Trade Receivables 1 200
Trade Payables 2 100
Bank (Dr) 1 750
Rent and expenses 3 850
Capital _____ 3 000
15 400 15 400
QUESTION 5NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q2 (d)/NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q2 (f)/MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (e)
 Faster processing speed
 capable of handling vast quantities of data
 facilitate to store large amounts of data
 facilitate enhanced security of data
 Improved accuracy
 Automatic final accounts and reconciliations

Analysis of Transactions
Assets Liabilities Capital
(i) Purchased goods on credit $130 +$130 +$130 No effect
+$1 130 + $330
(ii) Goods costing $800, sold on credit for $1 130 No effect
$800 ($1130$800)
Paid creditor $500 by cheque, less 3% cash $485
(iii) $500 +$15(500×3%)
discount. ($500$15)

Effects of Various Transactions on Working Capital
(Increase, decrease,
Action Amount of change ($)
unchanged)
Obtain a long term loan, $10 000. Increased $10,000
Sale of inventory (cost $4 000) for $3 200 cash. Decreased $800($4 000  $3 200)
Purchase non-current assets $8 000 and inventory $2
Decreased $8 000
000, on credit
Pay accounts payable, $5 000, taking cash discount of 4%. Increase $200 ($5 000 × 4%)
QUESTION 8 MAY 2014 P22 Q1 (a & e)

(a) (i) Book-keeping is usually restricted to the maintaining of all double entry records whereas
the role of accounting starts once the book-keeper finishes his work and that mainly
includes the preparation and interpretation of financial statements
(ii) Under ‘accounting entity concept’ the business is treated as being completely separate
and distinct from its owner(s). So in business records, personal transactions of the
owner(s) are not recorded.
(e) Fashran
Trial Balance at 30 April 2014
Dr Cr
$ $
Revenue 68 400
Purchases 29 800
Expenses 22 350
Bank overdraft 830
Capital _ ___ 7 000
90 480 90 480

 Increased accuracy
 Large storage capacity
 High Processing speed
 Enhanced security of data
 Quick production of financial statements and other reports

Suggestions Accounting concept
1 Remove the provision for doubtful debts from the income statement. Prudence/Matching
2 Increase the value of the premises from cost to the current market value. Historic cost
3 Reduce the depreciation rate on computers from 30% to 10% per annum. Consistency or Prudence
4 Record expenses paid without adjustment for amounts owing. Accrual/Matching

Proposal Accounting concept
1 Change the depreciation methods for noncurrent Assets Consistency
2 Remove the provision for doubtful debts from the financial statements Prudence or Matching
3 Value the inventory at market price Historic cost
4 Place a value on the skill of the workforce in the financial statements Money measurement
5 Exclude expenses owing from the income statement Matching/Accruals

The benefits of using ICT equipment are as follows
(i) The use of ICT helps to work many times faster than human beings.
(ii) It can easily process large volumes of data.
(iii) It produces accurate results i.e.it does not make mistakes if programmed correctly.
(iv) It reduces the staff requirements for businesses.
(v) Large volumes of data can be stored in a single disk which could equate to several drawers in a
filing cabinet.
(vi) It facilitates the preparation and automatic production of reports and analysis.
(vii) It facilitates automatic backup of accounting data
(viii) It can process multiple transactions simultaneously

Principle or concept
Revalue his premises recording the increase in market value as a profit Historic cost
Include a value for business reputation in his income statement Money measurement
Record his drawings in the income statement Entity concept
To stop charging depreciation on non-current assets for the year Consistency / Matching
Not to provide for trade debts which are probably irrecoverable. Prudence / Matching
Chapter 2 26 Books of Original Entry
CHAPTER 2 BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY

Sanjev is a retailer of furniture. Some of his business transactions, which occurred during the month of
April 2009, are listed below:
(i) Paid wages, $150, by cheque.
(ii) Sold on credit to D Sallis for $1 650, goods which had cost $950.
(iii) Returned surplus furniture, $325, to Evans & Co.
(iv) Received cheque from a trade receivable, G Black, who settled her account of $1 500 in full less 3
% cash discount.
(v) Closed the disposal of motor vehicle account. The vehicle had a net book value of $1 400 when it
was sold for $2 000.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table below. The first item has been completed as an example.
Item Book of original Account to be debited Account to be credited Effect on profit
entry and amount and amount for the year
$ $ $ $
(i) Cash Book Wages $150 Bank $150  $150
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
*17+
(b) Explain the purpose of the following documents.
(i) Invoice
(ii) Credit note *4+
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q1

The following balances were taken from the books of Salim Electrical Supplies on15 September 2009.
$
Sales 14 950 Cr
Inventory 1 800 Dr
Eastern Retailers 1 200 Dr
Khan Ltd 2 150 Dr
The following transactions took place:

September 16 Sold goods, list price $500 less 20 % discount, on credit to Khan Ltd
18 Received a cheque from Eastern Retailers in full settlement of their account less 5 % cash
discount
24 Khan Ltd returned goods, list price $50, purchased on 16 September
25 Sold goods, $250, on credit to Eastern Retailers
26 Sold goods, $500, to Khan Ltd for cash
30 Khan Ltd ceased trading. Salim Electrical Supplies decided to write off the balance of
Khan Ltd as a bad debt.
Additional information
1 The inventory was valued at $1 470 on 30 September 2009.
2 The financial year of Salim Electrical Supplies ends on 30 September 2009.
REQUIRED
(a) Name the type of discount that was deducted on 16 September 2009. *1+
(b) (i) Name the document issued to Khan Ltd on 24 September 2009. *1+
(ii) Name the document issued to Eastern Retailers on 25 September 2009 *1+
(c) Prepare the following ledger accounts.
Close the accounts at 30 September 2009 either by balancing the account or by transfer to the
income statement, as appropriate.
(i) Sales account *4+
(ii) Inventory account *3+
(iii) Eastern Retailers account *4+
(iv) Khan account *3+
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q1 (a to d)

John Trail recently started using computerised accounts software. He printed out the following account:
Marianne Hindle account
2009 Dr ($) Cr ($) Balance ($)
14 June Purchases 950 950
04 July Bank 931 19
04 July Discount 19 0
12 July Purchases 460 460
REQUIRED
(a) Identify two documents that Jack Trail would have used as a source of information in preparing
the above account. Tick the appropriate boxes
Document √
Cheque
Credit note
Debit note
Invoice *2+
(b) State the type of discount recorded in the ledger account on 4 July. *1+
(c) List the two books of original entry that would be used by John Trail if the transactions with
Marianne Hindle had been recorded in a manual book-keeping system. *2+
(d) Identify the heading under which Marianne Hindle’s account would be recorded in John Trail’s
balance sheet at 12 July. Tick the appropriate box
Heading √
Non-current assets
Current assets
Current liabilities
Non-current liabilities *1+
QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P21 Q1 (a & b)

Rahman is a debtor in the books of Goldy. On 1 April 2010 the balance on the account of Rahman was
$300.
The following transactions related to the account of Rahman for the month of April 2010.
April 6 Sold goods to Rahman, list price $500; allowed 20% trade discount.
12 Rahman returned goods bought on 6 April, list price $150.
18 Sold goods to Rahman, list price $200; allowed 15% trade discount.
30 Rahman paid the balance on his account on 1 April by cheque and was allowed 3% cash
discount.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the account of Rahman in the books of Goldy for the month of April 2010.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 May 2010. *7+
(b) (i) State two reasons why trade discount was given to Rahman. *2+
(ii) Name the book of prime entry in which Goldy will record the transaction on 12 April. *1+
(iii) Name the document to be issued by Goldy for the returned goods on 12 April. *1+

The following balances were taken from the books of Dilshan on 1 September 2010:
$
Insurance 280 Dr
Gul& Co 450 Dr
The following transactions took place during September 2010:
September 1 Dilshan paid, by cheque, the annual insurance premium, $360, for the year to 31 August
2011.
September 15 Dilshan sold, on credit to Gul and Co, goods with a list price of $1 600 and allowed 15%
trade discount.
September 20 Gul& Co paid the balance at 1 September 2010 less 2% cash discount. Dilshan prepared
his financial statements on 30 September 2010.
REQUIRED
(a) (i) Name an alternative format to ‘T’ accounts. *1+
(ii) State one benefit of this format compared with ‘T’ accounts. *2+
(b) Prepare the following ledger accounts for the month of September 2010. Make any necessary
transfers to the income statement. Balance the accounts and bring down the balance.
(i) Insurance account
(ii) Gul & Co account *10+
(c) State in which of Dilshan’s ledgers the following accounts would appear.
Account Ledger
Insurance
Gul & Co *2+
(d) (i) Name the document which was sent to Gul & Co recording the transaction of 15
September 2010. *1+
(ii) Name the book of prime (original) entry in which Dilshan recorded this transaction. *1+
(e) (i) Explain why Dilshan did not include all of the insurance paid on 1 September 2010 in his
income statement for the year ended 30 September 2010. *2+
(ii) State the accounting principle that Dilshan applied. *1+

Joe’s business had the following assets and liabilities on 31 March 2011:
$
Liabilities due within one year 25 000
Current assets 35 000
Liabilities due in over one year 50 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the:
(i) Capital
(ii) Capital employed *2+
During the month of April 2011, Joe recorded the following transactions:
1 Bought goods on credit from Henry, $200.
2 Sold goods costing $300, to Mary for the selling price of $500, on credit.
3 Sent Henry a cheque for $190 in full settlement of his debt of $200.
4 Mary returned goods with a selling price of $50.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the grid below and show the amount and effect on capital of each transaction.
The first transaction has been completed as an example.
Accounts to be Accounts to be
Transaction Book of prime entry Effect on capital ($)
debited credited
1 Purchases Journal Purchases Henry $ Nil
2
3
4
*12+
(c) State the purpose of the three documents used in transactions 2 to 4 above.
(i) Invoice *2+
(ii) Cheque counterfoil *2+
(iii) Credit note *2+

Place a tick (✓) in the appropriate box to show whether each of the following is an account, a book of
prime entry or both an account and a book of prime entry. The first item has been completed as an
example.
a ledger account and a
ledger account book of prime entry
book of prime entry
Inventory ✓
Purchases journal
Cash book
Provision for depreciation
*3+
QUESTION 8 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q1 (a & b)
Christos is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following details relate to the account of his
customer Michelle for the month of July 2011.
$
July 1 Michelle owed Christos 200
July 7 Christos sent an invoice to Michelle 150
July 16 Christos sent a credit note to Michelle 8
July 31 Michelle sent Christos a cheque 195
July 31 Christos allowed Michelle cash discount 5
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the account of Michelle in the books of Christos. Bring down the balance on 1 August
2011. *6+
(b) Name the book of prime entry in which Christos would record the transaction of 16 July 2011. *1+
QUESTION 9 MAY 2012 P21 Q1 (a to c)

Yang is a supplier of goods to Win. The following transactions took place in March 2012.
2012
March 01 Win owed $3 000 to Yang.
March 17 Win purchased goods from Yang with a list price of $1 000. Yang allowed Win 20% trade
discount.
March 20 Win returned goods purchased on 17 March, list price of $200.
March 30 Win informed Yang that he had ceased trading and was unable to pay his debt in full. Win
offered Yang $650 in full settlement, which Yang accepted.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the account of Win in the ledger of Yang. *7+
(b) State the name of the document that Yang would send to Win, following delivery of the goods
returned on 20 March 2012. *1+
(c) State the name of the book of prime entry used to write off the bad debt. *1+
QUESTION 10 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (b & c)

Giorgos commenced business on 1 May 2012 with the following assets and liabilities.
The following were some of the transactions completed in early May:
May 1 Paid Early Ltd $570, after deducting $30 cash discount
May 2 Bought office furniture on credit for $3000
May 3 Paid wages in cash, $250
May 4 Customer returned goods selling price $745 (cost price $630)
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table for the above transactions. The first item has been completed
as an example. State clearly if there is no effect on owner’s capital.
Source Book of Effect on
document prime entry owner’s capital
May 1 Paid Early Ltd $570, after deducting $30 Cheque Cash book +$30
cash discount counterfoil
May 2 Bought office furniture on credit for $3000
May 3 Paid wages in cash, $250
May 4 Customer returned goods selling price $745
(cost price $630)
*9+
(c) Prepare the account of Early Ltd.

Balance the account on 31 May 2012 and bring down the balance. *3+
QUESTION 11 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q1 (a to d)

Savvas is a supplier of goods to Akmal. Savvas allows 15% trade discount on all purchases made by Akmal.
The following transactions took place in September 2011.
September 1 Akmal owed $1 500 to Savvas.
September 8 Akmal purchased goods from Savvas with a list price of $800.
September 10 Akmal returned some of the goods purchased on 8 September with a list price of $240.
September 25 Akmal sent a cheque in full settlement for the amount owing on 1 September, less 4%
cash discount.
REQUIRED
(a) Write up the account of Savvas in the ledger of Akmal. Bring down the balance on 1 October
2011. *7+
(b) State one reason why Savvas offers Akmal a trade discount. *2+
(c) State the name of the document that Savvas would send to Akmal for the return of goods on 10
September 2011. *1+
(d) Place a tick (√) under the correct heading to show the ledger in which Akmal would record each
of the following accounts.
Item (i) has been completed as an example.
Account Sales Ledger Purchase Ledger Nominal/general Ledger

(i) Sales √
(ii) Savvas (Supplier)
(iii) Heat & light
(iv) Capital
(v) G.R.G. Ltd (Customer)
*4+
The following balances were taken from the books of Asir on 1 July 2012.
$
Stationery 60 Dr
Rapid Office Supplies 400 Cr
The following transactions took place in the three months ended 30 September 2012:
July 30 Paid the balance owing on 1 July 2012 to Rapid Office Supplies by cheque, after deducting
4% cash discount.
August 18 Purchased stationery on credit from Rapid Office Supplies, list price $500, and received 10%
trade discount.
August 20 Purchased stationery for cash, $150.
September 3 Returned to Rapid Office Supplies stationery purchased on 18 August, list price $50.
Asir prepared his financial statements on 30 September 2012. On that date inventory of stationery was
valued at $225.
REQUIRED
(a) State the meaning of the debit balance on the stationery account on 1 July 2012. *1+
(b) Prepare Stationery account and Rapid Office Supplies account. Balance the accounts at 30
September 2012 and show the transfer to the income statement where appropriate. *9+
(c) State the document sent by Rapid Office Supplies to Asir for the:
(i) Purchase of stationery on 18 August 2012 *1+
(ii) Return of stationery on 3 September 2012. *1+
(d) On 30 September 2012 Asir extracted a trial balance and prepared his financial statements. State
the amount for stationery which would appear in each of the following
$
Trial balance
Income statement
Balance sheet *3+
(e) State the section of Asir’s balance sheet on 30 September 2012 in which the following balances
would appear:
(i) Stationery *1+
(ii) Rapid Office Supplies *1+
(f) (i) Explain why Asir did not transfer all of the stationery purchased in the three month
period to the income statement. *2+
(ii) Name the accounting concept applied by Asir. *1+

Jane started business on 1 October 2012 with a motor van, $1500, shop fixtures, $250, and cash, $500. To
start the business she had borrowed $600 from Peter.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following trial balance showing clearly the value of the capital.
Trial Balance at 1 October 2012
Debit ($) Credit ($)
Motor van
Shop fixtures
Cash
Peter – loan
Capital _____ _____
_____ _____ *4+
(b) Jane buys and sells goods on credit. She maintains a full set of accounts.
The table below contains a list of transactions carried out in the first week of trading. Complete
the table below for each transaction, stating clearly the amount, if any, of increase or decrease in
the value of capital. The first transaction has been completed as an example.
Book of Account to Account to Effect on
Transaction
original entry be debited be credited capital $
Purchases
Purchased goods, $600, on credit from Punto Purchases Punto No effect
journal
Sold goods for $750 (cost price $300) on credit
to Yuen
Sold all the shop fixtures for cash, $200

Paid wages by cash, $150
Yuen returned goods, valued at $100
*16+
QUESTION 14 MAY 2013 P21 Q1 (a to e)

Mary started business on 1 January 2012, renting premises at $12 000 per annum, paid by instalments on
the first day of January, April, July, and October.
On 1 August 2012 Mary let part of the premises to another business for $5400 per annum, to be paid by
instalments on the first day of August, November, February, and May.
Mary paid the rent on 1 January, 1 April, and 1 July 2012.
The tenant paid rent to Mary on 1 August and 1 November 2012.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the rent payable account for the year ended 31 December 2012.
Balance the account and bring the balance down on 1 January 2013. *5+
(b) Explain the meaning of the balance on 1 January 2013. *2+
(c) Prepare the rent received account for the year ended 31 December 2012.
Balance the account and bring the balance down on 1 January 2013. *5+
(d) Explain the meaning of the balance on 1 January 2013. *2+
Mary bought a motor vehicle, $15 000.
(e) State the section of Mary’s balance sheet (statement of financial position) where this will be
shown. *1+

The following are some of the transactions carried out by Tay, a retailer, during April 2013.
(i) Paid insurance $470 by cheque.
(ii) Sold goods on credit to J Dins, cost price $6 400 plus 80% mark up.
(iii) Paid amount owing to P Lee by cheque, $1 800, less 4% cash discount.
(iv) Returned damaged goods costing $590 to R & R Ltd.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the table below for transactions (ii) to (iv). Transaction (i) has been completed as an
example.
Accounts debited and Accounts credited Effect on profit for
Transaction Source document
amount and amount year
(i) Cheque counterfoil Insurance $470 Bank $470 –$470
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
*12+
(b) Explain why Tay received cash discount from P Lee. *2+
QUESTION 16 MAY 2013 P22 Q1 (a to d)

Jamie provided the following information on 1 May 2012.
$
Non-current assets at net book value 14 000
Prepayment of insurance 260
Accrual for rent 350
Bank overdraft 324
Capital ?
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare an opening journal entry at 1 May 2012 to show the capital at that date.
A narrative is required. *4+
The following payments were made during the year.
1 Insurance, $840, including $300 for the quarter ended 30 June 2013.
2 Rent, $11 350, not including $1 000 for the month of April 2013.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the insurance account for the year ended 30 April 2013. Balance the account and bring
down the balance at 1 May 2013. *5+
(c) Prepare the rent account for the year ended 30 April 2013. Balance the account and bring down
the balance on 1 May 2013. *5+
(d) State the accounting principle applied in (b) and (c). *2+

Mary buys goods on credit from Kim. Mary receives 14% trade discount on all purchases and takes
advantage of the 5% cash discount offered for payment within 14 days. The following information is
available:
2013
June 1 Mary owed Kim $680 for goods purchased on 29 May 2013.
June 4 Kim sold goods to Mary, list price $800.
June 5 Mary sent Kim a cheque for the balance owing on 1 June.
June 8 Mary returned goods purchased on 4 June, list price $100, to Kim.
June 28 Kim sold further goods to Mary, list price $300.
June 29 Kim received a cheque from Mary for goods purchased on 4 June.
June 30 Mary received details from Kim of her transactions during the month.
REQUIRED
(a) Name the document and book of prime entry used by Kim on the dates below: *4+
Date Business document Book of prime entry
4 June
8 June
(b) State the name of the document Mary received on 30 June. *2+
(c) Write up the ledger account of Mary in Kim’s books. Balance the account and bring down the
balance on 1 July 2013. *10+
(d) Indicate with a tick (✓) the ledger in which the following accounts would appear. The first item
has been completed as an example.
Account Sales ledger Purchase ledger General ledger

Sales 
Drawings
Kline Ltd (Supplier)
Millar and Son (Customer)
Insurance
*4+
(e) State three advantages of a computerised system of accounting. *6+

Kulbir commenced trading on 1 January 2013 with cash $350, bank $3 000, motor vehicle $6 500 and a
loan from Sanjay of $5 000.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare Kulbir’s opening entries in the general journal and show her capital at 1 January 2013. A
narrative is required. [3]
On 28 January 2013 Kulbir sold her motor vehicle to Aktar Allam on credit for $6 500. On the same day
she purchased on credit from Aston Motors Limited a new vehicle for $10 000.
(b) Show the entries in the general journal to record the sale of the old motor vehicle and the
purchase of the new motor vehicle. [6]
QUESTION 19 MAY 2014 P21 Q1 (d to f)

On 1 April, Trinity Stores owed Akma $800. During the month of April, Akma recorded the following
transactions with Trinity Stores.
8 April Akma supplied goods to Trinity Stores with a list price of $900, less 20% trade discount.
10 April Trinity Stores returned goods supplied by Akma on 8 April with a list price of $100.
18 April Trinity Stores paid the balance due on 1 April less 2½% cash discount.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the account of Trinity Stores in the books of Akma. Balance the account and bring down
the balance. [6]
(e) Name the document that Akma would issue to Trinity Stores on 10 April. [1]
(f) State two reasons why Akma might give Trinity Stores trade discount. [2]
QUESTION 20 MAY 2014 P21 Q2 (a)

Ghani is preparing his financial statements. He provided the following information.
1 April 2013 Balances b/d Insurance $500 Dr
Commission receivable $250 Cr
Cash book entries 1 April 2013 to 31 March 2014:

Insurance paid by cheque $4 000
Commission received by cheque $1 200
On 31 March 2014:
1 Insurance of $150 was prepaid
2 Commission receivable of $200 was due to Ghani.
REQUIRED
Prepare the following ledger accounts, for the year ended 31 March 2014, showing the transfer to the
income statement. Balance the accounts and bring down the balances. [8]
QUESTION 21 MAY 2014 P22 Q1 (b to d)

Fashran sells goods to Hajar. On 1 April Hajar owed Fashran $2 100. The following transactions occurred in
April 2014.
5 April Fashran sold goods on credit to Hajar, list price $2 000, less 20% trade discount.
7 April Hajar returned goods purchased on the 5 April, list price $240.
18 April Hajar paid the balance of her account at 1 April and was allowed 2% cash discount.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the account of Hajar in the ledger of Fashran for April 2014. Balance the account and
bring down the balance. [5]
(c) Name the document that Fashran will issue on the following dates:
Date Document
5 April Fashran sold goods on credit to Hajar
7 April Hajar returned goods to Fashran purchased on the 5 April
30 April Fashran issues a summary of Hajar’s account for the month of April
[3]
(d) State the sub division of the ledger in which the account of Hajar would appear. [1]

Adil’s transactions in August 2014 included the following.
August 2 Purchased goods on credit from Tiara, $1 500, less 20% trade discount.
August 5 Returned goods to Tiara, list price $300.
August 7 Paid a cheque to Tiara, $500, after deducting $6 cash discount.
August 9 Sold non-current assets on credit to D Costa, at book value, $4 000.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following table for the above transactions. The first item has been completed as an
example.
Date Source document Book of prime entry Effect on owner’s capital
August 2 Purchase invoice Purchases journal No effect
August 5
August 7
August 9
[9]
(b) State the sub division of the ledger containing each of the following accounts:
Account Sub division of the ledger
Purchases
Tiara
Non-current assets
D Costa
[4]

Maria had the following assets and liabilities on 1 May 2014.
$
Inventory 1 950
Amount payable – Midland Telecoms 400
Bank 550 Dr
5% Bank loan (repayable 30 April 2018) 2 500
Fixtures and fittings 1 500
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following.
(i) Owner’s capital *1+
The following related to the purchase of telephone services for the three months to 31 July 2014.
31 May Paid Midland Telecoms’ balance on 1 May 2014 by cheque.

26 June Received a telephone bill from Midland Telecoms $1 200.
15 July Paid telephone bill received on 26 June by cheque less 2% cash discount.
31 July Prepared an income statement for the three months to 31 July 2014. It was
estimated that $130 was owing.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the following ledger accounts for the three months to 31 July 2014.
(i) Midland Telecoms account *5+
(ii) Telephone expenses account *4+
(c) Name and explain the accounting concept applied in estimating the telephone expenses owing
on 31 July 2014. *3+
The following were some of the transactions which took place in July.
5 July Purchased inventory on credit.

10 July Goods returned by a credit customer.
20 July Paid wages in cash.
25 July Disposed of fixtures and fittings on credit.
REQUIRED
(d) Complete the following table for the above transactions naming the source document prepared
by Maria and the book of prime entry used. The first item has been completed as an example.
Source document Book of prime entry
5 July Purchase invoice Purchases journal
10 July
20 July
25 July *6+
QUESTION 24 MAY 2015 P21 Q1 (c)

The following were some of the transactions completed in April 2015.
April 9 Sold goods on credit to Yash.

April 11 Yash returned goods sold on 9 April as they were damaged.
April 14 Paid wages by cheque.
April 19 Purchased office fixtures on credit from Equip Limited.
REQUIRED
Complete the following table. The first item has been completed as an example.
Source Book of Account Account
Date Transaction
Document prime entry Debited Credited
April 9 Sold goods on credit to Yash. Sales invoice Sales journal Yash Sales
April 11 Yash returned goods sold on 9
April as damaged.
April 19 Purchased office fixtures on
credit from Equip Limited.
[12]

The following balances were available from the books of Priya on 1 April 2015.
$
Putil 3 000 credit
Wages 1 750 debit
The following transactions took place in April 2015.
April 5 Paid Putil half of his outstanding balance on 1 April by cheque, less 2% cash discount
April 8 Bought goods on credit from Putil, $800, less 20% trade discount
April 19 Paid wages in cash $450
April 23 Returned goods, list price $200, purchased on 5 April
April 26 Sold a non-current asset at book value, $2 000, on credit
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following table. The first item has been completed as an example. Where the
owner’s capital is not affected, write ‘No effect’.
Book of Effect on
Source
Date Transaction prime owner’s
document
entry capital ($)
April 5 Paid Putil half of his outstanding balance on 1 Cheque
April by cheque, less 2% cash discount Counterfoil Cash book +30
April 8 Bought goods on credit from Putil, $800, less
20% trade discount
April 23 Returned goods, list price $200, purchased on 8
April
April 26 Sold a non-current asset at book value, $2000,
on credit
[12]
(b) Prepare the account of Putil for the month of April 2015. Balance the account and bring down
the balance on 1 May 2015. [5]
Priya prepared her income statement on 30 April 2015. She calculated that wages, $150, were prepaid at
that date.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the wages account for the month of April 2015 including the transfer to the income
statement. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 May 2015. [3]
QUESTION 26 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q1 (a to c)

The following balances were taken from the books of Krul Limited on 1 July 2015.
$
Carston Garages account 200 credit
Motor van expenses account 3 200 debit
The following transactions took place in July 2015.

July 12 Paid Carston Garages their outstanding balance by cheque, deducting 3% cash discount
July 15 Purchased fuel for the motor van, on credit, from Carston Garages, $120
July 23 Paid motor van repairs by cheque, $200
July 26 Purchased new motor van tyres from Carston Garages on credit, $400, less 15% trade discount
1 Krul Limited prepared financial statements on 31 July 2015.
2 Motor van expenses, $125, were accrued on 31 July 2015.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the Carston Garages account for the year ended 31 July 2015. Balance the account and
bring down the balance on 1 August 2015. [5]
(b) Prepare the motor van expenses account for the year ended 31 July 2015. Make the transfer to
the income statement. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 August 2015. [5]
(c) Name the subdivision of the ledger containing each of the following accounts.
Account Subdivision of the ledger

Sales
T Wong (credit customer)
[2]
QUESTION 27 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q1 (c to f)
Abbie supplied the following information related to a credit customer, Izzat.
October 1 Balance owed by Izzat to Abbie $750
5 Sold goods on credit to Izzat, $1 800, less 20% trade discount
6 Izzat returned goods, list price $350
21 Received a cheque from Izzat, $800
22 The remaining balance on Izzat’s account was written off as irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(c) (i) Name the subdivision of the ledger containing Izzat’s account. [1]
(ii) Name the document issued by Abbie to Izzat on 5 October 2015. [1]
(d) Prepare the account of Izzat in the books of Abbie. [5]
(e) Prepare the general journal entry for the transaction on 22 October. A narrative is required. [3]
(f) State three benefits to Abbie of using Information Communication Technology (ICT) to record her
transactions. [3]
QUESTION 28 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q1

Faara had the following assets and liabilities on 1 May 2015.
$
Inventory 2 850
Trade receivable – Jaafar 600
Other payables – Electricity 200
Bank 450 Credit
5% Bank loan (30 September 2020) 5 000
Motor vehicle 4 500
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate Faara’s capital. *1+
The following transactions related to the account of Jaafar for the month ended 31 May 2015.
May 04 Sold goods to Jaafar, list price $1 500, allowed 15% trade discount.
05 Jaafar returned goods purchased on 4 May, list price $120.
16 Jaafar paid the amount owing on 1 May by cheque and was allowed 2% cash
discount.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the ledger account of Jaafar for the month of May 2015. Balance the account and bring
down the balance on 1 June 2015. *6+
(c) State two possible reasons why Faara allowed trade discount to Jaafar. *2+
The following information related to the electricity account for the month ended 31 May 2015.
May 17 Paid for electricity by cheque $440
31 Prepared the income statement. It was estimated that $55 was owed for electricity
at that date.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the electricity account for the month of May 2015. Balance the account and bring down
the balance on 1 June 2015. *4+
(e) Name the accounting concept applied to the calculation of electricity expense when preparing
the income statement at 31 May 2015. *1+
(f) Complete the following table for the transactions shown. Name the source document prepared
by Faara and the book of prime entry used, and state the effect of the transaction on her capital.
The first item has been completed as an example. *6+

document prime owner’s
entry capital ($)
May 9 Sold goods on credit for $900, Sales Sales +300
(cost $600) invoice journal
14 Customer returned goods, bought
by him on 9 May for $300.
21 Paid wages in cash $150.
QUESTION 29 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (a, b & e)"

Gabi is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following details relate to the account of her
customer, Kacela, for the month of September 2016.
$
September 1 Opening balance owed by Kacela to Gabi 900
9 Invoice sent to Kacela 730
14 Credit note sent to Kacela 25
30 Cheque received and banked by Gabi 860
30 Discount allowed by Gabi 40
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the account of Kacela in the books of Gabi. Balance the account and bring down the
balance on 1 October. [6]
(b) Name the sub-division of Gabi’s ledger which will contain the account of Kacela. [1]
(e) Complete the table for the transactions shown. Name the source document and the book of
prime entry used by Gabi. The first item has been completed as an example.
Sold goods on credit Sales invoice Sales journal
Paid wages in cash
Purchased office fixtures on credit
Goods returned by a credit customer
[6]

Complete the following table for each of Fabio’s transactions in July 2016. If the capital is not affected
write ‘No effect’. The first transaction has been completed as an example.
Transaction Book of Account to Account to Effect on

prime entry be debited be credited capital $
Sold goods costing $900 on credit to Noah for Sales Journal Noah Revenue +$600
the list price of $1 500. (Sales)
Noah returned goods with a list price of $100
Paid Sophie a cheque for $610.
A debt, $230, owed by Zain was written off.
[12]
QUESTION 31 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (a)

Lyana is preparing her financial statements. She provides the following information.
1 October 2015 Rent receivable account $2 500 Credit
The bank account contained the following entries.

Receipts
31 December 2015 Rent received by cheque $6 700
30 April 2016 Rent received by cheque $3 100
Payments
31 January 2016 Refund for overpayment of rent receivable $700
The rent receivable amounts to $12 000 a year.
REQUIRED
Prepare the rent receivable account for the year ended 30 September 2016. Make the transfer to the
income statement and bring down the balance on 1 October 2016. [5]
CHAPTER 2 SOLUTIONS
(a) Book of original entry Debit Credit Effect on profit
(i) Cash Book Wages $150 Bank $150  $150
(ii) Sales Journal D Sallis $1 650 Sales $1 650 +$700
(iii) Returns Outwards Journal Evans & Co $325 Returns outwards $325 Nil
(iv) Cash Book Bank $1 455 G Black $1 500 $45
Discount Allowed $45
(v) General Journal Vehicle Disposal $600 Income statement $600 +$600
(b) (i) An invoice may be of two types. The original sales invoice is given to the customer but its
copy is retained by the business to record credit sales in the sales journal. The purchases
journal is however prepared from original invoices received from suppliers. The form of
invoices may vary from business to business but they all show the same basic
information and include name of the supplier on the top with name of the customer
(business), the rates, quantities and total amounts of goods purchased.
(ii) When goods are returned by a customer or a price adjustment is needed then supplier
(seller) may issue to customer a credit note to reduce the amount owed by the
customer. A copy of this credit note is retained by the supplier (seller) and is used to
prepare returns inwards journal. As the purpose of a credit note is to reduce the amount
owed by the customer so it should not be recorded in purchases or sales journals. Where
goods returned were originally sold after allowing some trade discount, then like sales
invoices amount entered in credit notes must be net of trade discount.

(a) Trade or Quantity discount
(b) (i) Credit note
(ii) Sales invoice
(c) Sales account
2009 $ 2009 $
Sep 30 Income statement 16 100 Sep 16 Balance b/f 14 950
Sep 16 Khan Ltd 400
Sep 25 Eastern Retailer 250
_____ Sep 26 Cash 500
16 100 16 100
Inventory account
2009 $ 2009 $
Sep 16 Balance b/f 1 800 Sep 30 Income statement 1 800
Sep 30 Income statement 1 470 Sep 30 Balance c/d 1 470
3 270 3 270
Oct 01 Balance b/d 1 470
Eastern Retailers account

2009 $ 2009 $
Sep 16 Balance b/d 1 200 Sep 18 Bank 1 140
Sep 25 Sales 250 Sep 18 Discount (allowed) 60
____ Sep 30 Balance c/d 250
1 450 1 450
Oct 1 Balance b/d 250
Khan account
2009 $ 2009 $
Sep 16 Balance b/d 2 150 Sep 24 Returns inwards 40
Sep 16 Sales 400 Sep 27 Bad debts 2 510
2 550 2 550

(a) Cheque, Invoice
(b) Cash discount OR Settlement discount OR Discount received
(c) Cash book, Purchases journal
(d) Current liabilities

(a) Rahman Account
2010 $ 2010 $
Apr 01 Balance b/f 300 Apr 12 Sales Returns *$150–($150×20%)+ 120
06 Sales *$500 – ($500 × 20%)+ 400 30 Bank *$300 – ($300 × 3%)+ 291
18 Sales *$200 – ($200 × 15%)+ 170 30 Discount Allowed ($300 × 3%) 9
___ 30 Balance c/d 450
870 870
May 01 Balance b/d 450
(b) (i) To encourage Rahman to buy goods in larger quantity

To increase sales volume of Goldy’s business
To recognise Rahman as a regular and worthy customer
(ii) Return inwards Journal or Return inwards Day Book
(iii) Credit Note

(a) (i) Running balance format or three column ledger
(ii) After each transaction the accounts balances are available
In computerised accounting accounts are usually prepared using this format
(b) Insurance account
2010 $ 2010 $
Sep 01 Balance (prepaid) b/f 280 Sep 30 Income statement ($360  1/12) 30
Sep 01 Bank 360 Sep 30 Balance c/d 610
640 640
Gul & Co account

2010 $ 2010 $
Sep 01 Balance b/f 450 Sep 20 Bank *$450 – ($450  2%)+ 441
Sep 15 Sales *$1 600 – ($1 600  15%)+ 1 360 Sep 20 Discount allowed ($450  2%) 9
____ Sep 30 Balance c/d 1 360
1 810 1 810
(c) Account Ledger

Insurance General or Nominal Ledger
Gul & Co Sales Ledger
(d) (i) Sales invoice

(ii) Sales journal or sales day book
(e) (i) The insurance is for a 12 month period to 31 August 2011. Only one month of this
payment relates to the current year ended 30 September 2010.
(ii) Matching/Accrual concept

(a) (i) Capital = ($120 0000 + $35 000) – ($25 000 + $50 000)
= $80 000
(ii) Capital Employed = $80 000 *a(i)+ + $50 000
= $130 000
(b)
Transaction Book of original entry Debit entry Credit entry Effect on capital ($)
(i) Purchases Journal Purchases Henry Nil
(ii) Sales journal Mary Sales +200 ($500 − $300)
(iii) Cash Book Henry Bank & Discount received +10
(iv) Sales returns journal Sales returns Mary -20 ($50 − $30)
(c) (i) The invoice is a bill prepared by seller of goods or services and submitted to the buyer
and contains a precise list of fees or charges
(ii) Cheque counterfoil is that part of a cheque book which is retained by Joe as a record of
the payment to Henry.
(iii) A document sent by a seller to its customer, stating that a certain amount has been
credited to his account mainly due to return of goods.

a ledger account and a
Ledger account Book of prime entry
book of prime entry
Inventory ✓
Purchase journal ✓
Cash book ✓
Provision for depreciation ✓

(a) Books of Christos
Michelle Account
$ $
Jul 1 Balance b/f 200 Jul 16 Return inwards 8
Jul 7 Sales 150 Jul 31 Bank 195
Jul 31 Discount Allowed 5
___ Jul 31 Balance c/d 142
350 350
Aug 1 Balance b/d 142
(b) Return inwards journal

(a) Books of Yang
Win account
2012 $ 2012 $
Mar 01 Balance b/f 3 000 Mar 20 Return in *$200 – ($200 × 20%)+ 160
Mar 17 Sales *$1 000 – ($1 000 × 20%)+ 800 Mar 30 Bank 650
____ Mar 30 Bad debts (balancing figure) 2 990
3 800 3 800
(b) Credit note
(c) General Journal
QUESTION 10 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (b & c)

(b) Source Effect on owner’s
Book of prime entry
document capital
May 1 Paid Early Ltd $570, after Cheque
Cash book +$30
deducting $30 cash discount counterfoil
May 2 Bought office furniture on
invoice General Journal
credit for $3 000 No effect
May 3 Payment
Paid wages in cash, $250 voucher or Cash Book –$250
wages sheet
May 4 Customer returned goods selling Copy of credit Returns Inwards
–$115
price $745 (cost price $630) note sent Journal
(c) Early Ltd account

2012 $ 2012 $
May 01 Bank 570 May 01 Balance b/f 1 200
May 01 Discount received 30
May 31 Balance c/d 600 _____
1 200 1 200
Jun 01 Balance b/d 600

(a) Savvas Account
2011 $ 2011 $
Sep 08 Returns out *$240(240×15%)+ 204 Sep 01 Balance b/f 1 500
Sep 25 Bank *($1 500($1 500×4%)+ 1 440 Sep 08 Purchases ,$800  ($800 × 15%)+ 680
Sep 25 Discount received ($1 500×4%) 60
Sep 30 Balance c/d 476 ____
2 180 2 180
(b) Savvas offers Akmal a trade discount as goods are sold to a fellow trader or giving trade discount
to customers is a custom of trade
(c) Credit note
(d) Analysis of Account Balances
Account Sales Ledger Purchase Ledger Nominal/general Ledger
(i) Sales √
(ii) Savvas (Supplier) √
(iii) Heat & light √
(iv) Capital √
(v) G.R.G. Ltd (Customer) √

(a) A debit balance represents an asset so it either represents unused stock of stationery worth $60
or prepayment for stationery amounting to $60.
(b) Stationery account
2012 $ 2012 $
July 01 Balance b/f 60 Sep 03 Rapid Supplies *$50  ($50×10%)+ 45
Aug 18 Rapid Office Supplies (500×90%) 450 Sep 30 Income statement (balancing fig.) 390
Aug 20 Cash 150 Sep 30 Balance c/d 225
660 660
Rapid Office Supplies account
2012 $ 2012 $
Jul 30 Discount received ($400 × 4%) 16 Jul 01 Balance b/f 400
Jul 30 Bank ($400  $16) 384 Aug 18 Stationery *$500  ($500 × 10%)+ 450
Sep 03 Stationery *$50  ($50 × 10%)+ 45
Sep 30 Balance c/d (balancing figure) 405 ___
850 850
(c) (i) Invoice
(ii) Credit note
$
Trial balance (amount paid) 615
Income statement (current year expense) 390
Balance sheet (closing inventory) 225
(e) (i) Current assets

(ii) Current liabilities
(f) (i) Under Matching concept only those items are matched against current revenue
which have been used up. As a result, only the used part of stationery was matched
against current year’s revenue.
(ii) Matching (Accruals) concept

(a) Trial Balance at 1 October 2012
Motor van 1500
Shop fixtures 250
Cash 500
Peter – loan 600
Capital ____ 1 650
2 250 2 250
(b) Book of Account to Account to Effect on

Transaction
original entry be debited be credited capital $
Purchased goods, $600, on Purchases
Purchases Punto No effect
credit from Punto journal
Sold goods for $750 (cost
Sales journal Yuen Sales +$450
price $300) on credit to Yuen
Sold all the shop fixtures for Fixtures
Cash book Cash –$50
cash, $200 (Disposals)
Paid wages by cash, $150 Cash book Wages Cash –$150
Yuen returned goods, valued Sales returns
Sales returns Yuen –$60
at $100 journal

(a) Rent Payable account
2012 $ 2012 $
Jan 01 Bank 3000 Dec 31 Income statement 12 000
Apr 01 Bank 3 000
Jul 01 Bank 3 000
Dec 31 Balance c/d (balancing figure) 3 000 _____
12 000 12 000
(b) Accrual for rent expense of $3 000 (other payables)
(c) Rent Received account
2012 $ 2012 $
5 1
Dec 31 Income statement($5 400× /12) 2 250 Aug 01 Bank ($5 400 × /4) 1 350
1
Dec 31 Balance c/d (balancing figure) 450 Nov 01 Bank $5 400 × /4) 1 350
2 700 2 700
(d) Rent Received in advance (other payables) of $450
(e) Non-current asset

(a)
Accounts debited Accounts credited and Effect on profit for
Transaction Source document
and amount amount year
(i) Cheque counterfoil Insurance $470 Bank $470 –$470
(ii) Sales invoice J Dins $11 520 (W 1) Sales $11 520 (6400+5120) +$5 120 (6400×80%)
(iii) Bank $1 728
Cheque counterfoil P Lee $1 800 +$72
Discount received $72
(iv) Credit note R & R Ltd $590 Purchase returns $590 Nil
(b) Tay received discount as a reward for making early payment to P Lee.
QUESTION 16 MAY 2013 P22 Q1 (a to d)

(a) Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
Non-current assets at NBV 14 000
Prepaid Insurance 260
Accrued rent 350
Bank overdraft 324
Capital (balancing figure) 15 300
(Entry made to record purchase of business)
(b) Insurance account

2012 $ 2013 $
May 01 Balance (prepayment) b/d 260 Apr 30 Income statement (Bal. figure) 900
2
2013 Apr 30 Balance (prepaid) c/d (300× /3) 200
Apr 30 Bank _840 ____
1 100 1 100
(c) Rent Payable account

2013 $ 2012 $
Apr 30 Bank 11 350 May 1 Balance (accrued) b/d 350
Apr 30 Balance (accrued) c/d 1 000 2013
_____ Apr 30 Income statement (bal. figure) 12 000
12 350 12 350
May 1 Balance b/d 1 000
(d) Matching or accrual principle

(a)
Date Business document Book of prime entry
4 June Invoice Sales journal
8 June Credit note Sales returns journal
(b) Statement of account.

(c) Mary’s Account
2013 $ 2013 $
Jun 01 Balance b/f 680 Jun 05 Bank ($680  $34) 646
Jun 04 Sales *$800  ($800 × 14%)+ 688 Jun 05 Discount allowed ($680 × 5%) 34
Jun 28 Sales *$300  ($300 × 14%)+ 258 Jun 08 Sales returns *$100  ($100 × 14%)+ 86
Jun 29 Bank ($688  $86) 602
____ Jun 30 Balance c/d 258
1 626 1 626
Jul 01 Balance b/d 258
(d)
Account Sales ledger Purchase ledger General ledger
Sales GIVEN
Drawings 
Kline Ltd (Supplier) 
Millar and Son (Customer) 
Insurance 
(e)  Accuracy of information

 Data needs to be entered once
 High speed of processing information
 ability to process high volumes of information
 ability to performs reconciliation statements
 large storage capacity
 availability of account balances at all times

(a) General Journal
2013 Dr ($) Cr ($)
Jan 1 Cash 350
Bank 3 000
Motor vehicle 6 500
Loan 5 000
Capital 4 850
(Entry passed to start business by Kulbir)
(b) General Journal

2013 Dr ($) Cr ($)
Jan 28 Vehicle disposal 6 500
Motor vehicle 6 500
Aktar Allam 6 500
Vehicle disposal 6 500
Jan 28 Motor vehicle 10 000
Aston Motors Limited 10 000
QUESTION 19 MAY 2014 P21 Q1 (d to f)

(d) Trinity Stores account
2014 $ 2014 $
Apr 01 Balance b/f 800 Apr 10 Sales returns [$100  ($100 × 20%)] 80
Apr 08 Sales [$900  ($900 × 20%)] 720 Apr 18 Discount allowed ($800 × 2.5%)] 20
Apr 18 Bank ($800  $80) 780
____ Apr 30 Balance c/d 640
1 520 1 520
(e) Credit note
(f)  As an incentive for bulk purchases
 To enable Trinity Stores to sell and make a profit
 To make it regular customer

(a) Insurance account
2013 $ 2014 $
Apr 01 Balance b/f 500 Mar 31 Income statement(balancing figure) 4350
2014 Mar 31 Balance c/d (prepayment) 150
Mar 31 Bank 4 000 ____
4 500 4500
Commission receivable account
2014 $ 2013 $
Mar 31 Income Statement (bal. figure) 1 650 Apr 01 Balance b/f 250
2014
Mar 31 Bank 1 200
____ Mar 31 Balance c/d (arrears) 200
1 650 1650

(b) Hajar account
2014 $ 2014 $
Apr 01 Balance b/f 2 100 Apr 07 Returns in [$240  ($240 × 20%)] 192
Apr 05 Sales [$2 000  ($2 000 × 20%)] 1 600 Apr 18 Discount received ($2 100 × 2%) 42
Apr 18 Bank ($2 100  $42) 2 058
____ Apr 30 Balance c/d 1 408
3 700 3 700
(c)
Date Document
Apr 05 Fashran sold goods on credit to Hajar Sales invoice
Apr 07 Hajar returned goods to Fashran purchased on the 5 April Credit note
Apr 30 Fashran issues a summary of Hajar’s account for the month of April Statement of account
(d) Sales ledger

(a)
Date Source document Book of prime entry Effect on owner’s capital
August 5 Debit note Purchase returns journal No effect
August 7 Cheque counterfoil (stub) Cash book Increase
August 9 Sales invoice General journal No effect
(b)
Purchases General ledger
Tiara Purchases ledger
Non-current assets General ledger
D Costa Sales ledger

(a) (i) Calculation of owner’s capital
Assets: $ $
Inventory 1 950
Bank 550
Fixtures and fittings 1 500 4 000
Liabilities:
Trade payable 400
5% Bank loan 2 500 (2 900)
Owner’s capital 1 100
(ii) Calculation of capital employed

$
Capital Employed 3 600
(b) Midland Telecoms account

2014 $ 2014 $
May 31 Bank 400 May 01 Balance b/f 400
Jul 15 Bank ($1 200  $24) 1 176 Jun 26 Telephone expenses a/c 1 200
Jul 15 Discount received ($1 200 × 2%) 24 _____
1 600 1 600
Telephone expenses account

2014 $ 2014 $
Jun 26 Midland Telecoms 1 200 July 31 Income statement (bal. figure) 1 330
Jul 31 Balance c/d 130 ____
1 330 1 330
(c) Matching (accruals) concept under which the telephone expense incurred in the current quarter
is matched against the revenue earned in the same quarter.
(d) Source document Book of prime entry

10 July Credit note Return inwards journal
20 July Pay slip/wages sheet Cash Book
25 July Sales invoice General journal

Date Transaction Source Book of Account Account
Sold goods on credit to
April 9 Sales invoice Sales journal Yash Sales
Yash.
Yash returned goods sold Sales returns Sales
April 11 Credit note Yash
on 9 April as damaged. journal returns
April 14 Paid wages by cheque. Wage sheet Cash Book Wages Bank
Purchased office fixtures on Purchase General Office
April 19 Equip Ltd
credit from Equip Ltd. invoice Journal fixtures

(a)
Date Transaction Source Book of prime Effect on
Document Entry owner’s capital
April 5 Paid Putil half of his outstanding
Cheque
balance on 1 April by cheque, less Cash book +30
Counterfoil
2% cash discount
April 8 Bought goods on credit from Putil, Purchase Purchases
No effect
$800, less 20% trade Discount invoice journal
April 19 Paid wages in cash $450 Wage sheet Cash book –450
April 23 Returned goods, list price $200, Purchases
Credit note No effect
purchased on 5 April returns journal
April 26 Sold a non-current asset at book General
Invoice No effect
value, $2 000, on credit journal
(b) Putil account

2015 $ 2015 $
Apr 05 Discount received (3000×50%×2%) 30 Apr 01 Balance b/f 3 000
Apr 05 Bank [($3 000 × 50%)  $30] 1 470 Apr 08 Purchases [$800 ($800 ×20%)] 640
Apr 23 Returns out [$200  ($200 × 20%)] 160
Apr 30 Balance c/d 1 980 _____
3 640 3 640
(c) Wages account
2015 $ 2015 $
Apr 01 Balance b/f (prepayment) 1 750 Apr 30 Income statement (bal. figure) 2 050
Apr 19 Cash 450 Apr 30 Balance c/d (prepayment) 150
2 200 2 200

(a) Carston Garages account
2015 $ 2015 $
Jul 12 Discount received ($200 × 3%) 6 Jul 01 Balance b/f 200
Jul 12 Bank ($200  $6) 194 Jul 15 Motor van expenses 120
Jul 31 Balance c/d 460 Jul 26 Motor expenses [$400(400×15%)] 340
660 660
(b) Motor van expenses account

2015 $ 2015 $
Jul 01 Balance b/d 3 200 Jul 31 Income statement (balancing figure) 3 985
Jul 15 Carston Garages (fuel) 120
Jul 23 Bank (repairs) 200
Jul 26 Carston Garages ($400 × 85%)] 340
Jul 31 Balance b/d 125 ____
3 985 3 985
(c)
Sales General Ledger
T Wong (credit customer) Sales Ledger

(c) (i) Sales ledger
(ii) Sales invoice
(d) Izzat account

2015 $ 2015 $
Oct 01 Balance b/f 750 Oct 06 Sales returns [$350–($350× 20%)] 280
05 Sales [$1 800 – ($1 800 × 20%)] 1 440 21 Bank 800
____ 22 Bad debts (balancing figure) 1 110
2 190 2 190
(e) General journal

2015 Dr ($) Cr ($)
Oct 22 Bad debts 1 110
Izzat 1 110
(Balance owing from Izzat written off as irrecoverable)
(f) Increased accuracy

Large storage capacity
High Processing speed
Enhanced security of data
Quick production of financial statements and other reports

(a) Statement to calculate Faara’s capital at 1 May 2015
$
Assets at 1 May 2015 ($2 850 + $600 + $4 500) 7 950
Liabilities at 1 May 2015 ($200 + $450 + $5 000) 5 650
Capital at 1 May 2015 2 300
(b) Jaafar account

2015 $ 2015 $
May 01 Balance b/f 600 May 05 Sales returns [$120($120 × 15%)] 102
May 04 Sales [$1 500  ($1 500 × 15%)] 1 275 May 16 Bank [$600  ($600 × 2%)] 588
Discount allowed ($600 × 2%) 12
____ May 31 Balance c/d 1 173
1 875 1 875
Jun 01 Balance b/d 1 173
(c) To improve purchasing power of Jaafar resulting in bulk purchases by him.

To develop long lasting relationships with her loyal customers like Jafaar
To sell excessive or slow moving inventory
(d) Electricity account

2015 $ 2015 $
May 17 Bank 440 May 01 Balance b/f 200
May 31 Balance c/d (owing) 55 May 31 Income Statement (balancing fig.) 295
495 495
Jun 01 Balance b/d 55
(e) Matching / Accrual concept
(f) Source document Book of prime Effect on owner’s

entry capital ($)
9 May Sold goods on credit for $900, Sales invoice Sales journal +300
(cost $600).
14 May Customer returned goods, bought Credit note Sales returns 100
by him on 9 May, for $300. journal
21 May Paid wages in cash $150. Payslip/Wages book Cash Book 150
QUESTION 29 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (a, b & e)"

(a) Kacela account
2016 $ 2016 $
Sept 1 Balance b/d 900 Sept 14 Returns inwards 25
Sept 9 Sales 730 Sept 30 Bank 860
Sept 30 Discount allowed 40
____ Sept 30 Balance c/d 705
1630 1 630
(b) Sales ledger
(e)
Sold goods on credit. Sales invoice Sales journal
Paid wages in cash. Wages record/Payroll register Cash Book
Purchased office fixtures on credit. Purchases invoice General Journal
Goods returned from a credit customer. Credit note Sales returns journal

Book of prime Account to Account to Effect on
Transaction
entry be debited be credited capital $
Sold goods costing $900 on credit to Noah Sales Journal Noah Revenue +$600
for the list price of $1 500. (Sales)
$40
Noah returned goods with a list price of $100 Return in journal Return In Noah $6
($100 × )
$ 5
Paid Sophie a cheque for $610. Cash book Sophie Bank No effect
A debt, $230, owed by Zain was written off. General journal Bad debts Zain $230

Rent Receivable Account
2016 $ 2015 $
Jan 31 Bank 700 Oct 01 Balance b/f 2 500
Sept 30 Income statement 12 000 Dec 31 Bank 6 700
2016
April 30 Bank 3 100
_____ Sept 30 Balance c/d (balancing figure) 400
12 700 12 700
Chapter 3 57 Bank Reconciliation Statements
CHAPTER 3 BANK RECONCILIATION STATEMENTS

QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q2
Sally Major’s cash book (bank column) had a debit balance of $619 on 31 July 2009. The bank statement
balance on 31 July 2009 was $1 594 credit.
After checking the cash book against the bank statement the following differences were found:
1 A cheque for $710 issued to Jon Fletcher had not been presented to the bank for payment.
2 An amount of $1150 paid into a local bank branch by Sally did not appear on the bank statement.
3 Bank charges of $170 shown on the bank statement, but had not been recorded in the cash book.
4 Dividends received, $80, were shown on the bank statement but had not been recorded in the
cash book.
5 A payment of $5 cash for travel expenses had incorrectly been credited in the bank column of
the cash book.
6 The bank statement showed a bank loan for $1 500 had been transferred into the bank current
account. Sally Major was not expecting this transfer to take place until 1 August and had not yet
recorded the transaction in her books.
REQUIRED
(a) Starting with the balance on 31 July 2009, update the cash book and bring down the amended
balance. *5+
(b) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement to reconcile the adjusted cash book balance with the
bank statement balance at 31 July 2009. *4+
QUESTION 2 MAY 2010 P21 Q1 (c & d)

On 20 April, Goldy received the following bank statement.
Dr Cr Balance
April $ $ $
01 Balance b/d 650 Cr
08 Pacific Traders 1 500 2 150 Cr
12 Kwan 730 1 420 Cr
15 Interest 12 1 408 Cr
16 Credit transfer (dividends) 130 1 538 Cr
REQUIRED
(c) Update the cash book for Goldy on 20 April. Balance the cash book on that date. *4+
Cash book (bank columns only)
$ $
Apr 01 Balance b/d 650 Apr12 Kwan 730
08 Pacific Traders 1 500 17 Headland Garage 75
18 Stanton & Co 96
(d) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement at 20 April. *4+

Mohan is a trader. On 24 April 2011 he had a bank overdraft of $150.
The following transactions took place during the week ended 30 April 2011.
April 25 Withdrew $200, by cheque, for personal use.
April 26 Paid by cheque the balances on the accounts owed to:

Kerai, $400, less 3% cash discount
Susan, $750, less 4% cash discount.
April 27 Cash sales, $630, paid into the bank.
April 28 Received a cheque from Loula for the balance of her account, $2000, less 4% cash discount.
April 30 Cashed cheque to pay wages, $430.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the bank columns of Mohan’s cash book for the week ended 30 April 2011. Show the
balance brought down on 1 May 2011. *8+
On 1 May 2011 Mohan received the following bank statement:
Bank Statement
Dr ($) Cr ($) Balance ($)
April 24 Balance 150 Dr
April 25 Cheque 200 350 Dr
April 28 Cheque 388 738 Dr
April 29 Cheque 720 1 458 Dr
April 29 Credit Transfer (Dividend) 24 1 434 Dr
April 29 Credit 630 804 Dr
REQUIRED
(b) Starting with the closing balance from (a) updated cash book. Bring down the amended balance.*2+
(c) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement at 1 May 2011. *7+

Akma received the following bank statement on 30 April 2014:
Date Details Debit ($) Credit ($) Balance ($)
1 April Balance 614 Dr
2 April Cheque – Stanning 88 702 Dr
10 April Cash receipt 1204 502 Cr
12 April Cheque – Chong 640 138 Dr
18 April Paying in – Trinity Stores 780 642 Cr
20 April Cheque – Pang 94 548 Cr
22 April Charges 16 532 Cr
25 April MDA Electricity – S.O. 104 428 Cr
28 April Dividend receipt 41 469 Cr
Akma compared the bank statement with her cash book.
REQUIRED
(a) Bring the cash book of Akma up to date. Balance the cash book and bring down the balance.
Cash Book (bank columns)
$ $
8 April Sales 1204 1 April Balance b/d 614
18 April Trinity Stores 780 2 April Stanning 88
23 April Xain 73 8 April Chong 640
24 April Li Ye 37 23 April Zaine 59
27 April Pang 94
[5]
(b) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement at 30 April 2014. [4]

(c) State the meaning of the accounting abbreviation S.O. [1]

The following extract was taken from Abbie’s cash book on 30 September 2015.
Cash Book (Bank Columns)
2015 $ 2015 $
Sept 01 Balance b/d 290 Sept 08 Husna 102
09 L Lee 475 17 Yang Stores 849
15 Ng 150 23 Lam 364
21 JG Supplies 980 26 Xevera 500
29 Sampson 625 30 Balance c/d 705
2 520 2 520
Abbie received the following bank statement on 1 October 2015.
Date Details Debit Credit Balance
2015 $ $ $
Sept 01 Balance 290 Cr
09 L Lee 475 765 Cr
10 Husna 102 663 Cr
15 Ng 150 813 Cr
22 JG Supplies 980 1793 Cr
23 Bank charges 35 1758 Cr
24 Ng – Dishonoured 150 1608 Cr
25 YJ Electric 250 1358 Cr
Abbie compared the bank statement with her cash book.
REQUIRED
(a) Bring Abbie’s cash book up to date. Balance the cash book and bring down the balance on 1
October 2015. [4]
(b) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement at 1 October 2015. [5]
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (c & d)"
On 30 September 2016 the balance on the bank account in the books of Gabi was $450 debit.
Gabi received a bank statement for September 2016. The differences between the bank account and the
bank statement were as follows:
1 A cheque for $50 paid to J Simpson had not been presented for payment.
2 Bank charges, $230, had been charged to Gabi’s account but were not recorded in Gabi’s books.
3 The bank had received a dividend payment, $120, which was not recorded in Gabi’s books.
4 The cheque received from Kacela, $860, was not recorded on the bank statement.
REQUIRED
(c) Update the bank account of Gabi. Balance the account and bring down the updated balance on 1
October . [3]
(d) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement on 1 October 2016. Start with the updated bank
account balance. [4]
CHAPTER 3 SOLUTIONS
(a) Sally Major
Dr Cash Book (bank columns) Cr
2009 $ 2009 $
31 July Balance b/d 619 31 July Bank charges 170
31 July Dividends 80 31 July Balance c/d 2 034
31 July Cash (contra) 5
31 July Bank loan 1 500 ____
2 204 2 204
1 Aug Balance b/d 2 034
(b) Sally Major
Bank Reconciliation Statement at 31 July 2006 $
Balance as per cash book 2 034
Add Un-presented cheque 710
Less Un-credited deposit 1 150
Balance as per bank statement 1 594

(c) Cash book (bank columns only)
2010 $ 2010 $
Apr 01 Balance b/d 650 Apr12 Kwan 730
08 Pacific Traders 1 500 15 Interest 12
16 Dividends 130 17 Headland Garage 75
18 Stanton & Co 96 20 Balance c/d 1 559
2 376 2 376
(d) Bank reconciliation statement at 20 April

$
Balance as per adjusted cash book 1 559
Add Un-presented cheques (Headland Garage) 75
Less Un-credited deposits (Stanton & Co) (96)
Balance as per Bank Statement 1 538

(a) Three Column Cash Book (Bank columns only)
2011 $ 2011 $
Apr 27 Cash Sales 630 Apr 24 Balance b/f 150
Apr 28 Loula *$2 000 – ($2 000  4%)+ 1920 Apr 25 Drawings 200
Apr 26 Kerai *$400 – ($400  3%)+ 388
Apr 26 Susan *$750 – ($750  4%)+ 720
Apr 29 Wages 430
2 550 2 550
(b) Adjusted Cash Book (Bank columns only)

2011 $ 2011 $
May 01 Balance b/f 662 May 01 Balance c/d 686
May 01 Dividend 24 ___
686 686
(c) Bank Reconciliation Statement at 1 May 2011

$
Balance as per adjusted cash book (Dr) 686
Add Unpresented cheque - wages 430
Less Uncredited cheques - Loula (1 920)
Balance as per Bank Statement (Dr) 804

(a) Cash Book (bank columns)
2014 $ 2014 $
Apr 08 Sales 1 204 Apr 01 Balance b/d 614
Apr 18 Trinity Stores 780 Apr 02 Stanning 88
Apr 23 Xain 73 Apr 08 Chong 640
Apr 24 Li Ye 37 Apr 23 Zaine 59
Apr 30 Dividend receipt 41 Apr 27 Pang 94
Apr 30 Charges 16
Apr 30 MDA Electricity – S.O. 104
2 135 2 135
(b) Bank Reconciliation Statement at 30 April 2014

$ $
Balance as per bank statement (Cr) 469
Add Un-credited Cheques: Xain 73
Li Ye 37 110
579
Less Un-presented – Zaine 59
Balance as per cash book (Dr) 520
(c) Standing order

(a) Cash Book (Bank Columns)
2015 Details $ 2015 Details $
Oct 01 Balance b/d 705 Oct 01 Bank charges 35
Ng 150
YJ Electric 250
___ Balance c/d 270
705 705
(b) Bank Reconciliation Statement at 1 October 2015

$
Balance as per adjusted cash book (Dr) 270
Add Un-presented Cheques ($849 + $364 + $500) 1 713
Less Un-credited Cheques (Sampson) (625)
Balance as per bank statement 1 358
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q1 (c & d)"

(c) Updated Bank account
2016 $ 2016 $
Sept 30 Balance b/f 450 Sept 30 Bank charges 230
Sept 30 Dividend 120 Sept 30 Balance c/d 340
570 570
(d) Bank Reconciliation Statement at 30 September 2016

$
Balance as per updated bank account (Debit) 340
Add Un-presented Cheques 50
390
Less Un-credited cheques (860)
Balance as per Bank Statement - debit (Overdraft) 470
Chapter 4 63 Payroll Accounting
CHAPTER 4 PAYROLL ACCOUNTING

The Ranford Sports Club keeps a full set of double entry accounts and prepares monthly accounts.
The wages for the café manager have not been paid for the month of April. The café manager worked a
total of 138 hours in the month of which
120 hours were paid at $5 per hour
12 hours were paid at time and a half
6 hours were paid at double time.
A total of 40 % of gross pay was deducted for tax and social security contributions. The Ranford Sports
Club must also pay an additional $65 to the tax authority.
On 5 May 2009 the Ranford Sports Club paid the total tax and social security contributions to the tax
authority.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the net wages to be paid to the café manager for the month of April 2009. *5+
(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the entries made on 30 April 2009 for wages and
statutory deductions. A narrative is not required. *3+
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q2 (f & g)

Universal Industries has one employee who worked a total of 170 hours in March 2009 of which
Tax and social security of $150 was deducted from the employee’s gross pay. The net payment has been
made to the employee in cash.
REQUIRED
(f) Calculate the employee’s net pay for March 2009. *4+
Universal Industries must also pay an additional 10% of the employee’s gross pay for their share of tax and
social security contributions.
The total tax and social security is due to be paid to the tax authorities on 31 March 2009.
REQUIRED
(g) Calculate the total tax and social security payment to be made to the tax authorities on 31 March
2009. *3+
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (d)

Jenny has one employee who had been paid for 120 hours at $5 per hour and six hours overtime at time
and a half. Tax and social security deducted from pay was $136. Jenny also has to pay $45 for her
employer’s share of social security contributions. The total tax and social security is due to be paid to the
tax authorities on 19 August.
REQUIRED
Prepare a journal entry to record the entries made in July 2009 for wages and statutory deductions. A
narration is not required. Clearly show your calculations in the space below. *6+

Indira is a computer consultant. Included within the wages are payments to the office supervisor.
The office supervisor is paid $1 000 per month plus 10 hours overtime per month at $8 per hour.
Statutory deductions will be made at the rate of 15%.
Indira will also have to make a 10% employer’s contribution to the government.
REQUIRED
Calculate:
(i) The net payment made by Indira to the office supervisor for one month. *3+
(ii) The total cost to Indira of employing the office supervisor for one month. *2+

Tsang is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following information is available for the
month of March 2010.
$
Revenue (sales) 65 000
Inventory 1 March 3 400
Ordinary goods purchased 47 900
Wages & salaries expenses 2 500
Included in the expenses are the wages paid to Susan, who works for Tsang. In the month of March, Susan
worked 160 hours for which she was paid $5 per hour, and 20 hours overtime, for which she was paid time
and a half.
Tax and social security deducted from her pay was $165. Tsang also had to pay $90 for employer's social
security contributions. The total tax and social security is to be paid to the tax authorities on 30 April 2010.
REQUIRED
(b) (i) Calculate Susan's net pay for the month of March. *2+
(ii) Calculate for Tsang, the total cost of employing Susan for the month of March. *2+
(c) Prepare for Tsang, the journal entry on 31 March 2010 to record the wages and statutory
deductions. A narrative is not required. *3+
(d) Prepare income statement for the month of March 2010. *6+

Kya is a wholesaler. Kya employs Rose as a receptionist. Rose works 35 hours per week at $7 per hour and
10 hours per week at time and a half.
In addition, Kya has to pay an employers’ tax at the rate of 10% of Rose’s gross pay.
REQUIRED
Calculate the total cost to Kya of employing Rose for one week. *4+

Lau buys and sells goods on credit. Lau employed Hui as a sales assistant in March. Hui was paid for 140
hours at $6 per hour and 6 hours at time and a half. Tax and social security deducted from pay were $160.
Lau also had to pay $95 for employer’s social security contributions. The total tax and social security is due
to the tax authorities on 30 June 2012.
REQUIRED
(c) (i) Calculate the net payment to Hui. *3+
(ii) Calculate the total cost to Lau of employing Hui in the month of March 2012. *2+
(d) Prepare the journal entry for wages and statutory deductions on 31 March 2012. A narrative is
not required. *4+

During the month of August, Leong employed Fan as a sales assistant. Fan was paid for 130 hours at $6 per
hour and ten hours at time and a half. Tax and social security deducted from gross pay was $145. Leong
also has to pay 10% of Fan’s gross pay for employer’s social security contributions.
REQUIRED
(i) Calculate the net payment to Fan. *2+
(ii) Calculate the total cost to Leong of employing Fan for the month of August. *2+

The following is an extract from David’s wages book for January 2013.
Wages book
Employee Gross Tax Employee’s Social Employer’s Social Charitable Net pay
Number pay Security Contributions Security Contributions Donations
$ $ $ $ $ $
001 2200 440 132 198 – ?
002 2600 520 156 234 25 ?
Total 4800 960 288 432 25 ?
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the net pay for Employee 001 and Employee 002. *5+
(b) Calculate the total wages cost. *3+
(c) State two methods used for recording hours worked. *2+
(d) Explain a non-statutory deduction. *1+
QUESTION 10 NOVEMBER 2013 P21 Q2 (d & e)

The information below relates to an employee of Raja for the month of May 2013.
Hours worked Rates of pay
140 $8 per hour
10 Time and half
Tax and social security deductions
Employee rate 20% of gross pay
Employer rate 10% of gross pay
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate the employee’s net pay for May 2013. *5+
(e) Calculate the total amount Raja owes the tax and social security authorities for May 2013. *3+
Cadmore Limited is a manufacturing business. One of the factory workers of Cadmore Limited worked a
total of 220 hours in April 2014.

20 hours were paid at double time
Tax and social security of $240 was deducted from the factory worker’s gross pay.
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate the factory worker’s net pay for April 2014. [3]
Cadmore Limited must pay an additional 10% of the factory worker’s gross pay for employer’s tax and
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate the total employee’s and employer’s tax and social security payment to the tax
authorities for the factory worker in April 2014. [3]
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q3 (b & c)

Hong works in the office of Fairview Manufacturing. For the month of March she was paid for 140 hours
at $6 per hour and 28 hours at time and a quarter. Deductions from gross pay were $250 tax and social
security and $60 for pension contributions.
REQUIRED
(b) Calculate the net pay of Hong for the month of October 2015. [4]
(c) Name the document that Hong will receive which details the calculation of her net pay. [1]
QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q3 (a to c)"

The following is an extract from the wages book of JT Manufacturing for August 2016 showing the wages
paid to factory indirect labour.
Wages book
Employee’s Employer’s
Rate
Hours social social Voluntary Net
Employee per Tax
worked security security Contributions pay
hour
contribution contribution
$ $ $ $
Nazim 160 $5 210 80 120 0 ?
Pabla 180 $6 250 110 150 50 ?
Total 340 460 190 270 50
REQUIRED
(a) Give one example of a voluntary contribution. [1]
(b) Calculate the net pay for:
Nazim [3]
Pabla [3]
(c) Calculate the total wages cost for factory indirect labour. [3]
CHAPTER 4 SOLUTIONS
(a) Statement to calculate the net wages to be paid to the café manager
For the month of April 2009
$
Wages at regular (single) rate (120hours × $5) 600
Wages at time and a half (12 hours × $7.5) 90
Wages at double time (6 hours × $10) 60
750
Less Tax and social security deduction ($750  40%) 300
Net wages payable to the café manager 450
(b) General Journal

Dr ($) Cr($)
Wages ($750 + $65) 815
Wages payable (“a” Part) 450
Tax and social security payable ($300 + $65) 365
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q2 (f & g)

(f) Calculation of the employee’s net Pay for March 2009
$
Wages: Single time (160 hours × $6) 960
1
Time and a half (10 hours × $6 × 1 /2) 90
Total gross Wages (pay) 1 050
Less Tax and social security (150)
Wages paid in cash 900
(g) Calculation of the total tax and social security payment

$
Employer’s tax and social security ($1 050 × 10%) 105
Employee tax and social security 150
Total tax and social security payable 255
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (d)

Jenny Palmer’s Journal
Dr ($) Cr. ($)
Wages and salaries 690
Bank 509
Tax authorities (payable) 181
WORKINGS
$
Gross wages (120 hours × $5) + (6 hours × $7.50) 645
Less Tax/Social Security (136)
Net wages 509

(i) Calculation of office supervisor wages for one month
$
Basic pay 1 000
Overtime pay (10 hours × $8) 80
Total Gross pay 1 080
Less Statutory deductions ($1 080 × 15%) 162
Net pay 918
(ii) Calculation of total cost to Indira of employing the office supervisor for one month
$
Gross pay 1 080
Add Indra’s contribution ($1 080 × 10%) 108
Cost of employment 1 188

(b) (i) Gross pay *(160 hours @ $5) + (20 hours @ $7.50)+ $950
Tax and social security deduction $165
Susan's net pay $785
(ii) Gross wages and salaries *(160 hours @ $5) + (20 hours @ $7.50)+ $950
Tsang’s share of Social security $ 90
Total Wages and salaries expense $1 040
(c) Tsang’ Journal

2010 Dr $ Cr $
Mar 31 Wages and salaries *b (ii)+ 1 040
Bank *b (i)+ 785
Tax authorities/Inland Revenue (liability)($165 + $90) 255
(d) Tsang
Income Statement for the month ended 31 March 2010
$ $
Cost of Sales
51 300
Inventory 31 March (2 900) (48 400)
Gross profit 16 600
Other Incomes
16 900
Expenses
Wages and salaries (2 500)
Profit for the year 14 400

Calculation of total cost to Kya of employing Rose for one week.
$
Gross pay (35 hours × $7) + *10 hours × ($7 × 150%)+ 350
Employers’ tax ($350 × 10%) 35
Total cost of employing Rose for one week 385

(c) (i) Calculation of the net payment to Hui
$
Gross Pay *(140 hours × $6) + (6 hours × $9)+ 894
Less Tax and social security deduction (160)
Net pay 734
(ii) Calculation of total cost to Lau of employing Hui for March 2012
$
Net Pay given to Hui *c (i)+ 894
Add Lau’s social security contributions 95
Cost of employing Hui $989
(d) Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
Wages and salaries *C (ii)+ 989
Bank (net pay) 734
Tax authorities ($160 + $95) 255

(i) Calculation of net pay to Fan
$
Less Tax deduction 145
Net pay 725
(ii) Calculate the total cost to Leong of employing Fan for the month of August
$
Employers social security 87
Total cost of employing Fan 957

(a) Employee 001 $
Gross pay 2 200
Tax (440)
Employee’s social security contributions (132)
Net pay 1 628
Employee 002 $
Gross pay 2 600
Tax (520)
Employee’s social security contributions (156)
Charitable donations (25)
Net pay 1 899
(b) $
Total gross pay 4 800
Employer’s Social security contributions 432
Total cost 5 232
(c) Timesheets, Clock cards (swipe cards)
(d) An employee may choose to have voluntary deductions from gross pay; however it is not
mandatory or required by law.

(d) Calculation of Net Pay
$
Gross pay (140 hours × $8 per hour) + (10 hours × $12 per hour) 240
Less Tax and social security deduction ($1 240 × 20%) (248)
Net pay 992
(e) Calculation of total amount owing to tax and social security authorities for May 2013
$
Employer’s tax and social security payments ($1 240 × 10%) 24
Employee’s tax and social security deductions (‘d’ part) 248
Total owed to the tax and social security authorities for May 2013 372

(c) Calculation of factory worker’s net pay for April 2014
$
Gross Pay [{(160 hours × $8)}+ {40 hours × ($8 × 1.5)}+ {(20 hours × ($8 × 2)}] $2 080
Net pay for April 1 840
(d) Calculation of total tax and social security payment to the tax authorities
Employee tax and social security contribution $240
Employer tax and social security contribution ($2 080 × 10%) $208
Total contribution to social security $448
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q3 (b & c)

(b) $ $
Gross pay [(140 hours @ $6) ; (28 hours @ $7.50)] 1 050
Less Tax and social security deductions 250
Pension contribution 60 (310)
Net pay 740
(c) Pay slip

QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q3 (a to c)"

(a) Payment for Subscription
Charitable donation
Pension contribution
Trade union contributions
(b) Calculation of Net Pay

Nazim Pabla
$ $
Gross pay (160 hours x $5) ; (180 hours x $6) 800 1 080
Less Tax (210) (250)
Employee’s social security contribution (80) (110)
Voluntary contributions - (50)
Net pay 510 670
(c) $
Total gross pay ($800 + $1 080) 1 880
Employer’s social security contribution 270
Total wage cost for factory indirect labour 2 150
Chapter 5 72 Accounting for Depreciation
CHAPTER 5 ACCOUNTING FOR DEPRECIATION

QUESTION 1 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q2 (a to e)
Universal Industries provided the following information:
1 Purchased a machine for $8 000 on 1 October 2007.
2 Sold the machine for cash, $7 000, on 31 March 2009.
3 The policy of Universal Industries is to charge depreciation at the rate of 10% per annum on cost
using the straight line method. Depreciation on machinery is charged from the date of purchase
and up to the date of sale.
4 All sales of non-current assets are recorded in a disposal account.
5 Universal Industries prepares financial statements on 31 March each year.
REQUIRED
(a) Explain the term depreciation. *2+
(b) State two reasons why non-current assets depreciate. *2+
(c) Prepare the journal entries to record the sale of the machine. Show the transfer of any profit or
loss on the sale to the financial statements on 31 March 2009. Narratives are not required. *8+
(d) Explain why depreciation is an application of the accruals concept. *2+
(e) Complete the table below for items (i) to (iii). State in each case the most appropriate method of
depreciation and give one reason for your answer.
Asset
(i) Buildings Method of depreciation
Reason
(ii) Computers Method of depreciation
Reason
(iii) Loose tools Method of depreciation
Reason *6+

Sparky Ltd set up business on 1 May 2008 with the following assets:
$
Property (Land and buildings) 150 000
Computer equipment 40 000
Inventory (stock in trade) 70 000
Sparky Ltd decided on the following policy for depreciation:
1 Land costing $80 000 was not to be depreciated.
2 Buildings are to be depreciated at 2% per annum on cost using the straight line method.
3 Computer equipment is to be depreciated at 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
REQUIRED
(a) State two causes of depreciation. *2+
(b) Explain why Sparky Ltd does not depreciate each of the following:
Land
Inventory *4+
(c) Explain why depreciation is an application of the matching/accruals principle. *2+

(d) Calculate the depreciation on property (land and buildings) for the year ended 30 April 2009. *1+
On 30 April 2010 Sparky Ltd sold some of the computer equipment for $7 000. The computer equipment
had cost $12 000 on 1 May 2008. Sparky Ltd charges a full year’s depreciation in the year of disposal.
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare disposal account on 30 April 2010 recording the disposal of the computer equipment. *5+

Amayi owns a manufacturing business. Her financial year ends on 30 April. She has the following
depreciation policy:
Machinery is depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method.
Office furniture is depreciated at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
Loose tools are depreciated using the revaluation method.
A full year’s depreciation is charged on assets in the year of purchase but no depreciation is charged in the
year of sale.
REQUIRED
(a) Give two reasons why depreciation should be charged. *4+
(b) Suggest one reason why the diminishing (reducing) balance method might be the most
appropriate method for Amayi to depreciate her machinery. *2+
The following information is available for the year ended 30 April 2011.
1 Balances 1 May 2010
Non-current assets at cost $
Machinery 80 000
Office furniture 15 000
Provisions for depreciation
Machinery 60 000
2 On 31 July 2010, additional machinery, $18 000, was purchased.
3 On 20 February 2011, office furniture, which had cost $1 000 on 1 May 2008, was sold for $550
cash.
4 On 1 May 2010, loose tools, cost price $1600, were valued at $1050. Additional loose tools were
purchased during the year for $630.
On 30 April 2011 loose tools were valued at $1400.
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate the depreciation to be charged on each of the following for the year ended 30 April
2011.
(i) Machinery
(ii) Office furniture
(iii) Loose tools *6+
(d) Calculate the profit or loss on the office furniture sold on 20 February 2011. *3+
(e) Calculate the net book value on 30 April 2011 of
(i) Machinery
(ii) Office furniture *2+

On 31 August 2011 the following extract was taken from the balance sheet of Stavros
Non-current assets Cost Accumulated NBV

depreciation
$ $ $
Equipment 60 000 24 000 36 000
Office Computers 8 000 5 600 2 400
68 000 29 600 38 400
The following transactions took place during the year ended 31 August 2012:
1 On 31 January 2012, equipment purchased on 1 April 2009, at a cost of $28 000, was sold for $10
000. Payment was received by cheque.
2 On 1 February 2012, new equipment was purchased at a cost of $35 000.
3 On 20 March 2012, office computers were purchased for $600.
Stavros has the following depreciation policy:

Equipment is depreciated at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method. Office computers
are depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method.
A full year’s depreciation is charged on equipment and office computers in the year of purchase.
No depreciation is charged on equipment in the year of sale.
REQUIRED
(a) (i) Explain the term depreciation. *2+
(ii) State two causes of depreciation. *2+
(b) State one advantage of using the straight-line method of depreciation *2+
(c) Prepare the following ledger accounts for the year ended 31 August 2012:
(i) Provision for depreciation of equipment account
(ii) Equipment disposal account *8+
(d) Complete the following balance sheet (extract) for the non-current assets on 31 August 2012.
Accumulated
Non-current assets Cost NBV
depreciation
$ $ $
Equipment
Office Computers
*6+
On 1 April 2011 Lynne purchased two motor vehicles for business use on credit from Villa Motors Limited.
The vehicles cost $12 000 each.
Depreciation is charged on the motor vehicles at 20% per annum by the diminishing (reducing) balance
method. A full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of purchase but no depreciation is charged in the
year of sale.
On 23 January 2013 one of the motor vehicles was sold for $6 500.
REQUIRED
(a) Show the journal entry to record the purchase of the motor vehicles on 1 April 2011.
Dates and narratives are not required. *2+
(b) Prepare the provision for depreciation account for the years ended on 31 March 2012 & 2013. *5+
(c) Prepare the disposal account. *5+
(d) State two other methods of depreciation. *2+
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2013 P22 Q1 (c & d)

(c) Give two other uses of the general journal. [2]
(d) Kulbir operates on a mark-up of 25%. The table below contains transactions carried out by Kulbir
in her first week of trading. Complete the table for each transaction. The first transaction has
been completed as an example.
Source Book of prime Effect on
2013 Transaction
document entry Profit
Goods sold, cost price $400, on credit
Jan 4 Invoice Sales journal Increase $100
to Keen
Jan 5 Keen returned goods, selling price $80
Payment made to J Singh, $323 in cash,
Jan 6
after deducting $17 cash discount
Kulbir withdrew $200 from the bank for
Jan 7
personal use
[9]
The following information relates to the delivery vehicles of Swift Limited.
1 July 2012 Purchased delivery vehicle 1 for $15 000.
30 June 2014 Disposed of delivery vehicle 1 and received a cheque for $8 000.
Depreciation is charged at the rate of 20% using the diminishing (reducing) balance method.
REQUIRED
(a) State two causes of depreciation of a delivery vehicle. [2]
(b) Complete the following table to show the depreciation charged for the years ended 30 June 2013
and 30 June 2014.
Year ended Delivery vehicle 1 Delivery vehicle 2 Total for year
$ $ $
30 June 2013
30 June 2014
Total
[3]
(c) Prepare the provision for depreciation of delivery vehicles account for the year ended 30 June
2014. Balance the account and bring down the balance. [4]
(d) Prepare the journal entries to record the disposal of delivery vehicle 1. Narratives are not
required. [6]
(e) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position at 30 June 2014, showing the delivery
vehicles. [2]

Ajib commenced business on 1 October 2014 delivering parcels to customers’ homes. He purchased a
motor van on that date, the details are as follows.
Purchase price $9 600
Life of motor van 3 years
Residual value $1 200
Ajib is undecided whether to use the straight-line method or diminishing (reducing) balance method to
depreciate the motor van.
If Ajib uses the diminishing (reducing) balance method the annual rate of depreciation charged would be
50%.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table to show the depreciation to be charged for the years ended 30
September 2015, 2016 and 2017 using the straight-line method and the diminishing (reducing)
balance method. *6+
(c) State one advantage of Ajib using the straight-line method when depreciating the motor van. *1+
(d) State one advantage of Ajib using the diminishing (reducing) balance method when depreciating
the motor van. *1+

Atto Electrical had the following non-current assets on 31 March 2013.
Net book value ($)
Premises (cost $50 000) 48 000
Motor vehicles (cost $16 000) 12 000
Computers 6 000
Atto Electrical has the following depreciation policy.
Premises are depreciated at the rate of 2% per annum by straight-line method.
Motor vehicles are depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum by diminishing (reducing) balance
method.
Computers are depreciated by revaluation method.
A full year’s depreciation is charged on all non-current assets owned at the end of the financial year.
1 There were no purchases or sales of non-current assets during the year ended 31 March 2014.
2 The following purchases of non-current assets were made during the year ended 31 March 2015.
Payments were made by cheque.
$
Premises 30 000
Motor vehicles 9 000
Computers 3 200
3 Computers were valued as follows:
$
31 March 2014 4 200
31 March 2015 6 000
REQUIRED
(a) Explain the term depreciation. [2]
(b) State one cause of depreciation of a computer. [1]
(c) Complete the table to show the depreciation to be charged to the income statement for each of
the years ended 31 March 2014 and 31 March 2015.
Year ended 31 March 2014 ($) Year ended 31 March 2015 ($)
Premises
Motor vehicles
Computers
[6]
(d) Prepare the following ledger accounts for each of the years ended 31 March 2014 and 31 March
2015. Balance the accounts and bring down the balances on 1 April.
Motor vehicles account [4]
Motor vehicles provision for depreciation account [5]
(e) Identify which two of the following accounting principles/concepts support the charging of
depreciation in an accounting year.
Accruals/Matching
Dual aspect
Going concern
Materiality
Money measurement [2]
QUESTION 10 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (a to d)
The following balances were recorded in the books of Sofea on 1 March 2015.
$
Motor vehicles account (at cost) 50 000
Motor vehicles - Provision for depreciation account 18 400
1 On 31 May 2015 a motor vehicle costing $16 000 and with an accumulated depreciation of $7000
2 On 30 June 2015 a motor vehicle costing $20 000 was purchased on credit.
3 The depreciation policy of Sofea is as follows:
Motor vehicles are depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
A full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of purchase.
No depreciation is charged in the year of sale.
REQUIRED
(a) State the meaning of the accounting term depreciation. *2+
(b) Identify by ticking the appropriate box (✓) whether each statement about depreciation is true or
false. The first one has been completed as an example.
Statement Statement False
There is only one method of charging depreciation. ✓
Depreciation is the cash set aside for non-current asset replacement.
Depreciation is an application of the going concern concept.
*2+
(c) Calculate the:

(i) profit or loss on the sale of the motor vehicle on 31 May 2015. *1+
(ii) motor vehicles depreciation charge for the year ended 29 February 2016. *2+
(d) Prepare the motor vehicles provision for depreciation account for the year ended 29 February
2016. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2016. *5+
CHAPTER 5 SOLUTIONS
(a) Depreciation is the reduction in the value and useful life of a non-current asset.
Depreciation is charged to allocate the cost of a non-current asset over its useful life.
(b) Physical deterioration, wear and tear, Obsolescence, time factor, depletion, inadequacy etc.
(c) Journal
2009 Dr ($) Cr ($)
Mar 31 Machine disposal account 8 000
Machinery account 8 000
1
Mar 31 Provision for depreciation account ($8 000 × 10% × 1 /2) 1 200
Machine disposal account 1 200
0Mar 31 Bank account 7 000
Machine disposal account 7 000
Mar 31 Machine disposal account 200
Income statement (profit) 200
(d) As Matching and accrual concepts emphasise that all the expenses related to generation of
current year revenue should be off set against the revenue so that true profitability of the
business may be determined.
As non-current assets benefit the business for a period more than one year so their costs should
be charged to income statement over their useful lives against the income earned in a given
financial year
(e) Non-current asset Method and reason

(i) Buildings Straight line or original cost
Asset benefits the business evenly over its life
(ii) Computers Reducing balance or written down value
Large reduction in value of asset in early years
Rapid technical improvements make computers quickly out of date
(iii) Loose tools Revaluation
Small items have low per unit value which varies each year and is
difficult to measure individually.

(a) Physical deterioration, obsolescence; time factor; depletion etc.
(b) (i) Land does not wear out and has an infinite life so there is no need to depreciate it in
value. Moreover its value may go up in value.
(ii) Inventory in trade is a current asset. It is expected to be sold (or used) within a year so
there is no asset to depreciate over several years.
(c) Matching concept asserts that the cost of a non-current asset should be charged to the income
statement over its estimated useful life earned in a given financial year.
(d) Depreciation on Property (land and buildings) = ($150 000 − $80 000) × 2%
= $1 400
(e) Disposal Account

$ $
Computer equipment 12 000 Prov. for depn(12000×25%)+(9000×25%) 5 250
Income Statement (profit) 250 Cash/Trade receivables 7 000
12 250 12 250

(a)  to spread the cost of a non-current asset over its useful economic life
 to include a charge a for use of non-current asset to the income statement
 to reduce the book value of non-current assets in the balance sheet
(b) Reducing Balance Method is the most appropriate method for calculating depreciation on
machines, which operate faster, produce more and perform more accurately when they are new.
(c) Calculation of depreciation
Machinery ($) Furniture ($) Loose tools ($)
Cost (value) at 1 May 2010 80 000 15 000 1 050
Add Purchase of new assets 18 000 - 630
Less Disposals of assets - (1 000) -
98 000 14 000 1 680
Less Provision for depn *$5 000– ($1 00020%)+ (60 000) (4 800) -
Value at year end before current year depreciation 38 000 9 200 1 680
Depreciation (3800025%);*1400010%)+;(1680–1400) (9 500) (1 400) (280)
$
(d) Calculation of profit or loss on furniture sold
Cost of furniture sold 1 000
Depreciation ($1 000  20%) (200)
Book value on sale of furniture 800
Sale price of furniture sold (550)
Loss on sale of furniture 250
(e)
Machinery ($) Furniture ($) Loose tools ($)
Value at year end before current year depreciation (“c”) 38 000 9 200 1 680
Depreciation (3800025%);*1400010%)+;(1680–1400) (9 500) (1 400) (280)
Net book value on 30 April 2011 28 500 7 800 1 400

(a) (i) Depreciation is the continuing diminution in the value or estimated useful life of a non-
current asset
(ii) Physical deterioration, obsolescence, inadequacy, time factor etc
(b) It is easy to calculate and understand as apportions an equal amount of depreciation to each year
of ownership
More appropriate to non-current assets which show consistent performance in each year of their
useful lives.
(c) (i) Equipment provision for depreciation account

2012 $ 2012 $
Jan 31 Disposal ($28 000 × 20% × 3) 16 800 Sep 01 Balance b/f 24 000
Aug 31 Balance c/d 20 600 Aug 31 Income statement (W 1) 13 400
37 400 37 400
Sept 1 Balance b/d 20 600
(ii) Equipment disposal account

2012 $ 2012 $
Jan 31 Equipment 28 000 Jan 31 Provision for depreciation 16 800
Jan 31 Bank 10 000
_____ Aug 31 Income statement (bal. Figure) 1 200
28 000 28 000
(d) Balance sheet (extract) at 31 August 2012

Accumulated
Non-current assets Cost NBV
depreciation
$ $ $
Equipment ($60 000 + $35 000  $28 000) 67 000 20 600 46 400
Office computer ($8 000 + $600); [5 600 + 750(W 2)] 8 600 6 350 2 250
75 600 26 950 48 650
WORKINGS
(W 1) Current year depreciation (equipment) = ($60 000 + $35 000  $28 000) × 20% = $13 400
(W 2) Current year depreciation (computers) = *($8 000 + $600)  $5 600+ × 25% = $750

(a) Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
Villa Motors Limited 24 000
(b) Provision for Depreciation account
2013 $ 2012 $
Mar 31 Balance c/d 4 800 Mar 31 Income statement($24 000×20%) 4 800
Jan 23 Disposal a/c ($12 000 × 20%) 2 400 Apr 01 Balance b/d 4 800
2013 2013
Mar 31 Balance c/d 4 320 Mar 31 Income statement ($9 600×20%) 1 920
6 720 6 720
(c) Disposal account

2013 $ 2013 $
Jan 23 Motor vehicle 12 000 Jan 23 Bank 6 500
Jan 23 Provision for Depreciation 2 400
_____ Mar 31 Income statement (bal. Figure) 3 100
12 000 12 000
(d) Straight-line method, Revaluation method

(c) General journal is used to record items which cannot be recorded in other journals. Examples
include purchase or sale of non-current assets on credit, entries to close incomes and expenses
to Income Statement, entries to correct the mistakes, adjusting entries etc
(d) Source Book of prime Effect on
2013 Transaction
document entry profit
Goods sold, cost price $400, Increase
Jan 4 Invoice Sales journal
on credit to Keen $100
Keen returned goods, list Credit note Sale returns Decrease $16
Jan 5 25
price $80 journal ($80 × /125)
Payment made to J Singh,
Increase
Jan 6 $323, in cash, after Receipt Cash book
$17
deducting $17 cash discount
Kulbir withdrew $200 from Bank Statement/
Jan 7 Cash book No effect
the bank for personal use Cheque counterfoil

(a) Physical deterioration/Wear and tear
Economic factors
Obsolescence
Passage of time (time factor)
(b)
$ $ $
30 June 2013 3 000 ($15 000 × 20%) - 3 000
30 June 2014 2 400 [($15 000  $3 000) × 20%] 4 000 ($20 000 × 20%) 6 400
Total 5 400 4 000
(c) Provision for depreciation of delivery vehicles account

2014 $ 2013 $
Jun 30 Vehicle Disposal(‘b’ part) 5 400 1 July Balance b/f 3 000
Jun 30 Balance c/d 4 000 2014
____ Jun30 Income Statement (‘b’ part) 6 400
9 400 9 400
(d) Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
Vehicle Disposal 15 000
Delivery vehicle 15 000
Provision for depreciation 5 400
Bank 8 000
Income statement (loss) 1 600
(e) Statement of Financial Position at 30 June 2014

Non-current assets Cost Aggregate Net book
depreciation value
$ $ $

(a) Depreciation represents the continuing loss in the value of a non-current asset over its estimated
working life
(b) Calculation of Depreciation
For the year ended Straight line method Reducing balance method
$ $
$9 6 ;$ 2
30 September 2015 2 800 ( ) 4 800 ($9 600 × 50%)
3 years
$9 6 ;$ 2
30 September 2016 2 800 ( ) 2 400 *($9 600  $4 800) × 50%+
3 years
$9 6 ;$ 2
30 September 2017 2 800 ( ) 1 200 *($9 600  $7 200) × 50%+
3 years
(c) Depreciation charged under straight line method is easy to calculate and equal charge for
depreciation in each year represents equal benefit received from use of asset.
(d) Under reducing balance method more depreciation is charged in earlier part of vehicle’s life so is
more realistic in relation to motor vehicles.

(a) Depreciation is the estimated reduction in the value of a non-current asset over its expected
useful life.
Charging of depreciation is a process to allocate cost of a non-current asset over its useful life.
(b) Physical deterioration, obsolescence, inadequacy etc.
(c) Year ended Year ended
31 March 2014 31 March 2015
$ $
Premises ($50 000 × 2%) ; [($50 000 + $30 000) × 2%] 1 000 1 600
Motor vehicles[($16 000  $4 000) × 25%] ;[($25 000  $7 000) × 25%] 3 000 4 500
Computers ($6 000  $4 200) ; [($4 200 + $3 200)  $6 000] 1 800 1 400
[6]
(d) Motor vehicles account
2013 $ 2014 $
Apr 1 Balance b/f 16 000 Mar 31 Balance c/d 16 000
2014 2015
Apr 1 Balance b/d 16 000 Mar 31 Balance c/d 25 000
Bank 9 000 ______
25 000 25 000
2015
Apr 1 Balance b/d 25 000
Motor vehicle provision for depreciation account

2014 2013 $
Mar 31 Balance c/d 7 000 Apr 01 Balance b/f ($16 000  $12 000) 4 000
2014
____ Mar 31 Income Statement (‘c’ part) 3 000
7 000 7 000
2015 Apr 01 Balance b/d 7 000
Mar 31 Balance c/d 11 500 2015
_____ Mar 31 Income Statement (‘c’ part) 4 500
11 500 11 500
(e) Matching (Accruals) and Going concern
QUESTION 10 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (a to d)

(a) Depreciation is the estimated reduction in the value of a non-current asset over its expected
useful life.
(b)
Statement True False
1. There is only one method of charging depreciation. √
2. Depreciation is the putting by of cash for asset replacement. √
3. Depreciation is an application of the going concern concept. √
(c) (i) Sale value of vehicle  Book value of vehicle sold = Profit (loss) on disposal
$8 400  ($16 000  $7 000) = $600 loss
(ii) Depreciation ($) = Book value of vehicle at year end × Depreciation (%)
= [(50 000  16 000 + 20 000)(18 400  7 000)] × 25%
= $10 650
(d) Motor vehicles – Provision for depreciation account

2015 $ 2015 $
May 31 Disposal 7 000 Mar 01 Balance b/f 18 400
2016 2016
Feb 29 Balance c/d 22 050 Feb 29 Income statement [c (ii)] 10 650
29 050 29 050
Mar 01 Balance b/d 22 050
Chapter 6 85 Bad and Doubtful debts
CHAPTER 6 BAD AND DOUDTFUL DEBTS

On 30 September 2011, after preparing the sales ledger control account Andrea was advised that Keira is
unable to pay the whole of her debt, $2 500.
Andrea accepted $500 in full settlement and the balance of the debt was written off.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the journal entry to record the transactions on 30 September 2011. A narrative is not
required. *3+
Andrea carried out a review of her remaining trade receivables before preparing her financial statements.
The following information relating to her trade receivables was available:
Analysis of balances
$ Age of debt
George 11 500 One month
Ranjula 9 500 Two months
Harry 5 000 Four months
Trupti 1 500 Eight months
27 500
Andrea has the following policy for calculating the provision for doubtful debts:
Age of debts %
Up to 3 months 2
3-6 months 10
Over 6 months 20
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate the value of the provision for doubtful debts at 30 September 2011. *4+
(e) On 1 October 2010 the balance of the provision for doubtful debts account was $1 500.
Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 30 September 2011. Bring
down the balance on 1 October 2011. *3+
(f) Name two accounting principles which Andrea is applying by maintaining a provision for doubtful
debts. *2+
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2013 P21 Q2 ( a to c)

Raja supplied the following information relating to her trade receivables before the preparation of the
income statement for the year ended 31 May 2013.
1 31 May 2012 31 May 2013
$ $
Trade receivables 18 800 19 200
Provision for doubtful debts 940 ?
2 The following accounts are to be written off as bad debts.
$
R B Brown 502
L Wong 90
P Singh 288
3 The provision for doubtful debts is maintained at 5% of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 31 May 2013. Balance the
account and bring the balance down on 1 June 2013. *6+
(b) Indicate with a tick (✓) the effect a reduction in the provision for doubtful debts would have on
the following:
Increase Decrease No effect

Gross profit
Profit for the year
Trade receivables *3+
Raja is concerned that her profits have been falling and wishes to stop charging the provision for doubtful
debts in her income statement.
REQUIRED
(c) Advise Raja on whether she should continue to maintain a provision for doubtful debts. Give
reasons for your answer. *9+

Ann was informed that John Lee was unable to pay his outstanding balance of $2 300. It was agreed that
he would pay 40 cents for each dollar owed and he sent a cheque on 26 June 2013 in settlement. The
balance was written off as a bad debt.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the general journal entry to write off the bad debt. A narrative is required.
(e) Advise Ann why she should create a provision for doubtful debts. [6]
QUESTION 4 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (e to h)

Sofea provided the following information about her trade receivables.
1 On 28 February 2016 Wade Designs, which owed Sofea $5 100, was declared bankrupt.
A cheque for $1 800 was received. The balance of the debt was irrecoverable.
2 On 29 February 2016 the remaining trade receivables were:
Age of debt (Months) Amount ($) Provision for doubtful debts percentage (%)
Up to 1 month 18 000 2
1 to 3 months 12 200 5
3 to 6 months 3 300 10
Over 6 months 2 200 20
35 700
On 1 March 2015 the provision for doubtful debts account was $2 050.
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare the general journal to record the entries for Wade Designs on 28 February 2016.
A narrative is not required. *3+
(f) Calculate the provision for doubtful debts on 29 February 2016. *1+
(g) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 29 February 2016. *3+
(h) Name one accounting concept applied by Sofea in providing for doubtful debts. *1+
CHAPTER 6 SOLUTIONS
(c) Journal
2011 $ $
Sep 30 Bank 500
Bad debts ($2 500  $500) 2 000
Keira 2 500
(d) Calculation of provision for doubtful debts at 30 September 2011
Trade receivables Provision for Provision for
Age of debt
($) doubtful debts (%) doubtful debts ($)
George One month 11 500 2% 230
Ranjula Two months 9 500 2% 190
Harry Four months 5 000 10% 500
Trupti Eight months 1 500 20% 300
27 500 1 220
(e) Provision for Doubtful Debts account

2011 $ 2010 $
Sep 30 Income Statement (bal. figure) 280 Oct 01 Balance b/f 1 500
Sep 30 Balance c/d 1 220 2011
____ Sep 30 ____
1 500 1 500
(f) Prudence or conservatism concept
Matching concept
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2013 P21 Q2 ( a to c)

(a) Provision for Doubtful Debts account
2013 $ 2012 $
May 31 Income statement (balancing figure) 24 Jun 01 Balance b/f 940
May 31 Balance c/d *($19 200  $880) × 5%+ 916 ___
940 940
2013
Jun 01 Balance
Juneb/d
1 Balance b/d 916 916
(b) Increase Decrease No effect

Gross profit 
Profit for the year 
Trade receivables 
(c) This is in compliance of fundamental accounting concepts of ‘Prudence and Matching’. Under
prudence concept all expected losses like doubtful debts should be anticipated and accounted for
in advance. This will make profit figure more realistic and reliable. In addition, trade receivables in
the balance sheet will be reported at their net realizable values.
On the other hand, the matching/accruals concept requires expenses of a period to be set against
the revenues for that period. In the case of bad debts the amount written off in a period may
relate to sales from another period. There is a time lag between sales and finding out that a debt
is bad. If this overlaps two accounting periods then this breaks the matching concept.

(d) General Journal
2013 Dr ($) Cr ($)
June 26 Bad debts [$2 300  ($2 300 × 0.40)] 1 380
John Lee 1 380
(Amount receivable from John Lee written off)
(e) Provision for doubtful debts is created to anticipate all losses so that profits are not overstated
and to show trade receivables at their net realizable value. This is created to comply with
Prudence and matching concept.
QUESTION 4 MAY 2016 P21 & 22 Q2 (e to h)

(e) Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
Bank 1 800
Bad debts ($5 100  $1 800) 3 300
Wade Designs 5 100
(f) Calculation of provision for doubtful debts on 29 February 2016

$ x Provision (%) = $
Up to 1 month 18 000 x 2% = 360
1 to 3 months 12 200 x 5% = 610
3 to 6 months 3 300 x 10% = 330
Over 6 months 2 200 x 20% = 440
35 700 1 740
(g) Provision for doubtful debts account

2016 $ 2015 $
Feb 29 Income Statement 310 Mar 01 Balance b/f 2 050
Feb 29 Balance c/d (‘f’ part) 1 740 _____
2 050 2 050
(h) Prudence and matching concepts
Chapter 7 89 Financial Statements of Sole Traders
CHAPTER 7 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS OF SOLE TRADERS

Sue Searle is in the import business. The following balances were extracted from her books on 31 March
2009.
$
Sales 95 800
Purchases 48 340
Returns outwards 960
Inventory at 1 April 2008 10 780
Wages of motor vehicle driver 11 500
Motor vehicle running expenses 6 500
Motor vehicles at cost 20 000
Provision for depreciation of motor vehicle at 1 April 2008 15 000
Premises 60 000
Provision for depreciation of premises at 1 April 2008 12 000
Rent and insurance 7 700
Light and heat 4 950
General and marketing expenses 6 200
Discount received 5 300
Provision for doubtful debts 560
8 % Bank loan repayable 30 June 2011 30 000
Cash 270
Bank overdraft 1 680
Drawings 11 310
Capital at 1 April 2008 35 000
1 Inventory at 31 March 2009 was valued at $12 600.
2 The motor vehicle is used to bring purchases to the business premises of Sue Searle and to
deliver goods to customers. The motor vehicle is used 20% of the time to collect purchases and
80 % to deliver goods to customers.
3 Depreciation is to be charged on the premises at the rate of 2 % per annum on cost using the
straight line method and on the motor vehicle at 20 % per annum using the diminishing
(reducing) balance method.
4 The loan interest is outstanding at 31 March 2009.
5 Insurance, $450, was prepaid at 31 March 2009.
6 Electricity for lighting, $130, was due at 31 March 2009.
7 The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 2 % of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for Sue Searle for the year ended 31 March 2009. *18+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet of Sue Searle at 31 March 2009. *14+

The following balances were extracted from the books of Doji, a trader, on 30 September 2010:
$
Ordinary goods purchased (purchases) 70 000
Carriage inwards 3 000
Sales returns 9 500
Provisions for depreciation on motor vehicles 8 000
Provisions for depreciation on office equipment 4 000
Provision for doubtful debts 1 000
Salaries 23 750
Rent and rates 6 800
Sundry expenses 14 150
Advertising 6 200
Inventory at 1 October 2009 11 500
Capital 40 000
Drawings 12 000
Additional information at 30 September 2010

1 Inventory was valued at $14 600.
2 During the year Doji took goods costing $1 250 for his own use. No entries have been made in the
books.
3 Advertising, $300, was prepaid. Salaries, $2600, were accrued.
4 Depreciation is to be charged as follows:
office equipment at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight line method.
motor vehicles at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)balance
method;
5 Trade receivables (debtors) include a debt of $4250 which is considered irrecoverable and is to be
written off. The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 4% of all remaining debts.
6 On 1 April 2010 Doji made a short-term loan, $10 000, to the business. This was included in error
in the capital account. Interest payable at 5% per annum has not been entered in the books.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement of Doji for the year ended 30 September 2010. *22+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet of Doji at 30 September 2010. *18+
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q1 (c to e)

The balances on Christos’ books at 31 July 2011 were as follows:
$
Capital ?
Drawings 8 000
Provision for depreciation on office furniture 3 200

Inventory 4 150
Bank overdraft 250
Purchases 32 400
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the trial balance for Christos at 31 July 2011, including the capital account balance. *6+
(d) State the item in the trial balance which would include the balance on Michelle’s account. *1+
(e) State two differences between a trial balance and a balance sheet. *4+
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q5)

Jasmine is a retailer of fashion goods. The following balances were extracted from her books on 30
September 2011.
$
Purchases 113 500
Goods returned by customers 8 120
Goods returned to suppliers 3 400
Carriage 1 700
Insurance 5 600
Staff wages 27 000
Advertising 10 600
General expenses 15 850
Building costs 20 100
Land and buildings at cost 100 000
Fixtures and fittings at cost 18 000
Computer equipment at cost 12 000
Provisions for depreciation on fixtures and fittings 7 200
Provisions for depreciation on computer equipment 3 600
Disposal account 200 Cr
7% Bank loan repayable 30 March 2014 20 000
Drawings 15 500
Capital at 1 October 2010 80 000
Additional information:
1 Inventory at 30 September 2011 was valued at $11 780.

2 The cost of carriage from suppliers was $500, the remainder of the cost related to the delivery of
goods to customers.
3 At 30 September 2011 heating expenses, $375, were accrued and insurance, $1 120, is prepaid.
4 7% bank loan was received on 1 April 2011. Interest is payable on each anniversary of the loan.
5 Buildings costs consists of $16 000 to build an extension to the building and $4 100 to repair the
heating system.
6 Depreciation is charged on Computer equipment at the rate of 30% per annum using the
diminishing (reducing) balance method and on fixtures and fittings at the rate of 20% per annum
on cost using the straight line method.
7 A provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 5% of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for Jasmine for the year ended 30 September 2011. *24+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet of Jasmine at 30 September 2011. *16+

Yang is a supplier of goods to Win. Yang extracted a trial balance on 31 March 2012.
(i) State one purpose in preparing a trial balance. *2+
(ii) State whether the following accounts would be listed as a debit or a credit in the trial balance.
The first account has been completed as an example. *4+
Account Debit or Credit
Capital Credit
Inventory
Bank (overdraft)
Wages

Thien has a retail business. The following balances were extracted from his books at the end of his
financial year on 31 March 2012.
$
Leasehold property – 25 years (cost) 50 000
Equipment (cost) 54 000
Provisions for depreciation: Leasehold property 10 000
Equipment 17 000
6% Bank loan repayable 31 December 2015 25 000
Bank 5 150
Revenue 78 580
Purchases 18 240
Purchase returns 1 600
Equipment repairs 850

Equipment running expenses 2 650
Wages 15 300
Insurance 3 640
Power and water 2 300
Advertising 5 100
Discount allowed 1 650
Drawings 8 500
Additional information at 31 March 2012
2 Thien took stock valued at $450 for his own use.
3 Equipment running expenses, $750, were accrued and insurance, $1 350, was prepaid.
4 The 6% bank loan was received on 1 December 2011.
5 An appropriate amount is to be written off the lease.
6 The purchase of additional equipment, $10 000, had been omitted from the books.
Payment was $5 000 by cheque with the remainder on credit.
7 Equipment is to be depreciated at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
8 Provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 8% of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 March 2012. *20+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet at 31 March 2012. *20+
QUESTION 7 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (a & d)

Giorgos commenced business on 1 May 2012 with the following assets and liabilities.
$
Bank loan 6 000
Bank 1 000 Dr
Cash 600
Premises 15 000
Inventory 1 800
Trade payable – Early Ltd 1 200
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the opening trial balance showing clearly the value of the capital.
(d) On 31 May 2012 Giorgos prepared another trial balance.

State one use of a trial balance. *2+

Maria is in business as a retailer. The following balances were extracted from her books on
30 September 2012.
$
Drawings 21 000
Land and buildings at cost 150 000
Provisions for depreciation:
Land and buildings 10 000
8% Bank loan repayable 31 December 2020 50 000
Loan interest paid 2 000
Bank 14 070 Dr
Revenue 365 000
Purchases 135 000
Goods returned by customers 8 900
Purchase returns 4 250
Delivery expenses 18 630
Computer repairs expenses 19 150
General running expenses 31 600
Salaries and wages 86 700
Marketing costs 14 000
2 An invoice for a credit purchase of goods, $7 500, had been misplaced in December and no
entries had been recorded in the books.
3 The purchase of fixtures and fittings, $4 000, had been included in the general running expenses.
4 At 30 September 2012 computer repair expenses, $1 700, were accrued and salaries and wages
were prepaid, $5200.
5 The 8% bank loan was received on 1 January 2012.
6 Depreciation is to be charged on all non-current assets owned at the end of the year, as follows:
(i) Buildings at the rate of 2% per annum using the straight-line method.
No depreciation is charged on land. The land was valued at cost, $50 000.
(ii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 15% per annum using the straight-line method.
(iii) Computer equipment at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
7 A provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained on trade receivables. Debts up to 3 months old
at the rate of 4% and debts over 3 months old at the rate of 8%. One-quarter of the trade
receivables are over 3 months old.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2012. *22+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet at 30 September 2012. *18+

The following balances were extracted from the books of Patricia Chin on 31 March 2013.
$
Premises 67 000
Fixtures and fittings (cost) 20 000
Motor vehicle (cost) 18 000
Provisions for depreciation: Premises 2 680
Motor vehicle 11 520
Revenue 119 140
Purchases 60 200
Purchases returns 2 900
Wages 20 960
Insurance 12 600
Motor vehicle expenses 5 670
7% Bank loan (repayable 30 June 2018) 30 000
Capital 56 000
Drawings 12 840
1 Inventory at 31 March 2013 was valued at $4 200.
2 Insurance relates to a period of fourteen months to 31 May 2013.
3 A motor vehicle repair bill $225 was owing at 31 March 2013.
4 Bad debts of $246 are to be written off.
5 During the year Patricia took $800 from the bank for personal use.
No record of this was made in the books.
6 A purchase of fixtures and fittings during the year, $2 000, had been recorded in the general
expenses account.
7 Premises are depreciated at 2% per annum on cost.
Fixtures and fittings are depreciated at 8% per annum on cost.
Motor vehicles are depreciated at 20% per annum using the reducing balance method.
8 The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 6% of trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 March 2013. *20+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet (statement of financial position) at 31 March 2013. *20+
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P22 5

Franco is in business as a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from his books on 31 January
2014.
$
Land and buildings (cost) 150 000
Computer equipment (cost) 70 000
Bank 17 430 Dr
Revenue 362 500
Purchases 172 400
Returns inwards 7 200
Returns outwards 8 800
Inventory at 1 February 2013 17 970
Distribution expenses 16 300
Insurance 5 900
Wages and salaries 69 500
Marketing expenses 31 000
Commission received 11 400
Drawings 20 000
Capital 80 000
Additional information at 31 January 2014
2 Wages and salaries includes $15 000 drawings by Franco.
3 Marketing expenses, $6 750, were prepaid.
4 No interest had been paid on the bank loan.
5 Computer equipment costing $8 000 was purchased by cheque on 25 January 2014.
No entries had been made in the books.
6 Depreciation policy is as follows:
(i) The buildings are depreciated at the rate of 2% per annum using the straight line
method. Land and buildings consists of land, cost $50 000, and buildings, cost $100 000.
No depreciation is charged on the land.
(ii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 15% per annum using the straight line method.
balance method.
7 Trade receivables, $3 000, were considered irrecoverable. A provision for doubtful debts of 5% is
to be maintained.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 January 2014. [24]
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 January 2014. [16]

Cheng is a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from his books on 30 September 2015.
$
Revenue 315 000
Purchases 165 000
Commission receivable 12 500
Rent 15 000
Bank interest paid 1 200
Heat and light 6 500
Other operating expenses 7 100
Cash and bank 19 500 debit
Capital 15 000
Drawings 18 000
Motor vehicles (cost) 50 000
Provision for depreciation:
1 On 26 September 2015 goods had been purchased for $3 000 cash. The transaction had not been
recorded in the books.
3 The rent included a payment of $6 000 for the six months ending 31 December 2015.
4 Other operating expenses accrued $1 100.
5 Commission receivable of $2 500 was outstanding.
6 Depreciation is to be charged on all non-current assets owned at the end of the year as follows:
(i) Motor vehicles at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
(ii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 15% per annum, using the straight-line method.
7 Trade receivables of $2 000 are irrecoverable. The provision for doubtful debts is to be
maintained at 5% on the remaining trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2015. [22]
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position at 30 September 2015. [18]

Ning is a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from his books on 30 September 2015.
$
Revenue 248 200
Purchases 104 750
Advertising expenses 10 800
Electricity 4 230
Insurance 5 000
Loss on disposal 2 270
Leasehold premises (cost) 80 000
Computer equipment (at cost) 75 000
Leasehold premises 20 000
Bank 5 300 credit
8% Bank loan 50 000
Bank loan interest paid 3 000
Drawings 25 000

2 Distribution expenses accrued were $2 600.
3 Advertising expenses includes an advertising campaign costing $1 500 which runs from 1 August
to 31 December 2015.
4 The 8% Bank loan is repayable in 5 equal payments on 1 October each year.
5 The depreciation policy is as follows.
(i) The lease on the premises is for 20 years. An appropriate amount should be charged
each year.
(ii) Computer equipment at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
(iii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
No depreciation is charged in the year of disposal.
6 Trade receivables, $6 400, are irrecoverable. A provision for doubtful debts of 5% is to be
maintained.
REQUIRED

Suria is in business as a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from her books on 31 March
2016.
$
Revenue 287 000
Purchases 143 800
Capital 70 000
Drawings 28 000
Leasehold premises at cost (25 year lease) 100 000
Computers at cost 44 000
Office furniture at cost 15 500
Computers 16 600
Computer maintenance 12 200
Advertising 12 600
Cash and bank 520 Debit

3 Advertising included a payment of $5 700 for a series of advertisements being published in the
six months ending 31 July 2016.
4 General expenses accrued were $2 400.
5 A computer costing $8 000 had been recorded in the computer maintenance account.
(i) an appropriate amount on the leasehold premises.
(ii) computers at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
(iii) office furniture at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
maintained at 4%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement of Suria for the year ended 31 March 2016. *24+
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 March 2016. *16+
CHAPTER 7 SOLUTIONS
(a) Sue Searle
Income statement for the year ended 31 March 2009
f$ $ $
Sales 95 800
Cost of sales
Purchases 48 340
Carriage*,(20 00015 000)20%-+(11 500+6 500)+20% 3 800
Returns outwards (960) 51 180
61 960
Inventory at 31 March 2009 12 600 49 360
Gross profit 46 440
Expenses
Wages of motor vehicle driver ($11 500  80%) 9 200
Motor vehicle running expenses ($6 500  80%) 5 200
Depreciation: Vehicle*($20 00015 000)20%80%+ 800
Premises ($60 000  2%) 1 200
Rent and insurance ($7 700 – $450) 7 250
Light and heat ($4 950 + $130) 5 080
General and marketing expenses 6 200
Loan interest ($30 000  8%) 2 400 (37 330)
9 110
Other Incomes Discount received 5 300
Decrease in prov. for doubtful debts *(18 5002%)100+ 190 5 490
(b) Sue Searle

Balance Sheet
As at 31 March 2009
Non-current assets $ $ $
Premises 60 000
Provision for depreciation($12 000 + $1 200) (13 200) 46 800
Motor van 20 000
Provision for depreciation ($15 000 + $1 000) (16 000) 4 000
50 800
Current Assets
Inventory at 31 March 2009 12 600
Less Provision for doubtful debts ($18 500  2%) (370) 18 130
Cash 270
Prepaid insurance 450
31 450
Current Liabilities $ $ $
Bank Overdraft 1 680
Accrued interest 2 400
Lighting due 130 (13 960)
Net Current Assets 17 490
68 290
Non-current liabilities
8 % Bank loan repayable 30 June 2011 (30 000)
38 290
Financed by
49 600
Drawings (11 310) 38 290

(a) Income Statement
For the year ended 30 September 2010
$ $ $
Less Sales returns (9 500) 145 500
Cost of Sales
Opening Inventory 11 500
Add Ordinary goods purchased (purchases) ($70 000 ─ $1 250) 68 750
Carriage inwards 3 000 71 750
83 250
Less Closing inventory (14 600) (68 650)
Gross profit 76 850
Expenses
Salaries($23 750 + $2 600) 26 350
Advertising ($6 200 – $300) 5 900
Depreciation on motor vehicles *($42 000 – $8 000) ) × 25%+ 8 500
Depreciation on office equipment ($26 000 × 10%) 2 600
Bad debts 4 250
6
Loan interest ($10 000 × 5% × /12) 250 (68 800)
8 050
Other Incomes
Decrease in Prov for doubtful debts *1 000–,(23 000–4 250)×4%+ 250 5 850
(b) Balance Sheet

As at 30 September 2010
Depn. to Book
NON-CURRENT ASSETS Cost ($)
date ($) value ($)
Motor vehicles ($8 000 + $8 500) 42 000 16 500 25 500
Office equipment ($4 000 + $1 600) 26 000 6 600 19 400
68 000 23 100 44 900
CURRENT ASSETS $ $ $
Closing inventory 14 600
Trade receivables ($23 000 – $4 250) 18 750
Provision for doubtful debts *($23 000 – $4 250) × 4%+ (750) 18 000
Other receivables (prepaid advertising) 300
32 900
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Accrued salaries 2 600
Accrued interest on loan 250
Short term loan 10 000
Bank overdraft 16 000 (47 150) (14 250)
30 650
Equity
Capital at start ($40 000 – $10 000) 30 000
Add Profit for the year 13 900
Less Drawings ($12 000 + $1 250) (13 250) 30 650
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P21 Q1 (c to e)

(c) Trial Balance at 31 July 2011
$ $
Capital (balancing figure) 5 900
Drawings 8 000
Provision for depreciation on office furniture 3 200
Inventory 4 150
Bank overdraft 250
Purchases 32 400
Trade receivables 6 250 ____
66 400 66 400
(d) Trade receivables
(e) Trial balance Balance sheet
verifies arithmetic accuracy of ledger account
Shows financial position of the business
balances
Includes only items of capital nature (assets and
Includes all ledger account balances
liabilities)
No specific layout Prepared in specific classified order
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q5)

(a) Jasmine
Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2011
$ $ $
Less Sales returns (goods returned by customers) (8 120) 201 880
Cost of Sales
Add Purchases 113 500
Carriage inwards 500
Return outwards (goods returned to suppliers) (3 400) 110 600
120 030
Less Closing inventory (11 780) (108 250)
Gross profit 93 630
Expenses
Carriage outwards ($1 700  $500) 1 200
Insurance ($5 600  $1 120) 4 580
Light and heat ($6 300 + $375) 6 675
Staff wages 27 000
Advertising 10 600
Building repairs 4 100
Depreciation on fixtures ($18 000 × 20%) 3 600
Depreciation on computer *($12 000 – $3 600) ) × 30%+ 2 520
6
Loan interest ($20 000 × 7% × /12) 700 (76 825)
16 805
Other Incomes
Profit on disposal of non-current asset 200
Decrease in Provision for doubtful debts *$500 – ($8 200 × 5%)+ 90 2 040
(b) Balance Sheet
NON-CURRENT ASSETS $ $ $
Land and buildings at cost ($100 000 + $16 000) 116 000
Provisions for depreciation ($7 200 + $3 600) (10 800) 7 200
Provisions for depreciation($3 600 + $2 520) (6 120) 5 880
129 080
CURRENT ASSETS
Provision for doubtful debts ($8 200 × 5%) (410) 7 790
Other receivables (prepaid insurance) 1 120
20 690
CURRENT LIABILITIES $ $ $
Accrued heating 375
Accrued interest on loan 700 (46 325) (25 735)
103 345
Non-Current Liabilities
7% Bank loan repayable 30 March 2014 (20 000)
83 345
Equity
Capital at year start 80 000
Less Drawings (15 500) 83 345
(i)  A check on the arithmetical accuracy of double entry records
 Acts as a basis on which financial statements are prepared
 It is ‘prima facie’ evidence of the balancing of the accounts.
(ii) Account Debit/Credit
Provision for depreciation Credit
Inventory Debit
Bank (overdraft) Credit
Wages Debit
(a) Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2012
$ $ $
Revenue 78 580
Cost of sales
Opening inventory 4 690
Purchases ($18 240 − $450)) 17 790
Less Purchase returns (1 600) 16 190
Closing inventory (3 870) (17 010)
Gross profit 61 570
EXPENSES
Equipment repairs 850
Equipment running expenses ($2 650 + $750) 3 400
General running expenses 8 400
Wages 15 300
Insurance ($3 640 – $1 350) 2 290
Power and water 2 300
Advertising costs 5 100
4
Loan interest ($25 000 × 6% × /12) 500
Depreciation: Lease ($50 000 ÷ 25 years) 2 000
Equipment *($54 000 + $10 000) − $17 000+ × 20% 9 400 (51 190)
10 380
Other Incomes $ $ $
Decrease in Provision for doubtful debts *$700 − ($6 750 × 8%)+ 160 490
(b) Balance sheet as at 31 March 2012
Cost Accumulated NBV
depreciation
Non-current Assets $ $ $
Leasehold ($10 000 + $2 000) 50 000 12 000 38 000
Equipment ($54000 + $10000); ($17000 + $9400) 64 000 26 400 37 600
114 000 46 000 75 600
Current Assets
Inventory 3 870
Other receivables (prepaid insurance) 1 350
Bank ($5 150 – $5 000) 150
11 580
Current liabilities $ $ $
Payable for equipment 5 000
Other payables ($750 + $500) 1 250 10 260 1 320
76 920
6% Bank loan (25 000)
51 920
EQUITY
60 870
Drawings ($8 500 + $450) (8 950) 51 920
QUESTION 7 MAY 2012 P22 Q1 (a & d)

(a) Giorgios
Trial Balance at 1 May 2012
Debit Credit
$ $
Bank loan 6000
Bank 1 000
Cash 600
Premises 15 000
Inventory 1 800
Trade payable – Early Ltd 1 200
Capital _____ 11 200
18 400 18 400
(d) A check on the arithmetical accuracy of double entry records

Acts as a basis on which financial statements are prepared
It is ‘prima facie’ evidence of the balancing of the accounts.
(a) Maria’s Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2012
$ $ $
Revenue 365 000
Return inwards (8 900) 356 100
Cost of Sales
Purchases ($135 000 + $7 500) 142 500
Less Purchase returns (4 250) 138 250
Cost of sales 220 800
Gross profit
EXPENSES
9
Loan interest *($50 000 × 8% × /12) 3 000
Delivery expenses 18 630
Computer repairs ($19 150 + $1 700) 20 850
General running expenses ($31 600 – $4 000) 27 600
Salaries and wages ($86 700 – $5 200) 81 500
Marketing costs 14 000
Depreciation: Buildings *($150 000 – $50 000) × 2%+ 2 000
Fixtures *($28 000 + $4 000) × 15%+ 4 800
Computers *($40 000–$12 000) × 25%+ 7 000 (201 780)
19 020
OTHER INCOMES
Decrease in Provision for doubtful debts
1 3
*,($60 000× /4)×8%-+,($60000× /4)×4%-+$6 400 3 400 10 700
(b) Balance sheet at 30 September 2012
NON CURRENT ASSETS Cost ($) Depn ($) NBV ($)
Land & buildings ($10 000 + $2 000) 150 000 12 000 138 000
Fixtures and fittings ($28 000 + $4 000) ; ($19 000+$4 800) 32 000 23 800 8 200
Computer equipment ($12 000 + $7 000) 40 000 19 000 21 000
222 000 54 800 167 200
CURRENT ASSETS
Inventory 36 450
Less Provision for doubtful debts 3 000 57 000
Other receivables (prepaid salaries & wages) 5 200
Bank 14 070
112 720
Trade payables ($31 000 + $7 500) 38 500
Other payables: Interest due($3 000  $2 000) 1 000
Repairs owing 1 700 (41 200) 71 520
238 720
NON CURRENT LIABILITIES
8% Bank loan (50 000)
188 720
EQUITY
Drawings (21 000) 188 720

(a) Patricia Chin
Income Statement for the year ended 31 March 2013
$ $ $
Revenue 119 140
Cost of Sales
Inventory 1 April 2012 5 430
Purchases 60 200
Purchases returns (2 900) 57 300
Inventory 31 March 2013 (4 200) (58 530)
Gross profit 60 610
Other Incomes
Decrease in prov. for doubtful debts *$800($7300×6%)+ 362 1 146
61 856
EXPENSES
Wages 20 960
General expenses ($9 100  $2 000) 7 100
Insurance *$12 600  ($12 600 × /14)+
2
10 800
Motor expenses ($5 670 + $225) 5 895
Loan interest ($30 000 × 7%) 2 100
Bad debts 246
Depreciation:
Premises ($67 000 x 2%) 1 340
Fixtures and fittings ($20 000 + $2000 x 8%) 1 760
Motor vehicle ($18000 - $11520 x 20%) 1 296 (52 925)
Profit for year 8 931
(b) Balance Sheet (Statement of Financial Position) as at 31 March 2013
Non-current assets Cost ($) Depn ($) NBV ($)
Premises ($2 680 + $1 340) 67 000 4 020 62 980
Fixtures and fittings ($20 000 + $2 000); ($9 600 + $1 760) 22 000 11 360 10 640
Motor vehicle($11 520 + $1 296) 18 000 12 816 5 184
107 000 28 196 78 804
Current assets $ $ $
Inventory 4 200
Trade receivables ($7 546  $246) 7 300
2
Other receivables (Prepaid insurance) ($12 600 × /14) 1 800
12 862
Current liabilities
Other payables ($225 + $2 100) 2 325
Bank overdraft ($2 330 + $800) 3 130 (10 375) 2 487
81 291
Non-current liabilities 7% bank loan (30 000)
51 291
Equity
Capital 56 000
Drawings ($12 840 + $800) (13 640) 51 291
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P22 5
(a) Franco’s Income Statement for the year ended 31 January 2014
$ $ $
Revenue 362 500
Return inwards (7 200) 355 300
Cost of Sales
Inventory 1 February 2013 17 970
Purchases 172 400
Return outwards (8 800) 463600
Gross profit 189 330
OTHER INCOMES
Profit on disposal of assets 500 11 900
201 230
EXPENSES
Insurance 5 900
Wages and salaries ($69 500 – $15 000) 54 500
Marketing expenses ($31 000 – $6 750) 24 250
Depreciation: Buildings ($100 000 × 2%) 2 000
Fixtures ($30 000 × 15%) 4 500
Computer($70 000 + $8 000 – $4 000) × 25% 11 000
Loan interest ($100 000 × 8%) 8 000
Bad debts 3 000
Increase in provision for doubtful debts [45000–3000]×5%]– $1400] 700 (147 200)
Profit of the year 54 030
Statement of Financial Position at 31 January 2014

Accumulated
Cost ($) NBV($)
NON-CURRENT ASSETS Depreciation($)
Land and buildings ($20 000 + $2 000) 150 000 22 000 128 000
Fixtures and fittings ($13 500 + $4 500) 30 000 18 000 12 000
Computer equipment (70000+8 000); (34 000+11 000) 78 000 45 000 33 000
258 000 85 000 173 000
CURRENT ASSETS
Inventory 15 600
Less Provision for doubtful debt ($42 000 × 5%) (2 100) 39 900
Other receivables (prepaid marketing expenses) 6 750
Bank ($17 430 – $8 000) 9 430
71 680
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables – accrued interest ($100 000 × 8%) 8 000 45 650 26 030
199 030
NON–CURRENT LIABILITIES
8% Bank loan (100 000)
99 030
EQUITY
Capital 80 000
Less Drawings ($20 000 + $15 000) (35 000) 99 030

(a) Cheng
$ $
Revenue 315 000
Cost of Sales
Inventory 1 October 2014 36 800
Purchases ($165 000 + $3 000) 168 000
Returns outwards (2 600)
202 200
Closing inventory 30 September 2015 (29 980)
Cost of sales (172 220)
Other Incomes
Commission receivable ($12 500 + $2 500) 15 000
157 780
Expenses
1
Rent [$15 000 – ($6 000 × /2)] 12 000
Bank loan interest ($30 000 × 6%) 1 800

Operating expenses ($7 100 + $1 100) 8 200
Depreciation: Motor vehicles [($50 000  $10 000) × 20%] 8 000
Fixtures and fittings ($24 000 × 15%) 3 600
Bad debts 2 000
Increase in Provision for doubtful debts [($32 000 × 5%)  $1 000] 600 (94 700)
(b) Cheng
Statement of Financial Position as at 30 September 2015
Accumulated Book
Non-Current Assets Cost
depreciation Value
$ $ $
Motor vehicles ($10 000 + $8 000) 50 000 18 000 32 000
Fixtures and fittings 24 000 21 600 2 400
74 000 39 600 34 400
Current Assets
Trade receivables ($34 000  $2 000) 32 000
Less Provision for doubtful debts ($32 000 × 5%) (1 600) 30 400
1
Other receivables [($6 000 × /2) + $2 500] 5 500
Cash and bank ($19 500 – $3 000) 16 500 82 380
Total Assets 116 780
Capital and Liabilities
Capital 15 000
78 080
6% Bank loan 30 000
Current Liabilities
Other payables [{($30 000 × 6%)  $1 200} + $1 100] 1 700 26 700
116 780
(a) Income Statement for the year ended 30 September 2015
$ $
Revenue 248 200
Returns inwards (7 850) 240 350
Cost of Sales
Purchases 104 750
Closing inventory - 30 September 2015 (17 300) (111 300)
Other Incomes $ $
Commission received 5 900 14 150
143 200
Expenses:
3
Advertising [$10 800 – ($1 500 × /5)] 9 900
Distribution expenses ($17 200 + $2 600) 19 800
Electricity 4 230
Insurance 5 000
Depreciation – Leasehold premises ($80 000 ÷ 20 years) 4 000
Computer equipment [($75 000  $23 000) × 25%] 13 000
Fixtures and fittings ($30 000 × 10%) 3 000
Bad debts 6 400
Increase in Provision for doubtful debts [($38 000 × 5%)  $1 500] 400 (107 000)
(b) Ning
Statement of Financial Position
Non-Current Assets Cost Depn. NBV
$ $ $
Leasehold premises ($20 000 + $4 000) 80 000 24 000 56 000
185 000 80 500 104 500
Current Assets
Inventory 17 300
3
Other receivables – prepayments ($1 500 × /5) 900 54 300
Total Assets 158 800
Capital and Liabilities
Capital 50 000
8% Bank loan ($50 000  $10 000) 40 000
Current Liabilities
Other payables – accruals [$2 600 + {($50 000 × 8%) $3 000}] 3 600
8% Bank loan payable in following year 10 000
Bank 5 300 57 600
158 800

(a) Suria
$ $
Revenue 287 000
Less Return inwards (3 150) 283 850
Cost of Sales
Purchases 143 800
Closing Inventory (17 990) ( 141 150)
Other Incomes Commission receivable ($4 900 + $1 400) 6 300
149 000
Expenses:
Computer maintenance expenses ($12 200  $8 000) 4 200
4
Advertising [$12 600 – ($5 700 × /6)] 8 800
General expenses ($8 700 + $2 400) 11 100
Depreciation: Leasehold premises ($100 000 ÷ 25 years) 4 000
Computers [{($44 000+ $8 000) $16 600)} × 25%] 8 850
Office furniture ($15 500 × 10%) 1 550
Bad debts 1 900
Increase in Provision for doubtful debts[{(279001900)×4%}  $910] 130 (86 730)
(b) Suria
Statement of financial position at 31 March 2016
Assets Cost Aggregate book
depn value
Non-Current Assets $ $ $
Leasehold premises ($7 000 + $4 000) 100 000 11 000 89 000
Computers ($44 000+ $8 000) ; ($16 600 + $8 850) 52 000 25 450 26 550
Office furniture ($12 000 + $1 550) 15 500 13 550 1 950
167 500 50 000 117 500
Current Assets
Inventory 17 990
Provision for doubtful debts [($27 900  $1 900) × 4%] (1 040) 24 960
Other receivables: Commission receivable 1 400
4
Prepaid advertising ($5 700 × /6)] 3 800
Cash and cash equivalents 520 48 670
166 170
Equity $ $
Capital 70 000
132 270
Current liabilities
6% Bank loan 40 000
Other payables : Accrued general expenses 2 400
Accrued interest {($40 000 × 6%)$1 500}] 900 61 900
166 170
Chapter 8 115 Partnership Accounts
CHAPTER 8 PARTNERSHIP ACCOUNTS

The information below relates to the partnership of Bell and Hayward.
Capital 1 May 2008 $
Bell 40 000
Hayward 20 000
Current accounts 1 May 2008
Bell Nil
Hayward 1 500 Dr
Drawings for the year ended 30 April 2009
Bell 6 000
Hayward 20 000
The partnership agreement includes the following terms:

1 Interest on capital is allowed at 6 % per annum.
2 Hayward receives a salary of $12 000.
3 Interest on drawings is charged at 4 % per annum on total drawings for the year.
4 Profits and losses are shared equally.
Additional capital, $10 000, was introduced by Bell on 1 August 2008. Net profit for the year ended 30
April 2009 was $20 500.
REQUIRED
(a) State two differences between a partnership and a limited company. *4+
(b) Prepare the appropriation account for the year ended 30 April 2009. *8+
(c) Prepare the current account of Hayward for the year ended 30 April 2009. Bring down the
balance on 1 May 2009. *4+

Paul and Judi are partners in a retail business. The partnership agreement states that they share profits
and losses in the ratio 3:2, after allowing interest on capital at the rate of 4% per annum. The following
balances were extracted from the books on 30 September 2009.
$
Capital accounts: Paul 30 000
Judi 20 000
Current accounts: Paul Cr 2 300
Judi Dr 650
Drawings: Paul 11 000
Judi 10 000
Purchases 139 750
Sales 210 000
Returns inward 4 500
Staff wages 18 000
Rent receivable 6 000

Rent 17 500
Provision for depreciation of fixtures and fittings 12 600
Bank (Dr) 16 650
2 Paul withdrew goods costing $4 000 from the partnership business during the year. This had not
been recorded in the books.
3 At 30 September 2009:
Advertising expenses, $2 850, were prepaid. Rent receivable, $2 000, was due.
4 Depreciation is charged on fixtures and fittings at 15% per annum on cost using the straight line
method.
5 Additional fixtures and fittings, $4 000, were purchased on 31 January 2009. These are included
in the balance at 30 September 2009. No other changes in non-current assets occurred during
the year. Depreciation is calculated from the date of purchase.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement of Paul and Judi for the year ended 30 September 2009. *19+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet of Paul and Judi at 30 September 2009. The current accounts details
may be included within the balance sheet or in account format outside the balance sheet. *12+

Choong and Tan are partners sharing profits and losses in the ratio 2:1. Interest is allowed on partners’
capital at the rate of 5% per annum and Tan receives a salary of $9 000 per annum. No interest is charged
on drawings.
Balances remaining in the books at 30 April 2011 included the following:
$
Capital accounts: Choong 80 000
Tan 50 000
Current accounts: Choong Cr 1 200
Tan Dr 1 500
Drawings Choong 14 700
Tan 16 000
Goodwill 90 000
REQUIRED
(a) State two items, other than the profit sharing ratio, that might be included in a partnership
agreement. *2+
(b) Prepare the appropriation account of Choong and Tan for the year ended 30 April 2011. *5+
(c) Prepare the current accounts of Choong and Tan for the year ended 30 April 2011.
Balance the accounts and bring down the balances on 1 May 2011. *7+
On 1 May 2011, Choong and Tan agreed that goodwill would not be retained on the books.
REQUIRED
(d) State one reason why Choong and Tan may have decided not to retain goodwill on the books. *2+
(e) Prepare the capital accounts of Choong and Tan. Balance the accounts and bring down the
balance on 1 May 2011 after writing off the goodwill. *4+

Fu, Li and Yang are partners in a retail business. The partnership agreement states that they share profits
and losses in the ratio 2:2:1.
Interest on capital is allowed at the rate of 4% per annum and interest is charged on drawings at the rate
of 5% per annum on the balances at 30 April 2011.
The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 April 2011.
Capital accounts $
Fu 40 000
Li 35 000
Yang 25 000
Current accounts
Fu 2 500Cr
Li 1 500 Cr
Yang 1 000 Dr
Drawings $
Fu 10 000
Li 10 000
Yang 12 000
Premises 44 750
Bank 7 560 Dr
Purchases 111 200
Returns outward 4 750
Inventory at 1 May 2010 30 650
Salaries and wages 42 100
Rent 7 500
Additional information at 30 April 2011:

2 General expenses, $4 200, were prepaid.
3 Rent, $2 500, was accrued.
Motor vehicles at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% per annum on cost, using the straight line method.
6 On 30 April 2011 the partners agreed to allow Yang to reduce his capital balance by $10 000. The
sum was transferred to his current account on that date. The transfer took place after calculating
the interest on capital for the year.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account of Fu, Li and Yang for the year ended 30
April 2011. *24+
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position (balance sheet) of Fu, Li and Yang at 30 April 2011. The
current accounts details may be included within the statement of financial position (balance
sheet) or in ledger account format. *16+

Donney and Raj are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 2:1. Interest is allowed on capital
at the rate of 4% per annum. Raj receives a salary of $12 000 per annum.
The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 September 2011:
Capital accounts $
Donney 150 000
Raj 100 000
Current accounts
Donney Cr 15 000
Raj Dr 3 500
Drawings
Donney 15 000
Raj 15 000
Purchases 173 000
Carriage 16 500
Administration expenses 25 750
Advertising 23 480

8% Loan repayable 31 December 2025 50 000
Bank Cr 4 380
1 Inventory at 30 September 2011, $61 450.
2 Carriage is to be apportioned 30% to the collection of purchases and 70% to the delivery of goods
to customers.
3 At 30 September 2011:
Administration expenses, $630, were prepaid.
Wages and salaries, $2 700, were accrued.
4 Depreciation is to be charged on:
Motor vehicles at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method.
Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 15% on cost using the straight-line method.
5 Trade receivables include a debt of $2 500 which is considered irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account of Donney and Raj for the year ended
30 September 2011. *23+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet of Donney and Raj at 30 September 2011.
The current accounts details may be included within the balance sheet or in account format
outside the balance sheet. *17+

Su and Li are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 3:2. Interest is allowed on capital at the
rate of 5% per annum. Su is entitled to a salary of $15 000 per annum. The following balances were
extracted from the books on 30 April 2012:
$
Equipment (cost) 48 000
Equipment 12 000
Revenue 380 000
Purchases 170 000
Returns from customers 11 100
Returns to suppliers 8 900
Carriage outwards 6 290

Communication expenses 8 900
Building works 24 000
6% Loan repayable 31 December 2020 80 000
Bank deposit 5 000
Bank Cr 9 150
Capital accounts: Su 120 000
Li 100 000
Current accounts: Su Cr 500
Li Dr 2 700
Drawings: Su 20 000
Li 14 000
1 Inventory at 30 April 2012, $38 500.
2 The $15 000 salary paid to Su had been posted to the wages and salaries account and not to her
drawings account.
3 Building works consisted of an extension to the building, $20 000, and repairs to the existing air
conditioning, $4 000.
4 At 30 April 2012 communication expenses, $890, were prepaid and marketing expenses, $4 000,
were accrued.
(i) Buildings at the rate of 2% per annum on cost. No depreciation is charged on land.
On 1 April 2011 the land was valued at $75 000.
(ii) Equipment at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method.
(iii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% using the straight-line method.
6 Trade receivables contain a debt of $3000 which is considered irrecoverable.
7 The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 6% of remaining trade receivables.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account of Su and Li for the year ended 30 April
2012. *22+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet of Su and Li at 30 April 2012. The current accounts details may be
included within the balance sheet or in account format outside the balance sheet. *18+

Genet and Vass are in partnership. The following balances were extracted from their books on 31 January
2013.
Capital accounts 1 February 2012 $

Genet 60 000
Vass 40 000
Current accounts 1 February 2012
Genet 2 400 Cr
Vass 3 600 Dr
Drawings
Genet 9 000
Vass 10 000
Inventory 1 February 2012 12 400
Purchases 66 200
Revenue 148 200
Import duty 2 846
Transport costs 4 330
Wages 9 600
Insurance premiums 10 400
Discounts received 2 428
Storage expenses 9 612
Leasehold property (cost) 80 000
8% Bank loan repayable 1 May 2018 15 000
Storage equipment (cost) 26 000
Leasehold property 12 000
Storage equipment 9 360
Bank 1 202 Cr
1 Inventory was valued at $14 230 on 31 January 2013.
2 Insurance premiums were paid up to 28 February 2013.
3 General expenses, $322, were owing at the year end.
4 A bad debt, $110, is to be written off.
5 The costs of bringing goods into the business amounts to 80% of the transport costs.
6 New storage equipment, $6 000, was purchased during the year. This had been recorded in the
storage expenses account in error.
8 A full year’s depreciation charge is made on non-current assets in the year of purchase, but no
charge is made in the year of sale. Depreciation is charged as follows:
a Leasehold at $2000 per annum.
b Storage equipment at 12% using the straight-line method of depreciation.

c Motor vehicles at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing balance method.
9 The partnership agreement states:
Interest on capital is allowed at 4% per annum.
Vass is to receive an annual salary of $5 000.
Profits and losses are to be shared in the ratio of their capital.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account for the year ended 31 January 2013.*24+
(b) Draw up the current accounts of the partners for the year ended 31 January 2013. *5+
(c) Prepare the balance sheet (statement of financial position) at 31 January 2013. *11+

Cain and Les are in partnership providing book-keeping and general administration services to small
businesses. They share profits and losses in the ratio of 3:2 respectively. Interest on drawings is charged at
4%, while interest on capital is allowed at the rate of 5% p.a.. Les receives an annual salary of $16 000.
The following balances were extracted from their books on 30 September 2013:
Capital accounts 1 October 2012 $
Cain 90 000
Les 60 000
Current accounts 1 October 2012
Cain Cr 700
Les Dr 15 500
Drawings
Cain 12 000
Les 15 000
Premises at cost 118 000
Office equipment at cost 60 000
Motor vehicles at cost 22 000
Provision for depreciation: Premises 7 080
Fees (Revenue) 103 769
Staff salaries 14 170
Communication expenses 7 680
Discounts allowed 3 400
Discounts received 1 400
Bank Dr 20 889
1 Commission received, $2 400, had been credited to the communication expenses account in
error.
2 Heat and light, $150, were outstanding and general expenses $1 010 were prepaid on 30
September 2013.
3 Bank charges, $123, had not been recorded in the books.
4 Motor vehicle expenses, $2 000, had been recorded in the motor vehicles account.
6 Depreciation is charged on premises and office equipment at the rate of 6% and 12% respectively
using the straight line method.
7 Motor vehicles are depreciated at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
8 On 1 October 2012 Cain reduced his capital account balance by $10 000. This sum was to be left
in the business as an interest free loan, to be repaid on 31 March 2018.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare income statement & appropriation account for the year ended 30 September 2013. [20]
(b) Prepare the current accounts for the year ended 30 September 2013. [7]
(c) Prepare the balance sheet (statement of financial position) at 30 September 2013. [13]

Chan and Fong are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 2:1. Interest is allowed on capital
at the rate of 5% per annum and is charged on drawings at the rate of 5% per annum. Fong receives a
salary of $10 000 per annum. The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 April 2014.
$
Revenue 480 500
Purchases 209 000
Office expenses 36 500
Selling expenses 30 800
Capital accounts:
Chan 60 000
Fong 40 000
Current accounts:
Chan 1 500 Cr
Fong 4 000 Cr
Drawings
Chan 6 000
Fong 10 000
8% Loan repayable 30 March 2016 200 000
Bank 34 500 Dr
2 The motor vehicle expenses are to be apportioned one quarter to collecting goods for resale and
three quarters to delivery of goods to customers.
3 At 30 April 2014:
(i) Heat and light, $750, was accrued
(ii) Office expenses, $4 000, were prepaid.
4 Half of Fong’s $10 000 salary had been paid to him and posted to the wages and salaries account.
5 Fixtures and fittings costing $2 000 purchased by cheque on 20 April 2014 had not been recorded
in the books.
6 Depreciation is to be charged on all non-current assets owned at the end of the year:
method
(ii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% using the straight-line method.
7 Trade receivables contains a debt of $7 500, which is considered irrecoverable. The provision for
doubtful debts is to be maintained at 6%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account for the year ended 30 April 2014. [22]
(b) Prepare the current accounts for the year ended 30 April 2014. [4]
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 30 April 2014. [14]

Darius and Edgar are in partnership. The partnership agreement states that they share profits and losses in
the ratio 3:2. Interest on capital is allowed at the rate of 5% per annum. Edgar is entitled to a salary of $12
000 per annum. The following balances were extracted from the books on 31 July 2014.
$
Leasehold buildings (cost) 75 000
Leasehold buildings 18 000

8% Bank loan (repayable 31 March 2015) 40 000
Bank 31 400 Dr
Capital accounts:
Darius 40 000
Edgar 40 000
Current accounts at 1 August 2013:
Darius 500 Cr
Edgar 900 Cr
Drawings:
Darius 12 000
Edgar 12 000
Purchases 148 300
Revenue 256 000
Inventory at 1 August 2013 25 800
Rent payable 12 000
Additional information at 31 July 2014

2 Other operating expenses prepaid $1 800.
3 Rent receivable of $1 500 was outstanding.
(i) an appropriate amount is to be charged on the leasehold buildings which are held on a
25 year lease
(ii) motor vehicles at the rate of 30% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
(iii) fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
maintained at 4%.
6 On 31 January 2014 the partners had agreed to allow Edgar to increase his capital by $20 000.
Edgar paid a cheque into the partnership bank account on that date.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account for the year ended 31 July 2014. *23+
(b) Prepare the current accounts for the year ended 31 July 2014. *4+
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 July 2014. *13+

Farah and Hana are in partnership. The partnership agreement states that they share profits and losses
equally. Interest on capital is allowed at the rate of 4% per annum. Interest is charged on drawings made
during the year at the rate of 5% per annum. No salaries are paid to the partners.
$
Premises (cost) 60 000
Delivery vehicles (cost) 30 000
Office fixtures (cost) 15 000
Premises 3 600
Delivery vehicles 10 000
Office fixtures 11 000
Capital accounts: Farah 50 000
Hana 30 000
Current accounts at 1 May 2014: Farah 3 250 Cr
Hana 1 850 Cr
Drawings: Farah 6 000
Hana 6 000
Purchases 81 250
Revenue 190 000
Delivery vehicle expenses 14 900
The following information was available 30 April 2015.
2 Advertising expenses prepaid were $800.
3 Heat and light $150 was outstanding.
Premises at the rate of 2% on cost per annum
Delivery vehicles at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
Office fixtures at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
5 The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 4%.
6 A cheque payment of $550, made to a credit supplier on 15 April, had not been recorded in the
books.
REQUIRED

Aina and Barry are in partnership. The partnership agreement states the following:
Interest is charged on drawings at the rate of 6% per annum
Interest is paid on capital at the rate of 4% per annum
Interest is paid on partners’ loans at the rate of 5% per annum
Barry receives a salary of $8 000 per annum
3 2
Profits and losses are shared /5 Aina and /5 Barry.
The following information was available on 1 May 2014.
$
Capital account Aina 50 000
Barry 20 000
Current account Aina 800 debit
Barry 6 500 credit
Loan to partnership Barry 40 000
Additional information for the year ended 30 April 2015
1 Barry increased his capital in the partnership by $20 000 on 1 November 2014.
2 Drawings during the year were:
$
Aina 7 500
Barry 10 000
3 Profit for the year before loan interest was $19 800.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the appropriation account of the partnership for the year ended 30 April 2015. [8]
(b) Prepare the current accounts of the partners for the year ended 30 April 2015. Balance the
accounts and bring down the balances on 1 May 2015. [6]
(c) State two advantages of a partnership. [2]

Li and Yang are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 3:2. Interest is allowed on capital at
the rate of 4% per annum and is charged on drawings at the rate of 10% per annum.
Partners are entitled to annual salaries, Li $8 000 and Yang $5 000.
The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 September 2016.
Capital accounts $
Li 50 000
Yang 50 000
Current accounts
Li 4 300 Credit
Yang 2 900 Credit
Drawings $
Li 15 000
Yang 9 000
Computing equipment (cost) 60 000
Computing equipment 20 000
Revenue 625 000
Purchases 295 000
Returns to supplier 4 850
5% Bank loan (repayable 2021) 120 000
Bank 25 600 Credit
1 Inventory at 30 September 2016 was $57 900.
2 A sale of goods made on credit on 26 September, $2 800, had not been recorded in the books.
3 At 30 September 2016
Marketing expenses, $1 100, were accrued
Administration expenses $250, were prepaid.
4 The partners’ salaries had been paid to Li and Yang. These had been posted to the wages and
salaries account.
5 Office fixtures costing $5 000 and with an accumulated depreciation of $3 000 had been sold for
$2 000. A cheque was received on 20 August 2016. No entries had been recorded in the books.
(i) buildings at the rate of 2% per annum. The buildings have a cost of $100 000. No
depreciation is charged on land.
(ii) computing equipment at the rate of 30% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
(iii) office fixtures at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method.
7 Trade receivables include a debt of $4 000 which is considered irrecoverable. The provision for
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account for the year ended 30 September
2016. [19]
(b) Prepare the current accounts for the year ended 30 September 2016. Balance the accounts and
bring down the balances on 1 October 2016. [5]
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 30 September 2016. [16]
CHAPTER 8 SOLUTIONS
(a)
Possible differences Partnership Company
Liability of partners towards the The liability of individual members is
debts of the partnership is unlimited limited to the fully paid amount of the
meaning that if a partnership is shares they own.
unable to meet its debts from its
Liability of the owners
assets, then private assets of
partners may be used to pay off the
unpaid amount of the debt (unless
he is a limited partner).
A partnership is not a separate legal A limited company is a separate legal
entity, so all partners are personally entity quite distinct from the
Legal status liable for the debts of the firm and members who form the company. A
the property is owned by them company can own property in its own
jointly as partners. name, sue and be sued.
Minimum number of partners is two, Minimum number of shareholders is
with maximum number limited to 20 two, with no upper limit except, of
Number of owners (with the exception of different course, that it is limited by the
service providing professionals e.g. number of authorized shares.
lawyers, accountants etc.)
A partner cannot easily transfer his A shareholder can easily transfer his
Transferability of
share within the partnership without share within the company without the
ownership
the consent of other partners. consent of other shareholders.
All partners (except partner with All ordinary shareholders have no say
Management of limited liability) are entitled to in the management of a company
business manage the affairs of the business. rather it vests in the hands of a few
directors elected by shareholders.
(b) Bell and Hayward’s Appropriation Account
$ $
Interest on drawings:
Bell ($6 000  4%) 240
Hayward ($20 000  4%) 800 1 040
21 540
Interest on capital:
Bell *($40 000  6%) + ($10 000  6%  /12)+
9
2 850
Hayward ($20 000  6%) 1 200
Salary – Hayward 12 000 (16 050)
5 490
Profit Share:
Bell ($5 490  /2)
1
2 745
Hayward ($5 490  /2)
1
2 745 5 490
(c) Hayward - Current account

$ $
Balance b/f 1 500 Interest on capital 1 200
Interest on drawings 800 Salary 12 000
Drawings 20 000 Profit share 2 745
_____ Balance c/d 6 355
22 300 22 300
Balance b/d 6 355

(a) Paul and Judi
Income statement for the year ended 30 September 2009
$ $ $
Sales 210 000
less Returns In 4 500 205 500
Cost of Sales
Purchases 139 750
148 400
Closing inventory (15 400) 133 000
Gross profit c/f 72 500
$ $
Gross profit b/f 72 500
Expenses
Staff wages 18 000
Advertising ($10 000  $2 850) 7 150
Rent 17 500
Depreciation*$24 000  $4 000) × 15%+ + ($4 000 × 15% × /12)
8
3 400
Increase in provision for doubtful debts*($16 000 × 5%)$550+ 250 (55 950)
16 550
Other Incomes
Rent receivable ($6 000 + $2 000) 8 000
Interest on capital: Paul ($30 000 × 4%) 1 200
Judi ($20 000 × 4%) 800 (2 000)
22 550
3
Share of profit: Paul ($22 550 × /5) 13 530
2
Judi ($22 550 × /5) 9 020 22 550
(b) Paul and Judi

Balance Sheet as at 30 September 2009
Non-current assets $ $ $
Fixtures ($12 600 + $3 400) 24 000
Provision for Depreciation 16 000 8 000
Current Assets $ $ $
Less Provision for doubtful debts($16 000 × 5%) 800 15 200
Prepaid advertising 2 850
Bank 16 650
52 100
Current Liabilities Trade payables 8 900 43 200
51 200
Financed By
Capital: Paul 30 000
Judi 20 000 50 000
Current accounts(W 1) Paul 2 030
Judi (830) 1 200 51 200
WORKINGS Current Accounts

Paul ($) Judy ($) Paul ($) Judy ($)
Balance b/f 650 Balance b/f 2 300
Drawings 15 000 10 000 Interest 1 200 800
Balance c/d 2 030 Profits 13 530 9 020
_____ _____ Balance c/d _____ 830
17 030 10 650 17 030 10 650

(a)  Amounts of partners’ salaries
 Rate of interest to be allowed on capital
 Rate of interest to be charged on drawings
 Arrangements for admission or retirement of partners
(b) Choong and Tan
Appropriation Account for the year ended 30 April 2011
$ $
Interest on capital: Choong ($80 000 × 5%) 4 000
Tan ($50 000 × 5%) 2 500
Salary: Tan 9 000 (15 500
16 500
2
Share of profit: Choong ($16 500 × /3) 11 000
1
Tan ($16 500 × /3) 5 500 16 500
(c) Partners’ Current Accounts
Choong Tan Choong Tan
Balance b/f 1 500 Balance b/f 1 200
Drawings 14 700 16 000 Interest on capital 4 000 2 500
Balance c/d 1 500 Salary 9 000
Profit share 11 000 5 500
_____ _____ Balance c/d _____ __ 500
16 200 17 500 16 200 17 500
(d) Goodwill is an intangible and factious asset. It is difficult to value in monetary terms so
contradicts money measurement concept.
(e) Partners’ Capital Accounts

2010 Choong Tan 2010 Choong Tan
$ $ $ $
May 01 Goodwill 60 000 30 000 May 01 Balance b/f 80 000 50 000
2011 2011
Apr 30 Balance c/d 20 000 20 000 Apr 30 ______ ______
80 000 50 000 80 000 50 000
May 01 Balance b/d 20 000 20 000

(a) Fu, Li and Yang
Income Statement and Appropriation Account
For the year ended 30 April 2011
$ $ $
Revenue 209 500
Cost of Sales
Less Returns (4 750) 106 450
100 500
Add Other Incomes : Discount received 5 300
Gross Profit 105 800
EXPENSES
Rent ($7 500 + $2 500) 10 000
Salaries and Wages 42 100
General expenses ($16 750 – $4 200) 12 550
Depreciation- Motor vehicles *($16 000 – $3 200) × 20%+ 2 560
Fixtures ($30 000 × 10%) 3 000
Increase in prov for doubtful debts *($45 000 × 5%- – $1 500+ 750 (86 900)
Interest on drawings: Fu ($10 000  5%) 500
Li ($10 000  5%) 500
Yang ($12 000  5%) 600 1 600
Interest on capital: Fu ($40 000  4%) 1 600
Li ($35 000  4%) 1 400
Yang ($25 000  4%) 1 000 (4 000)
16 500
Fu ($16 500  /5)
2
Profit share: 6 600
Li ($16 500  /5)
2
6 600
Yang ($16 500  /5)
1
3 300 16 500
(b) Statement of Financial Position as at 30 April 2011

Cost Prov. For Net book
Non-Current Assets
($) Depn ($) value ($)
Premises 44 750 44 750
Motor vehicles ($3 200 + $2 560) 16 000 5 760 10 240
Fixtures ($17 500 + $3 000) 30 000 20 500 9 500
90 750 26 260 64 490
Current Assets
Inventory 28 100
Prepaid general expenses 4 200
Bank 7 560
82 610
Current Liabilities
Accrued rent 2 500 57 200 25 410
89 900
Equity
Capital account: Fu 40 000
Li 35 000
Yang ($25 000  $10 000) 15 000 90 000
Current account Fu (see workings) 200
Li (see workings) (1 000)
Yang (see workings) 700 (100) 89 900
(WORKING) Current Accounts
Fu ($) Li ($) Yang ($) Fu ($) Li ($) Yang ($)
Balance b/f 1 000 Balance b/f 2 500 1 500
Drawings 10 000 10 000 12 000 Capital transfer 10 000
Interest on Drawings 500 500 600 Interest on capital 1 600 1 400 1 000
Balance c/d 200 700 Share of profit 6 600 6 600 3 300
_____ _____ _____ Balance c/d _____ 1 000 __ __
10 700 10 500 14 300 10 700 10 500 14 300

(a) Donney and Raj
$ $ $
Less Returns (9 200) 355 800
Cost of Sales
Purchases 173 000
Add Carriage inwards ($16 500 × 30%) 4 950
Less Returns (5 500) 172 450
Closing inventory (61 450) 164 500
Expenses $ $ $
Carriage outwards ($16 500 × 70%) 11 550
Administration expenses ($25 750 – $630) 25 120
Advertising 23 480
Wages and salaries ($66 700 + $2 700) 69 400
Depreciation- Vehicles [($75 000 − $25 000) × 20%] 10 000
Fixtures ($50 000 × 15%) 7 500
Finance costs (loan interest)(2 000 + 2 000) 4 000
Bad debt 2 500
Increase in prov. for doubtful debts [($60 000×4%)−$2 000) 400 (164 200)
Appropriations:
Interest on capital: Donney 6 000
Raj 4 000 10 000
Salary Raj 12 000 (22 000)
5 100
Profit share: Donney 3 400
Raj 1 700 5 100
(b) Balance Sheet as at 30 September 2011
Accumulated Net Book
Non-current Assets Cost ($)
Depreciation ($) Value ($)
Property 170 000 170 000
Motor vehicles ($25 000 + $10 000) 75 000 35 000 40 000
295 000 66 500 228 500
Current Assets
Inventory 61 450
Trade receivables ($62 500 − $2 500) 60 000
Less: provision for doubtful debts ($60 000 × 4%) (2 400) 57 600
Other receivables (Prepaid admin expenses) 630
119 680
Current Liabilities
Accrued Wages and salaries 2 700
Accrued loan interest ($50 000 × 8%) − $2 000] 2 000
Bank overdraft 4 380 (39 580)
Net current assets 80 100
308 600
Less Non-current liabilities
8% loan repayable 31 December 2025 (50 000)
258 600
Equity
Capital accounts: Donney 150 000
Raj 100 000 250 000
Current accounts: Donney 9 400
Raj (800) 8 600 258 600

(a) Su and Li
Income statement (and appropriation account)
$ $ $
Revenue 380 000
Less Returns (11 100) 368 900
Cost of Sales
Purchases 170 000
Less Returns to suppliers (8 900) 161 100
214 850
Less Inventory at 30 April 2012 (38 500)
Expenses
Carriage outwards 6 290
Marketing ($17 800 + $4 000) 21 800
Wages and salaries ($69 530 – $15 000) 54 530
Communication expenses ($8 900 – $890) 8 010
Loan interest ($80 000 × 6%) 4 800
Building repairs 4 000
Bad debt 3 000
Increase in provision for doubtful debts *($55 000×6%)−$2 500+ 800
Depreciation- Buildings *($200 000 − $75 000) + $20 000+ × 2% 2 900
Equipment *($48 000 − $12 000) × 20%+ 7 200
Fixtures ($35 000 × 10%) 3 500 (142 550)
Appropriations
Interest on capital: Su ($120 000 × 5%) 6 000
Li ($100 000 × 5%) 5 000
Salary Su 15 000 (26 000)
24 000
3
Share of profit: Su ($24 000 × /5) 14 400
2
Li ($24 000 × /5) 9 600 24 000
(W 1) Current accounts
Su ($) Li ($) Su ($) Li ($)
Balance b/d 2 700 Balance b/d 500
Drawings salary 15 000 Salary 15 000
Balance c/d 900 Share of profit 14 400 9 600
_____ ______ Balance c/d _____ 2 100
35 900 16 700 35 900 16 700
Balance c/d 2 100 Balance c/d 900
(c) Balance Sheet

As at 30 April 2012
Non-current assets Cost ($) Depn. ($) NBV ($)
Land and buildings ($200 000 + $20 000); ($14 000 + $2 900) 220 000 16 900 203 100
Equipment ($12 000 + $7 900) 48 000 19 200 28 800
303 000 65 600 237 400
Current assets
Inventory 38 500
Trade receivables ($58 000 − $3 000) 55 000
Less: provision for doubtful debts ($55 000 × 6%) 3 300 51 700
Other receivables 890
Bank deposit 5 000
96 090
Current liabilities
Other payables: 4 000
Loan interest due *($80 000 × 6%) − $3 600+ 1 200
Bank overdraft 9 150 (34 690) 61 400
298 800
6% loan (80 000)
218 800
Equity
Capital accounts: Su 120 000
Li 100 000 220 000
Current accounts: Su 900
Li (2 100) (1 200) 218 800

(a) Income Statement and Appropriation Account
For the year ended 31 January 2013
$ $ $
Revenue 148 200
Cost of Sales
Purchases 66 200
Less Returns (1 230)
Add Import duty 2 846
Transport on purchases ($4 330 × 80%) 3 464 71 280
Closing Inventory (14 230) (69 450)
Gross profit 78 750
Other Incomes
Decrease in prov. for doubtful debts *$600($8000×5%)+ 200 2 628
81 378
EXPENSES $ $ $
Marketing expenses ($12 200 12 000
Wages 9 600
Transport cost on sales ($4 330 × 20%) 866
General running expenses ($16 822 + $322) 17 144
11
Insurance premiums ($10 400 × /12) 9 600
Loan interest ($15 000 × 8%) 1 200
Storage expenses ($9 612 – $6 000) 3 612
Bad debts 110
Depreciation: Lease 2 000
Storage equipment*($26000+$6000)×12%+ 3 840
Motor vehicles *($40 000  $19 520) × 20%+ 4 096 9 936 (64 268)
Appropriations
Interest on capital: Genet ($60 000 × 4%) 2 400
Vass ($40 000 × 4%) 1 600 4 000
Salary : Vass 5 000 (9 000)
Profit available for distribution 8 110
3
Profit share: Genet ($8 110 × /5) 4 866
2
Vass ($8 110 × /5) 3 244 8 110
(b) Partners’ current accounts

Genet Vass Genet Vass
$ $ $ $
Balance b/d 3 600 Balance b/f 2 400
Drawings 9 000 10 000 Interest on Capital 2 400 1 600
Balance c/d 666 Salary 5 000
Share of Profit 4 866 3 244
____ _____ Balance c/d _____ 3 756
9 666 13600 9 666 13 600
Balance b/d 3 756 Balance b/d 666
(c) Genet and Vass
Balance Sheet (Statement of Financial Position) as at 31 January 2013
Cost Accumulated NBV
depreciation
Leasehold property ($12 000 + $2 000) 80 000 14 000 66 000
Storage equipment ($26 000 + $6 000) ($9360+ $3840) 32 000 13 200 18 800
Motor vehicles ($19 520 + $4 096) 40 000 23 616 16 384
152 000 50 816 101 184
CURRENT ASSETS
Closing Inventory 14 230
Trade receivables ($8 110  $110) 8 000
1
Other receivables: Insurance ($10 400 × /12) 800
22 630
Other payables: Loan interest *($15 000 × 8%)  $1 000+ 200
General expenses 322
Net current assets (working capital) 10 726
111 910
NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES
8% bank loan 1 May 2018 (15 000)
96 910
EQUITY
Capital: Genet 60 000
Vass 40 000 100 000
Current accounts: Genet 666
Vass (3 756) (3 090)
96 910

(a) Income statement and appropriation account
INCOMES $ $
Fees (Revenue) 103 769
Discount received 1 400 107 569
EXPENSES
Staff salaries 14 170
General expenses ($23 460 – $1 010) 22 450
Heat and light expenses ($4 760 + $150) 4 910
Communication expenses ($7 680 + $2 400) 10 080
Motor vehicle expenses ($3 650 + $2 000) 5 650
Discounts allowed 3 400
Bank charges 123
Increase in provision for doubtful debts [($10 720 × 5%) $520] 16
Depreciation: Premises ($118 000 × 6%) 7 080
Office equipment ($60 000 × 12%) 7 200
Motor vehicles ($22 000  $2 000  $7 200) × 20%] 2 560 (80 839)
Add Interest in drawings: Cain 480
Les 600 1 080
27 810
Less Interest on capital: Cain 4 000
Les 3 000
Salary Les 16 000 (23 000)
4 810
Share of profit: Cain 2 886
Les 1 924 4 810
(b) Current accounts

Cain ($) Les ($) Cain ($) Les ($)
Balance b/d 15 500 Balance b/f 700
Interest on drawings 480 600 Salary 16 000
Share of profit 2 886 1 924
_____ _____ Balance c/d 4 894 10 176
12 480 31 100 12 480 31 100
Balance b/d 4 894 10 176
(c) Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2013
Cost
Depreciation Value
Premises ($7 080 + $7 080) 118 000 14 160 103 840
Motor vehicles ($22 000  $2 000); ($7 200 + $2 560) 20 000 9 760 10 240
198 000 52 720 145 280
CURRENT ASSETS
Other receivables 1 010
Bank ($20 889 – $123) 20 766
31 960
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables: Bank interest 200
Heat and light 150 (2 310)
Net Current Assets 29 650
174 930
8% bank loan (repayable 30 June 2019) 40 000
Cain loan (repayable 31 March 2018) 10 000 (50 000)
124 930
EQUITY
Capital accounts
Cain ($90 000  $10 000) 80 000
Les 60 000 140 000
Current accounts
Cain (Dr) (4 894)
Les (Dr) (10 176) (15 070)
124 930

(a) Chan and Fong
$ $ $
Revenue 480 500
Less Returns from customers (11 800) 468 700
Cost of Sales
Purchases 209 000
Less Return to suppliers (10 500)
1
Carriage inwards - motor vehicle expenses ($13 600 × /4) 3 400 201 900
Closing Inventory (38 350) (211 250)
Expenses
1
Carriage outwards - motor vehicle expenses ($13 600 × /4) 10 200
Office expenses ($36 500 – $4 000) 32 500
1
Wages and salaries [$80 000 – ($10 000 × /2)] 75 000
Heat and light ($4 750 + $750) 5 500
Bad debts 7 500
Increase in prov. for doubtful debts [($47 500 × 6%) $2 100] 750
Depreciation: Motor vehicles [($45 000  $25 000) × 25%] 5 000
Fixtures & fittings [($28 000 + $2 000) × 10%] 3 000 (186 250)
Add Interest on drawings: Chan ($6 000 × 5%) 300
Fong ($10 000 × 5%) 500 800
72 000
Less Interest on capital: Chan ($60 000 × 5%) 3 000
Fong ($40 000 × 5%) 2 000
Salary Fong 10 000 (15 000)
57 000
2
Profit share: Chan ($57 000 × /3) 38 000
1
Fong ($57 000 × /3) 19 000 57 000
Details Chan ($) Fong ($) Details Chan ($) Fong ($)
Drawings 6 000 10 000 Balance b/f 1 500 4 000
Interest on drawings 300 500 Interest on capital 3 000 2 000
Balance c/d 36 200 19 500 Salary 5 000
_____ ______ Profit share 38 000 19 000
42 500 30 000 42 500 30 000
(c) Chan and Fong

Statement of Financial Position at 30 April 2014
Accumulated
NON-CURRENT ASSETS Cost ($) NBV ($)
Depn ($)
Land and buildings 250 000 – 250 000
Motor vehicles ($25 000 + $5 000) 45 000 30 000 15 000
Fixtures & fittings ($28000 + $2000); ($12000 + $3000) 30 000 15 000 15 000
325 000 45 000 280 000
CURRENT ASSETS $ $ $
Inventory 38 350
Other receivables (Prepaid office expenses) 4 000
Bank ($34 500 – $2 000 ) 32 500
119 500
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables: Heat and light 750
Loan interest due ($16 000  $9 000) 7 000 (43 800) 75 700
355 700
8% loan repayable 30 March 2016 (200 000)
155 700
EQUITY
Capital accounts: Chan 60 000
Fong 40 000 100 000
Current accounts: Chan 36 200
Fong 19 500 55 700
155 700

(a) Darius and Edgar
Income Statement and Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 July 2014
$ $
Revenue 256 000
Less Returns (5 200) 250 800
Cost of Sales
Purchases 148 300
174 100
Gross Profit 110 800
OTHER INCOMES
Rent receivable ($3 500 + $1 500) 5 000
Decrease in prov. for doubtful debts*($39 500$4 500) × 4%+ $1 900 500 5 500
116 300
EXPENSES
Rent payable 12 000
Other operating expenses ($6 350 – $1 800) 4 550
Bank loan interest ($1 600 + $1 600) 3 200
$75
Depreciation Leasehold buildings ( ) 3 000
25 years
Motor vehicles *($40 000  $10 000) × 30%+ 9 000

Fixtures ($25 000 × 10%) 2 500
Bad debts 4 500 (86 300)
APPROPRIATIONS
Interest on capital Darius ($40 000 × 5%) 2 000
6
Edgar *($20 000 × 5%) + ($20 000 × 5% × /12)+ 1 500
Salary – Edgar 12 000 ( 15 500)
14 500
3
Share of profit: Darius ($14 500× /5) 8 700
2
Edger ($14 500× /5) 5 800 14 500
Darius ($) Edgar($) Darius ($) Edgar($)
Drawings 12 000 12 000 Balance b/f 500 900
Balance c/d 8 200 Interest on capital 2 000 1 500
Share of profit 8 700 5 800
Salary 12 000
_____ _____ Balance c/d 800 _____
12 000 20 200 12 000 20 200
(c) Darius and Edgar
Statement of Financial Position at 31 July 2014
Non-current assets Cost ($) Accumulated Book
Depreciation ($) Value ($)
Leasehold buildings ($18 000 + $3 000) 75 000 21 000 54 000
Motor vehicles ($10 000 + $9 000) 40 000 19 000 21 000
Fixtures ($15 000 + $2 500) 25 000 17 500 7 500
140 000 57 500 82 500
CURRENT ASSETS
Inventory 34 100
Prov. for doubtful debts*($39 500$4 500) × 4%+ (1 400) 33 600
Other receivables : accrued rent receivable 1 500
operating expenses prepaid 1 800 3 300
Bank 31 400
102 400
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables : Interest due ($3 200  $1 600) 1 600 (97 500) 4 900
87 400
EQUITY
Capital accounts: Darius 40 000
Edgar 40 000 80 000
Current accounts: Darius (800)
Edgar 8 200 7 400 87 400

(a) Farah and Hana
$ $
Revenue 190 000
Returns inwards (8 600) 181 400
Cost of Sales
Purchases 81 250
96 850
Inventory 30 April 2015 (13 650)
Gross profit 98 200
Expenses
Advertising ($11 000 – $800) 10 200
Heat and light ($9 750 + $150) 9 900
Depreciation: Premises ($60 000 × 2%) 1 200
Delivery vehicles[($30 000  $10 000) × 20%] 4 000
Office fixtures ($15 000 × 10%) 1 500
Increase in Provision for doubtful debts [($18 750 × 4%)  $500] 250 (85 400)
Add Interest on drawings:
Farah ($6 000 × 5%) 300
Hana ($6 000 × 5%) 300 600
13 400
Less Interest on capital:
Farah ($50 000 × 4%) (2 000)
Hana ($30 000 × 4%) (1 200) (3 200)
10 200
1
Profit share: Farah ($10 200 × /2) 5 100
1
Hana ($10 200 × /2) 5 100 10 200

Farah Hana Farah Hana
$ $ $ $
Drawings 6 000 6 000 Balance b/f 3 250 1 850
Balance c/d 4 050 1 850 Profit share 5 100 5 100
10 350 8 150 10 350 8 150
Balance b/d 4 050 1 850
(c) Statement of Financial Position at 30 April 2015

Non-current assets Cost ($) Depn. ($) NBV ($)
Premises ($3 600 + $1 200) 60 000 4 800 55 200
Delivery vehicles ($10 000 + $4 000) 30 000 14 000 16 000
Office fixtures ($11 000 + $1 500) 15 000 12 500 2 500
105 000 31 300 73 700
Current Assets
Less Provision for doubtful debts ($18 750 × 4%) (750) 18 000
Other receivables - prepayments 800 32 450
Total assets 106 150
Capital and liabilities
Hana 30 000 80 000
Current accounts: Farah 4 050
Hana 1 850 5 900 85 900
Current Liabilities
Trade payables ($7 900 – $550) 7 350
Other payables – accruals 150
Bank overdraft ($12 200 + $550) 12 750 20 250
106 150

(a) Aina and Barry
$ $
Profit for the year [$19 800 – ($40 000 × 5%)] 17 800
Add interest on drawings: Aina ($7 500 × 6%) 450
Barry ($10 000 × 6%) 600 1 050
Less Interest on capital: Aina ($50 000 × 4%) 2 000 18 850
6
Barry [($20 000 × 4%) + ($20 000 × 4% × /12)] 1 200
Salary: Barry 8 000 (11 200)
7 650
3
Share of profit: Aina ($7 650 × /5) 4 590
2
Barry ($7 650 × /5) 3 060 7 650
(b) Current Accounts
Aina ($) Barry($) Aina($) Barry($)
Balance b/f 800 Balance b/f 6 500
Drawings 7 500 10 000 Interest on loan ($40000×5%) 2 000
Balance c/d 10 160 Salary 8 000
Profit share 4 590 3 060
_____ ______ Balance c/d 2 160 _____
8 750 20 760 8 750 20 760
(c) Availability of more finance

Sharing of risks and responsibilities
Availability of more skills/expertise
Sharing of losses

(a) Li and Yang
Income Statement and Appropriation
$ $
Revenue ($625 000 + $2 800) 627 800
Less Returns inwards (15 750) 612 050
Cost of Sales
Purchases 295 000
Less Return outwards (4 850)
342 750
Less Closing inventory (57 900)
Expenses
Marketing expenses ($41 000 + $1 100) 42 100
Wages and salaries ($153 000 – $8 000 – $5 000) 140 000
Administration expenses ($16 800 – $250) 16 550
Bank loan interest ($120 000  5%) 6 000
Depreciation- Buildings ($100 000  2%) 2 000
Computers [($60 000  $20 000)  30%] 12 000
Office fixtures [($35 000  $5 000)  20%] 6 000
Bad debts 4 000
Increase in prov for doubtful debts [($69200+$2800$4000)5%}$2000] 1 400 (262 850)
Add Interest on drawings: Li ($15 000 × 4%) 1 500
Yang ($9 000 × 10%) 900 2 400
66 750
Less Interest on capital: Li ($50 000 × 4%) 2 000
Yang ($50 000 × 4%) 2 000
Salary Li 8 000
Yang 5 000 (17 000)
49 750
Profit share:
3
Li ($49 750 × /5) 29 850
2
Yang ($49 750 × /5) 19 900 49 750

Date Li Yang Date Li Yang
2016 $ $ 2016 $ $
Sept 30 Drawings incl salary 23 000 14 000 Oct 1 Balance b/f 4 300 2 900
Sept 30 Interest on drawings 1 500 900 Sept 30 Interest on capital 2 000 2 000
Sept 30 Balance c/d 19 650 14 900 Sept 30 Salary 8 000 5 000
_____ ____ Sept 30 Profit share 29 850 19 900
44 150 29 800 44 150 29 800
Oct 1 Balance b/d 19 650 14 900
(c) Li and Yang

Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2016
Cost Accumulated Net Book
depreciation Value
Land and buildings ($22 000 + $2 000) 200 000 24 000 176 000
Office fixtures($35000$5000) ; ($10000$3000+$6000) 30 000 13 000 17 000
290 000 69 000 221 000
Current Assets
Trade receivables ($69 200 + $2 800  $4 000) 68 000
Less: provision for doubtful debts ($68 000  5%) (3 400) 64 600
Other receivables: Prepaid administration expenses 250 122 750
Equity
Capital Accounts:
Li 50 000
Yang 50 000 100 000
Current Accounts:
Li (‘b’ part) 19 650
Yang (‘b’ part) 14 900 34 550
5% Bank loan repayable 2021 120 000
Current Liabilities
Other payables: Accrued marketing expenses 1 100
Loan interest due ($6 000  $4 000) 2 000
Bank ($25 600  $2 000) 23 600 89 200
Total equity and liabilities 343 750
Chapter 9 148 Amalgamation of Sole proprietorships
CHAPTER 9 AMALGAMATION OF SOLE PROPRIETORSHIPS

Chan and David were sole traders with the following assets and liabilities on 31 March 2009.
Chan David
$ $
Intangible assets (goodwill) 30 000
Non-current assets 23 000 10 000
Inventory 7 000 5 000
Trade payables 5 000 6 000
Cash (bank) 2 000
Loans repayable within 12 months (bank overdraft) 8 000
Capital 50 000 15 000
On 1 April 2009 Chan and David formed a partnership, Newstart. They entered into the following
agreement:
1 Intangible assets (goodwill) would not appear in the books of the new partnership.
2 No interest would be allowed on capital.
3 Interest would be charged on drawings at the rate of 5% of the balance at the end of the year.
4 Salaries would be paid at the rate of: Chan $8 000 per annum and David $7 000 per annum.
5 Profits and losses would be shared in the ratio Chan and David 2: 1
REQUIRED
(a) Explain the term goodwill and give one example. *2+
(b) State two accounting principles (concepts) which supports goodwill not being included in the
balance sheet of a business. *4+
(c) Calculate the capital of each partner, Chan and David, after writing off the goodwill on 1 April
2009. *4+
(d) Prepare the balance sheet of Newstart at 1 April 2009. *6+

The following information is available at the end of the first year of trading of Newstart on 31 March 2010.
$
Drawings: Chan 15 000
David 20 000
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare the profit and loss appropriation account for the year ended 31 March 2010. *5+
CHAPTER 9 SOLUTIONS
(a) Goodwill reflects the ability of a business to earn more than the normal rate of return on its
physical net assets. In other words goodwill represents the cumulative effect of various internal
or external factors which put a business into an advantageous position in relation to its
competitors in attracting more customers. This may be due to number of factors like personal
reputation of the owners, advantageous location of the business premises, less or negligible
competition, good after sale services etc.
(b) Because of the difficulties involved in valuing the asset of goodwill objectively, other than at the
time of purchase, so under money measurement concept it is generally not recognized as an
asset. As goodwill is a factious asset so its inclusion in balance sheets as an asset will artificially
improve the net worth of the business so is often omitted from the balance sheet for reasons of
prudence.
(c) Calculation of capital accounts balances after goodwill adjustment
Effects on capital
Chan ($) David($)
Capital account balances before goodwill adjustment 50 000 15 000
( /3) 10 000
2 1
Goodwill written off ( $30 000) ( /3)20 000
Capital account balances after goodwill adjustment 30 000 5 000
(d) Newstart
Balance Sheet as at 1 April 2009
$ $ $
Non-Current Assets ($23 000 + $10 000) 33 000
Current Assets
Inventory ($7 000 + $5 000) 12 000
Trade receivables ($3 000 + $4 000) 7 000
Cash (bank) 2 000
21 000
Current Liabilities
Trade payables ($5 000 + $6 000) 11 000
Loans repayable within 12 months (bank overdraft) 8 000 (19 000) 2 000
35 000
Equity
Capital Chan (“c” part) 30 000
David (“c” part) 5 000 35 000
(e) Newstart
Appropriation Account
$ $
Interest on drawings:
Chan ($15 000  5%) 750
David ($20 000  5%) 1 000 1 750
12 000
Salary Chan 8 000

David 7 000 (15 000)
(3 000)
Chan ($3 000  /3)
2
Loss Share: (2 000)
David ($3 000  /3)
1
(1 000) (3 000)
Chapter 10 151 Capital and Revenue
CHAPTER 10 CAPITAL & REVENUE

QUESTION 1 MAY 2010 P21 Q2 (f)
During the year ended 30 April 2010, Sparky Ltd carried out work on the buildings.
1 Built an extension
2 Redecorated the interior
3 Installed air conditioning
REQUIRED
State whether each item, 1 to 3 above, is capital expenditure or revenue expenditure. *3+
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (g & h)

(g) Explain the term capital expenditure. *2+
(h) In the table below, place a tick (√) under the correct heading to indicate which of the following is
capital expenditure or revenue expenditure.
Capital expenditure Revenue expenditure

Advertising campaign
A new computer system
Purchase of computer CDs
*3+

Identify by ticking the appropriate box, (✓) whether each payment is capital expenditure or revenue
expenditure.

Purchase of spares for machinery
Installation of additional machinery
Repairs to office equipment
Purchase of additional loose tools
*4+
QUESTION 4 MAY 2013 P21 Q1 (f & g)

(f) Explain the difference between capital and revenue expenditure. *4+
(g) Indicate by placing a tick (✓) which transactions are capital expenditure and which are revenue
expenditure.
Transaction Capital expenditure Revenue expenditure
(i) Purchase of fixtures and fittings
(ii) Installing and testing an air conditioning
system
(iii) Insurance of shop premises
*3+
QUESTION 5 MAY 2013 P22 Q1 (e & f)

(e) Explain the difference between capital receipts and revenue receipts. *4+
(f) Indicate by placing a tick (✓) which transactions are capital receipts and which are revenue
receipts.
Transaction Capital receipt Revenue receipt
Cash sales
Loan from a bank
Discount received
Commission received
Sale of a motor vehicle
*5+
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q2 (f)

Swift Limited are considering the following expenditure on delivery vehicle 2.
1 Replacement tyres
2 A new trailer
3 An annual maintenance service.
REQUIRED
State whether each of the items 1, 2 and 3 above is capital expenditure or revenue expenditure. [3]
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2014 P22 Q2 (e & f)

Ajib commenced business on 1 October 2014 delivering parcels to customers’ homes. Ajib is considering:
Proposal 1 Charging the total purchase price of the motor van to the 2015 income statement.
Proposal 2 Using the diminishing (reducing) balance method to charge depreciation on the
motor van in 2015, and then to change to the straight line method for 2016 and
2017.
REQUIRED
(e) Name and explain which accounting concept would not be complied with if Ajib implemented his
proposals. *6+
Ajib also incurred the following expenditure.
1 Delivery of motor van from manufacturer
2 Fuel for motor van
3 Signwriting his business name on the motor van
4 Motor van insurance
REQUIRED
(f) State whether each of the items above is capital expenditure or revenue expenditure. *4+

(d) Explain each of the following accounting terms.
(i) Revenue expenditure [2]
(ii) Capital receipt [2]
(e) Indicate by placing a tick () whether each of the following transactions is revenue expenditure,
revenue receipt, capital expenditure or capital receipt.
Revenue Revenue Capital Capital

Transaction
expenditure receipt expenditure receipt
Sale of motor van
Purchase new motor van tyres
Cash discount received
Purchase a new motor van
[4]

(c) Define the term ‘revenue receipt’. [2]
(d) Complete the following table by inserting a () showing whether each transaction is revenue
expenditure, a revenue receipt, capital expenditure or a capital receipt. The first one has been
Transaction Revenue Capital

Expenditure Receipt Expenditure Receipt
Sold office computer 
Received interest on deposit account
Took out a 5-year bank Loan
Paid property insurance
Bought motor vehicle to deliver goods
Received commission
[5]
CHAPTER 10 SOLUTIONS
1. Capital expenditure
2. Revenue expenditure
3. Capital expenditure
QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (g & h)

(g) Capital expenditure is the expenditure on purchase, acquisition or improvement of non-current
assets and have useful life of more than one year.
(h) Capital expenditure Revenue expenditure

(i) Advertising campaign √
(ii) A new computer system √
(iii) Purchase of computer CDs √

Purchase of spares for machinery ✓
Installation of additional machinery ✓
Repairs to office equipment ✓
Purchase of additional loose tools ✓
QUESTION 4 MAY 2013 P21 Q1 (f & g)

(f) Capital expenditures are the expenditures incurred on the acquisition or improvement of non-
current assets
Revenue expenditures are incurred on the day-to-day running operations of the business and are
shown as expenses in the income statement.
(g)
Transaction Capital expenditure Revenue expenditure
(i) Purchase of fixtures and fittings √
(ii) Installing & testing air conditioning system √
(iii) Insurance of shop premises √

(e) Capital Receipts:
Amount received from non-regular income or one-off income like proceeds from sale of non-
current assets, additional capital investment by the owner etc.
Revenue Receipts:
Regular income received from sale of goods by the business or other regular amounts of income
earned by the business like rental income, interest income etc.
(f) Transaction Capital receipt Revenue receipt

Cash sales √
Loan from bank √
Discount received √
Commission received √
Sale of a motor vehicle √
QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q2 (f)

1 Revenue expenditure
2 Capital expenditure
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2014 P22 Q2 (e & f)

(e) Matching concept
The non-current assets give benefit to the business for more than one year so through an
appropriate depreciation charge, the cost of non-current assets is matched against revenues over
their useful lives.
Consistency concept
A chosen method should be consistently applied. Changing the method could distort profit
calculations.
(f) 1 Capital expenditure

3 Capital expenditure

(d) (i) Revenue expenditures are recorded as expenditures in the income statement. These
expenditure are incurred to run business on a day to day basis. The period of benefit of
these expenditures is less than one accounting period.
(ii) Capital receipts arise from balance sheet items. These receipts include the sale of a non-
current asset, additional capital investment by the owner and receipts of long term
loans.
(e) Revenue Revenue Capital Capital

Transaction
Sale of motor van 
Purchased new motor van tyres 
Cash discount received 
Purchase a new motor van 

(c) Revenue receipts are entered in the income statement and refer to all money the business makes
through its operations. These come from repeat transactions with customers or on account of
services. Examples include sale of goods, commission, interest or rent received.
(d)
Sold office computer √
Received interest on deposit account √
Took out a 5 year bank loan √
Paid property insurance √
Bought motor vehicle to deliver goods √
Commission received √
Chapter 11 157 Correction of Errors
CHAPTER 11 CORRECTION OF ERRORS

Miranda prepared her draft financial statements for the year ended 30 April 2009 and calculated a net
profit for the year of $14 670. After the preparation of the draft financial statements the following errors
were discovered, which had not been revealed by the trial balance.
(i) Goods, $2 000, purchased on credit from A Morston had not been entered in the
accounting records.
(ii) Goods, $650, sold on credit to T Cley had been correctly entered in the sales account but had
been entered into the account of C Tilley.
(iii) A motor vehicle expense, $500, for the year had been posted to the motor vehicles account.
(iv) A discount received from L Staithe of $190 had been entered in the discount allowed column in
the cash book and credited to the account of L Staithe.
REQUIRED
(a) Name the type of error in (i) to (iv) above. *4+
(b) Prepare the journal entries required to correct each of the errors (i) to (iv). Narratives are not
required. *9+
(c) Calculate the revised net profit for the year ended 30 April 2009. *5+

Jayani prepared a trial balance at 30 September 2010, which balanced.A draft income statement was then
prepared and a gross profit of $60 000 and a profit for the year of $15 000 was calculated.
Jayani then discovered the following errors:
1 A sale of office equipment at net book vaule, $3 000, had been recorded in the sales account.
2 Purchases of goods, $650, on credit from Alana had been credited to the purchases account and
debited to Alana’s account.
3 An invoice from JGL Insurance, $425, for buildings insurance, had not been recorded in the books.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare journal entries to correct the errors in 1 to 3 above. Narratives are not required. *6+
(b) Name the type of error made in 1 to 3 above. *3+
(c) Calculate the revised gross profit and profit for the year for Jayani, following the correction of the
errors 1 to 3 above.
Where the error would have no effect on the gross profit or profit for the year , state ‘no effect’.
Gross profit ($) Net Profit for the year ($)
Draft profit 60 000 15 000
Error 1
Error 2
Error 3
Revised profit
*8+

Kya is a wholesaler. She prepares control accounts at the end of each month. Later when preparing the
trial balance, Kya discovered the following errors:
1 A receipt of $485 from a customer, D. Hulme, had been correctly entered in the cash book but
had been credited to the account of D. Holme.
2 A purchase of office equipment, $550, had been correctly entered in the cash book, but had been
entered in error into the purchases account.
REQUIRED
(i) Prepare the journal entries to correct the errors in 1 and 2 above.
Narratives are not required. *4+
(ii) State the name of the accounting concepts (principles) which have not been followed in 1 and 2
above. *2+

Majda prepared a trial balance on 31 August 2011. The trial balance failed to agree and a suspense
account was opened.
It was discovered that all of the errors had been made in one of the trade receivable accounts, M.H.
Supplies Ltd.
Details of the account for August 2011 were as follows:
M.H. Supplies Ltd account
Date Description Dr Cr Balance
2011 $ $ $
01 August Balance 1 650 Dr
10 August Sales 460 2 110 Dr
13 August Sales returns 60 2 050 Dr
23 August Bank 1 617 433 Dr
23 August Discount 33 466 Dr
The following errors were found:

1 On 10 August goods, list price $800, less 20% trade discount, were sold to M.H. Supplies Ltd. The
transaction was correctly recorded in the sales journal.
2 On 20 August a credit sale of goods, $1 200, to M.H. Supplies Ltd, was correctly entered in the
sales journal, but was posted to the account of M. Hardware Ltd.
3 On 23 August M.H. Supplies Ltd paid the balance on 1 August, less 2% cash discount. The
transaction was correctly recorded in the cash book.
REQUIRED
(a) Name the document sent to M.H. Supplies Ltd to record the transaction of 13 August 2011. *1+
(b) Name the type of error made on 20 August 2011. *1+
(c) Prepare the journal entries to correct the errors 1 to 3 above. Narratives are not required. *6+
(d) Prepare the suspense account, clearly showing the original difference on the trial balance. *4+
(e) Calculate the correct balance owed by M.H. Supplies Ltd to Majda on 31 August. *4+

(e) State three types of errors not revealed by the trial balance. *3+
After Yang prepared the trial balance he discovered the following error:
March 5 A sale of goods to Wilbur, $6 000, was debited to sales and credited to Wilbur.
(f) Prepare the journal entry to correct the error. A narrative is not required. *2+

Haung’s income statement showed a draft profit for the year of $15 500. After completion of the income
statement the following errors were discovered:
1 Purchases of goods on credit from Takka, $4 000, had been omitted from the books.
2 Goods sold on credit to Nolan, $380, had been posted to the account of North.
3 Discount received, $3 050, had been debited to the discount received account.
4 A debt of $375, owing by Long, was considered irrecoverable. No entries had been made in the
books.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the journal entries to correct the errors 1 – 4 above. Narratives are not required. *3+
(b) Prepare a statement showing the corrected profit for the year.
Statement of revised profit.
$ $ $ $
Draft profit for year 15 500
1
2
3
4
Revised profit for year
*4+
Haung is considering a number of possible actions when preparing his future income statements.
(i) Charging the income statement with the total cost of non-current assets purchased in the
year.
(ii) Recording the value of the increased skill of the workforce as an income for the year.
(iii) Changing the method of depreciation to be used for each non-current asset to reflect current
market values.
REQUIRED
(c) State, in each of (i) to (iii) above, which accounting concept would be broken if Haung
implemented his proposals. In each case, give a reason for your answer. *9+
QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2012 P22) Q2

The following trial balance was extracted from the books of Peng on 31 August 2012. It was prepared by
an inexperienced bookkeeper and failed to balance.
Trial Balance at 31 August 2012
Dr ($) Cr ($)
Capital 18 240
Provision for depreciation – fixtures and fittings 8 800
Inventory 14 200
Revenue 110 000

Purchases 51 000
Discount allowed ______ 620
217 540 86 420
(a) Prepare the corrected trial balance at 31 August 2012. Show any difference you find as a balance
on an appropriate account. *9+
The following errors were later discovered:
1 A sale of goods, $200, to A. Winscom had been posted to the account of W. Wilson.
2 A purchase of fixtures, $900, had been posted to the purchases account.
3 Wages, $1 500, had been debited to the bank and credited to the wages account.
4 Discount received, $240, had been correctly entered in the cash book and had been debited to
the discount received account.
REQUIRED
(b) Name the type of errors in 1 to 3 above. *3+
(c) Prepare journal entries to correct the errors in 1 to 4 above. Narratives are not required. *8+

John Given’s trial balance at 31 May 2013 failed to agree and a suspense account for the difference, $926
debit, was opened.
The following errors were discovered:

1 Commission received, $120, had been recorded in the account twice.
2 Total trade receivables were understated by $824.
3 A payment for insurance, $650, had been correctly entered in the cash book, but recorded in the
insurance account as $560.
4 The total of the sales returns journal had been overcast by $108.
REQUIRED
(a) Show the entries in the general journal to correct items 1 to 4 above. Narratives are not required.*8+
(b) Prepare the suspense account at 31 May 2013. *4+
(c) Explain three types of errors not shown by a trial balance. *6+

Rod’s trial balance at 30 September 2013 failed to agree.
(a) Name two types of errors not shown by a trial balance. *2+
Rod later discovered the following errors:
1 the sales journal had been over added by $279;
2 the total of the discount allowed column in the cash book, $123, had been credited to
the discount received account;
3 a payment to B Kaur, $105, had been correctly entered in the bank account but posted
to the creditor’s account as $150.
(b) Complete the following table showing the effect and amount each of the above errors would
have on B Kaur’s profit for the year if left uncorrected. The first item has been completed as an
example. *4+
(c) Write up the journal entries to correct these errors. Narratives are not required. *7+
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P21 Q2 (b & c) )

Ghani is preparing his financial statements. On reviewing his purchases account, Ghani found the
following errors.
1. Goods purchased for cash, $450, had not been recorded in the books.
2. Goods purchased on credit from C Maxley, $950, had been recorded in the books as
$590.
3. A purchase of a motor vehicle, $6 000, had been recorded in the purchases account.
4. Goods purchased from Y Li, $820, had been credited to the purchases account and
debited to Y Li’s account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare journal entries to correct the errors in 1 to 4 above. Narratives are not required. [6]
(c) Complete the table below naming the type of error and the effect on the gross profit of
correcting the error. The first item has been completed as an example.
Type of Effect on gross

error Profit
Goods purchased for cash, $450, had not been
1 Omission Decrease $450
Goods purchased on credit from C Maxley, $950, had
2
been recorded in the books as $590.
A purchase of a motor vehicle, $6 000, had been
3
recorded in the purchases account.
Goods purchased from Y Li, $820, had been credited to
4
the purchases account and debited to Y Li’s account.
[6]
QUESTION 11 MAY 2014 P22 Q2 (b to d) )

On 1 April 2014, Yee discovered the following errors:
1 A cheque received from D Moy, $450, had been posted to the account of D Kay.
2 An invoice for goods received from G Fallen, costing $790, had been recorded in the
purchases journal as $970.
3 Discount received, $45, had been debited to the discount received account and credited to F
Tay.
4 Repairs to fixtures and fittings, $800, had been recorded in the fixtures and fittings account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the journal entries to correct the errors in 1 to 4 above. Narratives are not required. [8]
(c) Complete the following table to name the type of error in 1 to 4 given above. The first item has
Type of error
1 A cheque received from D Moy, $450, had been posted to the account
Commission
of D Kay.
2 An invoice for goods received, costing $790, had been recorded in the
3 Discount received, $45, had been debited to the discount received
account and credited to F Tay.
4 Repairs to fixtures and fittings, $800, had been recorded in the fixtures
and fittings account.
[3]
(d) State two reasons why a suspense account would be used. [2]
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q1 (c) )

On 31 August 2014 Adil had the following balances in his books. He was aware that there were some
book-keeping errors and that the trial balance would not balance.
$
Inventory 3 850
Purchases 14 400
Revenue 22 000
Bank loan 2 000
Capital 3 000
REQUIRED
Complete the trial balance at 31 August 2014, balancing the trial balance by the use of an appropriate
account. [5]

Mira prepared a trial balance using the following information on 31 March 2015. The trial balance failed
to balance.
$
Office fixtures (at cost) 18 000
Office fixtures provision for depreciation 7 200
General expenses (prepaid) 1 520
Inventory 7 800
Capital 16 000
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the trial balance at 31 March 2015, including an appropriate balancing entry. [4]
On inspecting the books, Mira found the following errors:

1 A payment for general expenses, $750, had been correctly entered in the bank account, but had
been recorded in the general expenses account as $570.
2 General expenses, $1 000, had been recorded in the office fixtures account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the entries in the general journal to correct items 1 & 2. Narratives are not required. [4]

Martino’s trial balance at 30 September 2015 did not agree and a suspense account was opened.
The following errors were discovered.
1 The total of the purchases journal had been undercast by $950.
2 Discount received, $85, had been debited to the discount received account.
3 A payment of rent, $750, had been correctly entered in the cash book, but recorded in the rent
account as $570.
4 A purchase of office fixtures, $2 300, had been recorded in the general expenses account.
REQUIRED
(a) Show the entries in the general journal to correct items 1 to 4. Narratives are not required. [8]
(b) Prepare the suspense account at 30 September 2015 showing the original difference on the trial
balance. [4]
(c) Complete the following table to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting each
error.
The first item has been completed as an example.
Increase/Decrease/ Amount
Error
No effect $
1 The total of the purchases journal had been undercast
Decrease 950
by $950.
2 Discount received, $85, had been debited to the
discount received account.
3 A payment of rent, $750, had been correctly entered in
the cash book, but recorded in the rent account as
$570.
4 A purchase of office fixtures, $2 300, had been
recorded in the general expenses account.
[6]
(d) Explain why an error of commission would not be revealed by the trial balance. [2]
QUESTION 15 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q2 (b to d)

After preparing the sales ledger control account, Yana discovered the following errors.
1 Goods sold on credit to Tong, $560, had not been recorded in the books.
2 Proceeds of sale of fixtures and fittings, $800, had been recorded as cash sales.
3 Discount allowed to R Biggs, $56, had been debited to his account and credited to the
discount allowed account.
4 A sale of goods to Mia, $75, had been recorded in the account of Mason.
REQUIRED
(b) Name the type of error in each of 1–4. Error 1 has been completed as an example. [3]
(c) Prepare the general journal entries to correct the errors in 1–4. Narratives are not required. [8]
(d) State one reason why a trader may use a suspense account. [1]

Valda found the following errors in her books.
1 A cheque received from Fatin, $930, had been correctly entered in the cash book but had been
credited to the account of Martin.
2 The total of the discount allowed column in the cash book, $970, had been credited to the
3 Returns inwards of $390 had been correctly recorded in Ann’s account, but had been recorded as
$930 in the returns inwards account.
REQUIRED
(c) Name the type of error that Valda made by crediting Martin’s account. [1]
(d) Prepare the general journal entries to correct errors 1, 2 and 3. Narratives are not required. [7]

The following balances remained in the books of Fabio at 30 June 2016. He was aware that there were
some book-keeping errors and that the trial balance would not balance.
$
Motor vehicle 9 500
Inventory 4 850
Revenue (Sales) 22 000
Purchases 14 400
Bank loan 2 000
Capital 3 000
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the trial balance at 30 June 2016, balancing the trial balance by the use of an
appropriate account. [4]
On inspection of his books, Fabio located the following errors.

1 A sale of goods, $850, had been correctly recorded in the account of a credit customer, but had
been recorded in the revenue (sales) account as $580.
2 A purchase of goods, $700, had been correctly entered in the account of a credit supplier, but
had been credited to the purchases account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the general journal entries to correct errors 1 and 2. Narratives are not required. [4]
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (b)

After preparing the draft income statement, which showed a profit for the year of $24 000, Lyana
discovered some errors.
REQUIRED
Complete the following table showing the effect on the profit for the year of correcting each error.
Calculate the revised profit for the year.
Increase Decrease Net

$ $ $
Purchases of $500 had not been recorded in the books.
Goods, $800, had been counted twice in the closing inventory.
No adjustment had been made for prepaid insurance $950.
Discount allowed, $1600, had been added to gross profit.
Equipment costing $15 000 (accumulated depreciation $6600) had been
depreciated by 20% on cost. The reducing (diminishing) balance method
should have been used at a rate of 20%.
Commission receivable, $400, had been omitted from the draft income
statement.
Revised profit for the year

[8]
(a) (i) Error of omission
(ii) Error of commission
(iii) Error of principle
(iv) Error of reversal
(b) Dr ($) Cr ($)
(i) Purchases 2 000
A Morston 2 000
(ii) T Cley 650
C Tilley 650
(iii) Motor vehicle expenses 500
Motor vehicle 500
(iv) L Staithe 380
Discount allowed 190
(c) Statement to calculate the revised profit for the year

$ $
Original profit for the year 14 670
Add Discount received recorded as discount allowed now corrected 380
15 050
Less Purchases from A Morston not recorded in the books now accounted for 2 000
Motor expenses posted to motor vehicle account now corrected 500 (2 500)
Revised profit for the year 12 550

(a) Journal
Dr ($) CR ($)
1 Sales 3 000
Equipment Disposal 3 000
2 Purchases 1 300
Alana 1 300
3 Buildings insurance 425
JGL Insurance 425
WORKING
Actual Entry Wrong Entry Rectifying Entry
Dr. $ Cr.$ Dr. $ Cr.$ Dr. $ Cr.$
1. Bank 3 000 Bank 3 000 Sales 3 000
Equip disposal 3 000 Sales 3 000 Equip disposal 3 000
2. Purchases 650 Alana 650 Purchases 1 300
Alana 650 Purchases 650 Alana 1 300
3. Insurance 425 Insurance 425
No entry
JGL Insurance 425 JGL Insurance 425
(b) (i) Error of Principle

(ii) Complete reversal of entries
(iii) Error of Omission
(c) Gross profit Profit for the year

$ $
Draft profit 60 000 15 000
Error 1 (3 000) (3 000)
Error 2 (1 300) (1 300)
Error 3 - (425)
Revised profit 55 700 10 275

(i) Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
1. D. Holme 485
D. Hume 485
2. Office equipment 550
Purchases 550
(ii) Matching concept

(a) Credit note
(b) Error of commission
(c) JOURNAL
Dr ($) Cr ($)
(i) Apr10 M.H Supplies Ltd [($800 × 80%) − $460] 180
Suspense 180
(ii) Apr 20 M.H Supplies 1 200
M. Hardware Ltd 1 200
(iii) Apr 23 Suspense 66
M. H Supplies Ltd 66
(d) Suspense Account

$ $
Balance/difference 114 M.H Supplies Ltd 180
M.H Supplies 66 ___
180 180
(e) M.H Supplies Ltd adjusted balance at 31 August 2011

$ $
Original balance at 30 April 466
Add Sale of $640 posted as $460 now corrected 180
Credit sales wrongly posted to M. Hardware Ltd now corrected 1 200 1 380
Less Cash discount allowed wrongly posted on credit side now corrected (66)
Corrected balance in M. H Supplies Ltd account 1 780

(e) Error of Principle, Error of Commission, Error of Omission, Complete reversal of entries, Error of
Original entry and Compensating error
(f) Journal
Date Dr ($) Cr ($)
Wilbur ($6 000 + $6 000) 12 000
Sales 12 000

(a) Journal
DR ($) CR ($)
1. Purchases 4 000
Takka 4 000
2. Nolan 380
North 380
3. Suspense 6 100
4. Bad debts 375
Long 375
(b) Statement of revised profit

$ $ $ $
Draft profit for year 15 500
1 Purchases 4 000
2 Sales No effect
3 Discount 6 100
4 Bad debt _____ 375
Totals 6 100 4 375 1 725
(c) (i) As non-current assets are used by the business for a period more than one year so their
consumed cost should be charged as expense in the income statement over their lives
under ‘Matching’ concept.
(ii) ‘Money measurement’ concept states that only those items are recorded in the
financial statements which can be quantified in monetary terms. As the skill of the
workforce cannot be measured in monetary terms so cannot be recorded as an income.
(iii) ‘Consistency’ concept dictates that the same depreciation method should be used from
one year to the next.

Peng
Capital 18 240

Provision for depreciation – Fixtures and fittings 8 800
Inventory 14 200
Revenue 110 000
Purchases 51 000
Suspense ______ 480
152 220 152 220
(b) 1. Error of Commission
2. Error of Principle
3. Complete Reversal of Entries
(c) Journal
A. Winscom 200
W. Wilson 200
Fixtures 900
Purchases 900
Wages 3 000
Bank 3 000
Suspense 480

(a) General Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
1 Commission received 120
Suspense 120
2 - -
Suspense 824
3 Insurance ($650  $560) 90
Suspense 90
4 Suspense 108
Sales returns 108
(b) Suspense account

2013 $ 2013 $
May 31 Difference in trial balance 926 May 31 Commission received 120
Sales returns 108 Trial balance error (receivables) 824
____ Insurance 90
1 034 1 034
(c) Omission: No debit and credit entered in the accounts. Transaction omitted completely from
books
Commission: Correct amount posted to the wrong account but of the same nature e.g. rent
expense recorded in wages expense account.
Principle: An entry made in the wrong class of account. For example, an expense treated as an
asset or vice versa
Complete reversal: In this case the debit account is credited and the credit account is debited
with correct amount.
Original entry: Original figure entered incorrectly, although the correct double entry principle has
been observed using this figure
Compensating: Errors on one side of the ledger are compensated by errors of the same amount
on the other side

(a) Error of commission, omission, principle, compensating, original entry and complete reversal
(b) Overstated Understated No effect Amount

$
1  279
2  246 ($123 + $123)
3  No effect
(c) General Journal

Dr Cr
$ $
1 Sales 279
Suspense 279
2 Discount received 123
Suspense ($123 + $123) 246
3 Suspense ($150  $105) 45
B Kaur 45
QUESTION 10 MAY 2014 P21 Q2 (b & c) )

(b) Journal
Dr ($) Cr ($)
1 Purchases 450
Cash 450
2 Purchases ($950  $590) 360
C Maxley 360
3 Motor vehicle 6 000
Purchases 6 000
4 Purchases ($820 + $820) 1 640
Y Li 1 640
(c)
Type of error Effect on gross profit
Goods purchased for cash, $450, had not been recorded in
the books.
Goods purchased on credit from C Maxley, $950, had been
2 Original entry Decrease $360
recorded in the books as $590.
A purchase of a motor vehicle, $6000, had been recorded in
3 Principle Increase $6 000
the purchases account.
Goods purchased on credit from Y Li, $820, had been
4 Reversal Decrease $1 640
credited to the purchases account and debited to Y Li.
QUESTION 11 MAY 2014 P22 Q2 (b to d) )

(b) Journal
Details Dr Cr
$ $
1 D Kay 450
D Moy 450
2 G Fallen ($970  $790) 180
Purchases 180
3 F Tay 90
4 Fixture repairs 800
Fixtures and fittings 800
(c)
Type of error
1 A cheque received from D Moy, $450, had been posted to the account of
Commission
D Kay.
2 An invoice for goods received from G Fallen, costing $790, had been recorded
Original entry
in the purchases journal as $970.
3 Discount received, $45, had been debited to the discount received account and
Complete Reversal
credited to F Tay.
4 Repairs to fixtures and fittings, $800, had been recorded in the fixtures and
Principle
fittings account.
(d) When the trial balance fails to agree then the difference is entered as suspense. This suspense
account balance not only assists in the detection and correction of errors but also enables to
prepare draft financial statements.
QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2014 P21 Q1 (c) )

Adil
Inventory 3 850
Purchases 14 400
Revenue 22 000
Bank loan 2 000
Capital 3 000
Suspense account 2 100 ______
37 100 37 100

(a) Mira
Trial Balance at 31 March 2015
Dr Cr
$ $
Inventory 7 800
Capital 16 000
Suspense 180 ______
31 200 31 200
(b) General Journal

Debit Credit
$ $
Suspense 180

(a) General Journal
Debit Credit
$ $
1 Purchases 950
Suspense 950
2 Suspense 170
Discount received ($85 + $85) 170
3 Rent ($750  $570) 180
Suspense 180
4 Office fixtures 2 300
(b) Suspense Account

2015 $ 2015 $
Sept 30 Difference in trial balance (*) 960 Sept 30 Purchases 950
Sept 30 Discount received 170 Sept 30 Rent 180
1 130 1 130
(c) Statement to show effects of correcting entries on profit for the year
Error Increase/Decrease/ No effect Amount ($)
The total of the purchases journal had been under
1 Decrease 950
cast by $950.
Discount received, $85, had been debited to the
2 Increase 170
A payment of rent, $750, had been correctly entered
3 in the cash book, but recorded in the rent account as Decrease 180
$570.
The purchases of office fixtures, $2 300, had been
4 Increase 2 300
(d) This error occurs when a transaction is entered in the wrong account of the same class however
the correct amounts are entered on the correct sides. This therefore, results in the same equal
amounts on the both sides of the trial balance.
QUESTION 15 NOVEMBER 2015 P22 Q2 (b to d)

(b) Error Type of error
1 Omission
2 Principle
3 Reversal
4 Commission
(c) General journal

Details Dr ($) Cr ($)
1 Tong 560
Sales 560
2 Sales 800
Fixtures disposal 800
3 Discount allowed ($56 + $56) 112
R Biggs 112
4 Mia 75
Mason 75
(d) When a trial balance fails to balance then suspense account helps to identify the difference
between the totals of two sides.
It helps in correction of errors

(c) Error of commission
(d) General journal

1 Martin 930
Fatin 930
2 Discount allowed 970
Suspense ($970 + $970) 1 940
3 Suspense 540
Returns inwards ($930  $390) 540

(a) Trial Balance at 30 June 2016
Motor vehicle 9 500
Inventory 4 850
Purchases 14 400
Bank loan 2 000
Capital 3 000
Suspense (balancing figure) 1 130 _____
37 130 37 130
(b) General journal

1 Suspense 270
Revenue - Sales - ($850  $580) 270
2 Purchases ($700 + $700) 1 400
Suspense 1 400
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q2 (b)

Purchases of $500 had not been recorded in the books. 500
Goods, $800, had been counted twice in the closing inventory. 800
No adjustment had been made for prepaid insurance $950. 950
Discount allowed, $1 600, had been added to gross profit. ($1600+$1600) 3 200
Equipment costing $15 000 (accumulated depreciation $6 600) had been
depreciated by 20% on cost. The reducing balance method should have 1 320
been used @ 20%. [(15 000 × 20%)  {(15 000  $6 600) × 20%]
statement. 400 ____
Total 2 670 4 500 (1 830)
Chapter 12 175 Control Accounts
CHAPTER 12 CONTROL ACCOUNTS

Tsang is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following information is available for the
month of March 2010.
$
Trade payables 1 March 1 700
Payments to suppliers 47 000
Wages & salaries expenses 2 500
REQUIRED
Prepare the purchase ledger control account showing the balance of trade payables at 31 March 2010. *5+

Kya is a wholesaler. She prepares control accounts at the end of each month. The following information
relates to the month ended 30 April 2011.
$
Sales ledger control account balance 1 April 2011 64 350
Cheques received from trade receivables 136 800
Bad debts written off 7 900
Cash sales 10 750
Credit sales 153 400
REQUIRED
(a) State two ways in which control accounts can be used by Kya in her business. *2+
(b) Prepare the sales ledger control account for the month ended 30 April 2011.
Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 May 2011. *8+
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q2 (a & b)A

Indrea prepares a sales ledger control account. At 30 September 2011 the following information available:
$
Trade receivables at 1 October 2010 25 000
Credit sales for year 80 000
Receipts from credit customers for year 75 000
Trade receivables at 30 September 2011 30 000
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the sales ledger control account for the year ended 30 September 2011. *4+
(b) State two reasons why Andrea prepares a sales ledger control account. *4+

Lau buys and sells goods on credit. The following information is provided by her for the month of March
2012:
$
Trade payables 1 March 2012 15 300
Purchases returns 900
Payments by cheque 82 450
Refunds from trade payables 700
Trade payables 31 March 2012 9 150
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the purchases ledger control account for the month of March 2012 clearly showing the
value of the purchases for the month. *8+
(b) State two benefits to Lau of maintaining control accounts. *2+

Ann buys and sells on credit. She supplied the following information for the month ended 31 May 2013.
2013 $
May 1 Trade receivables 5 687
31 Credit sales 72 641
Receipts from credit customers 64 500
Credit notes issued to customers 8 242
Cash discounts allowed 1 894
Bad debts 800
Contra entry 300
The sales journal had been under-cast by $86. A cheque received and banked on 8 May from John Lee for
$2 300 had been returned by the bank because of insufficient funds.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the sales ledger control account for the month ended 31 May 2013. Balance the account
at that date and bring the balance down on 1 June 2013. [9]
(b) State three benefits of using control accounts. [6]
(c) State two sources of information for the sales ledger control account. [2]

On 1 April 2014, Yee’s sales ledger control account showed the following balances: $20 450 debit and
$600 credit.
During April the following transactions were recorded:
$
Credit sales 50 500
Cash sales 10 000
Returns from credit customers 700
Refunds to credit customers 750
Bad debt written off 800
On 1 May 2014, Yee’s sales ledger control account showed a credit balance of $180. The debit balance is
to be determined.
REQUIRED
Prepare the sales ledger control account for the month of April 2014. Balance the account and bring down
the balances. [7]

The following information is available from the books of Yana for August 2015.
$
Trade receivables at 1 August 2015 27 520
Credit sales 32 400
Cash sales 19 970
Sales returns from credit customers 1 700
Cheques received from credit customers 40 150
Interest charged on overdue accounts 600
REQUIRED
Prepare the sales ledger control account for August. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1
September 2015. [8]

Valda prepares a monthly control account for her sales ledger.
The following information relates to the month of August 2016.
Debit Credit
$ $
Sales ledger control account balances 1 August 2016 18 410 720
Sales ledger control account balances 1 September 2016 ? 580
$
Cheques received 40 500
Dishonoured cheque (included in cheques received) 800
Cash sales 8 950
Bad debt written off 2 750
Credit sales 39 600
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the sales ledger control account for the month of August 2016. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 September. [8]
(b) State two reasons for preparing control accounts. [2]
Total Trade Payables account
2010 $ 2010 $
Mar 31 Bank 47 000 Mar 01 Balance b/f 1 700
Mar 31 Discount received 300 Mar 31 Purchases 47 900
Mar 31 Balance c/d 2 300 _____
49 600 49 600
Apr 01 Balance b/d 2 300

(a) Advantages/Uses of Control Accounts
(i) Help in speedy calculation of trade receivables and trade payables figures for inclusion in
the Trial Balance and Balance Sheet.
(ii) Corresponding records of control account items in the subsidiary books act as check on
frauds and misappropriations, which can easily be detected.
(iii) Mistakes and errors in trade receivables and trade payables control accounts can easily
and quickly be detected and corrected.
(iv) Act as independent check on the arithmetical accuracy of the total of Sales ledger and
purchase ledger balances.
(v) To provide totals of sales/purchases
(vi) Assist in preparation of financial statements from incomplete record
(b) Sales Ledger Control Account
2011 $ 2011 $
Apr 01 Balance b/f 64 350 Apr 01 Bank 136 800
30 Sales 153 400 30 Discount allowed 5 250
30 Bad debts 7 900
30 Returns inwards 8 100
______ 30 Balance c/d 59 700
217 750 217 750
QUESTION 3 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q2 (a & b)A

(a) Sales Ledger Control Account
2010 $ 2011 $
Oct 01 Balance b/f 25 000 Sep 30 Bank(receipts from credit customers) 75 000
2011 Sep 30 Balance c/d (Dr.) 30 000
Sep 30 Credit sales for year 80 000 ______
105 000 105 000
(b) (i) Sales ledger control account acts as an independent check on the arithmetical accuracy
of the total of sales ledger balances.
(ii) Mistakes and errors in sales ledger accounts can easily be detected and corrected by
comparing totals of the subsidiary books with their corresponding amounts in sales
ledger control account.

(a) Purchases ledger control account
2012 $ 2012 $
Mar 31 Purchase returns 900 Mar 01 Balance b/f 15 300
Mar 31 Bank 82 450 Mar 31 Purchases (balancing figure) 77 850
Mar 31 Discount received 1 350 Mar 31 Refunds from trade payables 700
Mar 31 Balance c/d 9 150 _____
93 850 93 850
(b) See May 2011 P21 Q2 (a)

(a) Sales Ledger Control account
2013 $ 2013 $
May 01 Balance b/f 5 687 May 31 Bank/cash 64 500
May 31 Sales ($72 641 + $86) 72 727 Returns in (Cr notes issued) 8 242
Bank (dishonoured cheque) 2 300 Discount allowed 1 894
Bad debts 800
Contra 300
______ Balance c/d 4 978
80 714 80 714
(b) See May 2011 P21 Q2 (a)

(a) Sales journal, Sales returns journal, Cash book, General journal and Balance from sales ledger
control account of last year

Sales ledger control account
2014 $ 2014 $
Apr 01 Balance b/f 20 450 Apr 01 Balance b/f 600
Apr 30 Credit sales 50 500 Apr 30 Return inwards 700
Apr 30 Bank (refunds to customers) 750 Apr 30 Bank (receipts from customers) 48 600
Apr 30 Balance c/d 180 Apr 30 Discount allowed 1 200
Apr 30 Bad debt written off 800
_ _ __ Apr 30 Balance c/d 19 980
71 880 71 880

Sales ledger control account
2015 $ 2015 $
Aug 01 Balance b/f 27 520 Aug 31 Sales returns 1 700
Aug 31 Sales 32 400 Aug 31 Bank 40 150
Aug 31 Interest charged 600 Aug 31 Discount allowed 780
Aug 31 Bad debts 2 900
_____ Aug 31 Balance c/d 14 990
60 520 60 520

(a) Sales Ledger Control Account
2016 $ 2016 $
Aug 1 Balance b/f 18 410 Aug 01 Balance b/f 720
Aug 31 Bank (dishonoured cheque) 800 Aug 31 Bank 40 500
Aug 31 Credit sales 39 600 Aug 31 Discount allowed 970
Aug 31 Balance c/d 580 Aug 31 Bad debt 2 750
Aug 31 Returns inwards 3 900
_____ Aug 31 Balance c/d 10 550
59 390 59 390
Sept 1 Balance b/d 10 550 Sept 1 Balance b/d 580
(b) Advantages of Keeping control accounts

(i) A sale ledger control account provides a check on the internal accuracy of the sales
ledger; and a purchase ledger control account does the same for the purchase ledger.
(ii) It identifies the ledger or ledgers in which errors have been made when there is a
difference on trial balance.
(iii) It provides trade receivables’ and trade payables’ balances quickly when trial balance is
being prepared.
Chapter 13 181 Accounts from Incomplete Records
CHAPTER 13 ACCOUNTS FROM INCOMPLETE RECORDS

QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (a to c, e & f)
Jenny Palmer started business on 1 July 2009. She did not keep full records in the first month in business
although she did make a note of transactions so that her book-keeper could prepare proper records from
the start of August 2009.
Jenny’s notes showed the following:
1 She had sold goods for $790 cash during the month. She had also received $4 460 from trade
receivables by cheque. Customers owed $1 420 at 31 July which she expected to receive during
August. Jenny had been advised another customer had gone bankrupt and she decided to write
off $140.
2 Jenny bought all goods on credit from suppliers for $3 600. She had paid $1 900 by cheque
and received a discount for $100.
3 Jenny’s inventory was valued at $240 on 31 July.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the total revenue (sales) for the month ended 31 July 2009. *5+
(b) Calculate the amount Jenny Palmer owes trade payables at 31 July 2009. *3+
(c) Calculate Jenny Palmer’s gross profit for the month ended 31 July 2009. *3+
Jenny paid sundry expenses of $1 650 during July whereas total wage expense is $690 out of which $509
has been paid whereas $181 is still payable to tax authorities.
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare Jenny Palmer’s income statement for the month ended 31 July 2009 using the
information given and your answers above. *5+
Jenny’s notes also showed the following:
1 Jenny started business on 1 July with $2 000 in cash as capital.
2 She purchased equipment costing $1200 on 1 July.
3 She took $550 cash from the business for personal use during July.
4 She had $71 in cash and $1370 in the bank on 31 July.
REQUIRED
(f) Draw up a Statement of Affairs for Jenny Palmer at 31 July 2009 using the information given and
your answers above. *8+

Indira is a computer consultant. She does not keep a full set of double entry accounts but the following
information is available for the year ended 31 March 2010.
Summarised Cash Book
$ $
Balance 1 April 2009 3 500 Purchase of office equipment 5 500
Receipts of consultancy fees 74 000 Wages 23 600
Sale of office equipment 750 Drawings 20 000
Loan interest and repayments 2 600
Rent 9 000
_____ Balance 31 March 2010 4 650
78 250 78 250
The sale of office equipment was at net book value.

1 April2009 31 March2010
$ $
Plant and equipment (Office equipment) 16 000 17 500
Trade receivables for consultancy fees 14 200 11 000
Non-current liability (6% loan) 10 000 8 000
Other receivables (General expenses prepaid) 100 500
Other payables (Rent accrued) 400 600
REQUIRED
(a) (i) Calculate the capital at 1 April 2009. *3+
(ii) Calculate the consultancy fees for the year ended 31 March 2010. *3+
(b) Prepare the income statement or the year ended 31 March 2010. *7+
(c) Indira does not keep a full set of double entry accounts.
State two advantages to Indira of maintaining a full set of double entry accounts. *4+

Tanvir does not keep a full set of double entry accounts.
The following information is available for the year ended 30 April 2011.
Summarised Bank account
$ $
Receipts from customers 60 500 Balance b/d 100
Sale of non-current asset 750 Payments to suppliers 34 900
Balance c/d 10 250 Wages 15 000
Lighting and heating 2 500
Drawings 5 000
Purchase of non-current asset 8 000
______ General expenses 6 000
71 500 71 500
1 May 2010 ($) 30 April 2011 ($)
Non-current assets (book value) 40 000 42 000
Lighting and heating 600Prepaid 250 Accrued
6% Bank loan repayable 30 April 2016 20 000 20 000
Capital 25 000 ?
The non-current asset sold during the year had a book value of $1 000.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate for the year ended 30 April 2011:
(i) Sales *3+
(ii) Purchases *3+
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 April 2011. *9+
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position (balance sheet) at 30 April 2011. *5+
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2012 P22) Q3 (a to c)

Leong commenced business on 1 October 2011 with a capital of $6000. Leong has not maintained a full
set of accounting records. The following information is available on 30 September 2012:
$
Inventory 11 600
Prepaid expenses 350
Bank deposit 2 600
Motor van 7 700
Accrued expenses 900
7% Bank loan repayable 1 May 2018 9 000
Cash 50
Additional information at 30 September 2012:

1 Trade receivables include a sum of $500 which should be written off as a bad debt.
2 Interest on the bank deposit account, $100, had not been credited to the account by the bank.
REQUIRED
(a) State two benefits to Leong of maintaining a full set of double entry accounts. *2+
(b) Prepare the statement of affairs at 30 September 2012. *10+
(c) During the year, Leong took $8 800 drawings from the business. Calculate the profit for the year
ended 30 September 2012. *4+

Basir is the owner of the Korner Café. He does not maintain full double entry books, but has provided the
following information for the year ended 30 September 2014.
Bank Account
$ $
Balance b/d 4 000 Rent of café 5 500
Takings banked 43 200 Payments to credit suppliers 17 800
Operating expenses 13 600
Bank loan interest 250
_____ Balance c/d 9 600
47 200 47 200
Balance b/d 9 600
1 All takings were in cash and were banked on the same day with the exception of:
$
Staff wages 14 900
Drawings 8 000
Cash purchases 950
2 Balances at: 1 October 2013 30 September 2014

$ $
Inventory 350 720
Rent of café prepaid 500 –
Rent of café accrued – 1 000
7 % Bank loan 5 000 5 000
Bank loan interest accrued – 100
Fixtures and fittings (at valuation) 2 250 2 200
REQUIRED
(a) State two advantages of maintaining full double entry records. *2+
(b) Calculate the total purchases for the year ended 30 September 2014. *5+
(c) Calculate the revenue for the year ended 30 September 2014. *3+
(d) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2014. *10+

The following information was obtained from the books of Arden.
$
1 February 2015 Trade receivables balance 14 900 Dr
Trade payables balance 17 160 Cr
28 February 2015 Cheques received from trade receivables 45 800

Cheque from trade receivable later dishonoured 200
Cheques paid to trade payables 32 500
Bad debts 1 800
Cash sales 10 500
1 March 2015 Trade receivables balance 12 600 Dr
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the purchases ledger control account showing the credit purchases made in the month
of February 2015. [6]
(b) Prepare the sales ledger control account showing the credit sales made for the month of
February 2015. [7]
1 Payments for February $
Wages 15 200
2 Balances at 1 February 28 February

2015 ($) 2015 ($)
Non-current assets (at valuation) 18 000 17 200
General expenses owing 2 300 1 600
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the income statement for the month ended 28 February 2015. [6]

Alif is a trader. He does not maintain a full set of accounting records but the following information is
available.
1. Summarised bank transactions for the year ended 31 March 2016
Receipts $ Payments $
Trade receivables 32 000 Trade payables 29 000
Cash sales banked 7 400 Purchase of equipment 2 500
Interest receivable 600 Rent 8 000
2
All cash sales were banked on the day of receipt with the exception of the following which were paid out
of cash receipts.
$
Wages 9 000
Drawings 11 500
3
Balances at: 1 April 31 March
2015 ($) 2016 ($)
Equipment (net book value) 11 000 10 500
Inventory 12 000 11 500
Wages owing 300 450
Rent prepaid 500 700
Bank 3 950 ?
Capital 35 000 ?
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate, for the year ended 31 March 2016, the value of the following:
(i) revenue (sales) *4+
(ii) purchases. *2+
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 March 2016. *8+
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 March 2016. *6+
QUESTION 1 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q3 (a to c, e & f)
(a) Total Trade Receivables account
$ $
Revenue (Sales) 6 020 Bank 4 460
Bad debt 140
____ Balance c/d 1 420
6 020 6020
Total Sales = Credit sales + cash sales
= $6 020 + $790
= $6 810
(b) Total Trade Payables account
$ $
Bank 1 900 Purchases 3 600
Balance c/d 1 600 _____
3 600 3 600
(c) Income statement (trading section) for the month ended 31 July 2009
$ $
Cost of Sales
Purchases 3 600
Less Closing inventory (240) 3 360
Gross profit 3 450
(e) Jenny Palmer
Income Statement for the month ended 31 July 2009
$ $
Gross profit 3 450
Other Incomes: Discount received 100 3 550
Expenses
Wages and salaries 690
Bad debts 140
Sundry expenses 1 650 (2 480)
(f) Jenny Palmer
Balance Sheet at 31 July 2009
Non-current assets $ $
Equipment 1 200
Current Assets
Inventory 240
Bank 1 370
Cash 71
3 101
Other payables - tax authorities 181 1 781 1 320
2 520
Capital 2 000
Less Drawings (550) 2 520

(a) (i) Calculation of capital at 1 April 2009.
Assets $ $
Other receivables (prepaid expenses) 100
Cash (bank) 3 500 33 800
Liabilities
Non-current liabilities (6% Loan) 10 000
Other payables (accrued rent) 400 (10 400)
Capital 23 400
(ii) Calculation of consultancy fees for the year ended 31 March 2010.
$
Receipts of consultancy fees 74 000
Trade receivables at 31 March 2010 11 000
85 000
Trade receivables at 1 April 2009 14 200
Consultancy fees for the year 70 800
(b) Indira – Income statement for the year ended 31 March 2010
$ $
Consultancy fees 70 800
Expenses
Wages 23 600
Finance costs (loan interest) *$2 600 – ($10 000 − $8 000)+ 600
General expenses ($12 900 + $100 – $500) 12 500
Rent ($9 000 – $400 + $600) 9 200
Depreciation on equipment ($16 000 + $5 500 − $750 − $17 500) 3 250 (49 150)
(c)  It provides an arithmetic check on accounting records, since the total amount of debit
entries must equal the total amount of credit entries.
 Using a Sales Ledger and Purchase Ledger means you can track who owes the business
money and who the business owes money to much more easily.
 Financial position of the business can be determined much more clearly, at any given
time.
 Double entry accounts can help detect and reduce accounting errors.

(a) Trade receivables Control Account (to calculate sales)
$ $
Balance b/f 9 750 Bank (receipts from customers) 60 500
Sales 59 150 Balance c/d 8 400
68 900 68 900
Trade payables Control Account (to calculate purchases)
$ $
Bank (payments to suppliers) 34 900 Balance b/f 10 500
Balance c/d 9 300 Purchases 33 700
44 200 44 200
Income Statement for the year ended 30 April 2011
$ $
Cost of Sales
Gross profit 31 200
EXPENSES
Wages 15 000
Lighting and heating ($2 500 + $250 +$600) 3 350
Loan interest ($20 000  6%) 1 200
Loss on sale of non-current asset ($1 000 – $750) 250
Depreciation on non-current asset ($40 000 + $8 000 – $1 000 – $42 000) 5 000 (30 800)
Profit for the year 400
(c) Statement of Financial Position as at 30 April 2011
$ $ $
Non-Current Assets 42 000
Current Assets
Current Liabilities
Accrued lighting and heating 250
Accrued loan interest 1 200
Bank overdraft 10 250 (21 000) (1 600)
40 400
Non-Current Liabilities: 6% Bank loan (20 000)
20 400
EQUITY $ $
Capital at 1 May 2010 25 000
Add Profit for the year 400
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2012 P22) Q3 (a to c)

(a) Individual accounts of e.g. trade receivables, maintained
Balances available at all times
Each transaction recorded for ease of reference
(b) Statement of Affairs at 30 September 2012

Motor vehicle 7 700
CURRENT ASSETS
Inventory 11 600
Trade receivables (6 500 – 500) 6 000
Other receivables (350 + 100) 450
Bank deposit 2 600
Cash 50 20 700
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables 900 9 000 11 700
19 400
Loan (9 000)
Capital at 30 September 2012 10 400
(c) Leong
Statement to calculate profit for the year 30 September 2012
$
Closing capital 10 400
Drawings 8 800
Opening capital (6 000)

(a)  Complete and detailed record of all transactions
 Transactions are not forgotten or overlooked
 Improve reliability and accuracy
 Financial statements can be easily prepared
(b) Purchases = Cash purchases + Credit purchases

= $950 + $18 080 (W1)
= $19 030
(W 1) Trade Payables Account

$ $
Payments to credit suppliers 17 800 Balance b/d 1 150
Balance c/d 1 430 Credit purchases (balancing figure) 18 080
19 230 19 230
(c) Cash Account

$ $
Revenue (balancing figure) 67 050 Takings banked 43 200
Staff wages 14 900
Drawings 8 000
_____ Cash purchases 950
67 050 67 050
(d) Basir’s Korner Café

Income Statement
$ $
Cost of Sales
Opening inventory 350
Purchases (‘b’ part) 19 030
19 380
Closing inventory (720)
Gross profit 48 390
EXPENSES
Rent ($5 500 + $500 + $1 000 ) 7 000
Depreciation – Fixtures ($2 250 + $450 – $2 200) 500
Staff wages 14 900
Interest on loan ($5 000 x 7%) 350 (36 350)

(a) Purchases ledger control account
2015 $ 2015 $
Feb 28 Bank 32 500 Feb 01 Balance b/f 17 160
Feb 28 Discount received 910 Feb 28 Purchases (balancing figure) 28 500
Feb 28 Purchases returns 3 800
Feb 28 Balance c/d 8 450 ______
45 660 45 660
(b) Sales ledger control account

2015 $ 2015 $
Feb 01 Balance b/f 14 900 Feb 28 Bank 45 800
Feb 28 Bank (dishonoured cheque) 200 Feb 28 Discount allowed 2 700
Feb 28 Sales (balancing figure) 47 800 Feb 28 Bad debts 1 800
_____ Feb 28 Balance c/d 12 600
62 900 62 900
(c) Income Statement

For the month ended 28 February 2015
$ $ $
Sales: [$47 800 (credit sales) + $10 500 (cash sales)] 58 300
Cost of Sales
Opening inventory - 1 February 9 350
Purchases 28 500
Less Returns outwards (3 800) 24 700
34 050
Closing inventory - 28 February (8 650) 25 400
Gross profit 32 900
Other Incomes
33 810
Expenses:
Bad debts 1 800
Depreciation ($18 000  $17 200) 800
Wages 15 200
General expenses ($7 900 – $2 300 + $1 600) 7 200 (27 700)
Profit for the month 6 110

(a) (i) Total Sales = Cash sales + Credit Sales
= $27 900 (W 1) + $32 750 (W 2)
= $60 650
(W 1) Cash Account
$ $
Cash sales (Balancing figure) 27 900 Wages 9 000
Drawings 11 500
______ Cash sales banked 7 400
27 900 27 900
(W 2) Sales Ledger Control account

$ $
Balance b/f 17 600 Bank (receipts) 32 000
Revenue - sales (Balancing figure) 32 750 Balance c/d 18 350
______ ______
50 350 50 350
(ii) Purchases Ledger Control account

$ $
Bank (payments) 29 000 Balance b/f 9 750
Balance c/d 7 950 Purchases (Balancing figure) 27 200
36 950 36 950
(b) Alif
$ $
Revenue (‘a’ part) 60 650
Cost of Sales
Purchases 27 200
Closing inventory (11 500)
Gross profit 32 950
Other incomes
Interest receivable 600
33 550
Expenses
Rent ($8 000  $700 + $500) 7 800
Wages ($9 000 + $450  $300) 9 150
Depreciation on equipment ($11 000 + $2 500  $10 500) 3 000 (26 450)
(c) Statement of financial position at 31 March 2016

Non-current assets $ $
Equipment 10 500
Current Assets
Inventory 11 500
Other receivables: Prepaid rent 700 30 550
41 050
Equity
Capital 35 000
42 100
Drawings (11 500) 30 600
Current Liabilities
Other payables: Wages 450
Bank [$3 950 + $40 000 (total receipts) – $46 000 (Total payments)] 2 050 10 450
41 050
Chapter 14 193 Accounts of Non Profit Organisations
CHAPTER 14 ACCOUNTS OF NON PROFIT ORGANISATIONS

The Ranford Sports Club keeps a full set of double entry accounts and prepares monthly accounts. The
summarised receipts and payments account for the month of April 2009 was as follows.
Receipts and Payments Account
$ $
Balance b/d 1 680 Payments for café purchases 4 320
Café takings 9 850 General expenses 1 890
Donations 50 Repairs to café fixtures 165
Subscriptions Balance
530c/d 5 735
12 110 12 110
1 Other balances 1 April 30 April
$ $
Café inventory 1 700 1 230
Trade payables for café purchases 1 830 1 470
Café fixtures 5 450 5 400
2 The café takings recorded in the receipts and payments account do not include the
income, $770, for a birthday party held on 20 April 2009.
3 The wages for the café manager have not been paid for the month of April. The café wages
have been calculated as $815.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the café trading account for the month ended 30 April 2009. *9+
(d) State two differences between a receipts and payments account and an income and expenditure
account. *4+

The treasurer of the Sandbury Sports Club did not keep full accounting records. The following information
was available at 31 October 2011
Cash Book (summary)

$ $
Balance b/f 1 November 2010 105 Purchase of refreshments 19 000
Subscription received: Rent and rates 1 200
– for the year ended 31 Oct 2010 150 Operating expenses 3 750
– for the year ended 31 Oct 2011 3 200 Purchase of equipment 900
– for the year ended 31 Oct 2012 310 Balance c/d 31 October 2011 3 915
Sales of refreshments 25 000 _____
28 765 28 765
1 Balances 1 November 2010 ($) 31 October 2011 ($)

Inventory of refreshments 2 200 700
Operating expenses Prepaid 100 Accrued 250
Subscriptions in advance 175 310
Subscriptions in arrears 270 90
2 Subscriptions not collected for the year ended 31 October 2010 are to be considered as
irrecoverable on 31 October 2011.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the accumulated fund at 1 November 2010. *6+
(b) Prepare the refreshments trading account for the year ended 31 October 2011. *4+
(c) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 31 October 2011. *10+
(d) (i) State the section of Sandbury Sports Club’s balance sheet on 31 October 2011 in which
subscriptions paid in advance will appear. Give a reason for your answer *2+
(ii) State the section of Sandbury Sports Club’s balance sheet on 31 October 2011 in which
purchase of equipment will appear. Give a reason for your answer. *2+

The following balances were extracted from the books of Trinity Social Club on 30 April 2012:
$
Donations income for the year 150
Subscriptions 1 980
Rent 1 400
Sales of refreshments 2 500
Purchases of refreshments 1 150
Bank overdraft 100
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following trial balance at 30 April 2012 clearly showing the value of the
accumulated fund. *5+
Trinity Social Club
Debit Credit
$ $
Fixtures and fittings
Donations income
Subscriptions
Rent
Sales of refreshments
General expenses
Purchases of refreshments
Bank overdraft
Accumulated fund
Additional information at 30 April 2012.

1 Subscriptions of $25 were paid in advance and $60 were in arrears.
2 An invoice for refreshment purchases, $75, had not been entered in the books.
3 Inventory of refreshments $430.
4 General expenses accrued $170.
5 Fixtures and fittings were valued at $1 360.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare, for the year ended 30 April 2012:
(i) Subscriptions account. Balance the account on that date. *4+
(ii) Refreshments trading account. *3+
(c) Prepare an income and expenditure account for the year ended 30 April 2012. *5+
(d) State two differences between a receipts and payments account and an income and expenditure
account. *4+

The receipts and payments account of Brown Lane Rovers Football Club for the year ended 30 June 2013
was as follows.
$ $
Balance b/d 4 543 Match expenses 3 680
Subscriptions 7 200 New kits and equipment 4 656
Sale of old kits and equipment 1 008 General expenses 6 913
Match day revenue 1 233 Purchase of refreshments 2 078
Donation income 940 Groundsman’s wages 1 940
Sale of refreshments 6 834 Balance c/d 2 491
21 758 21 758
1 1 July 2012 30 June 2013
$ $
Subscriptions paid in advance – 540
Subscriptions in arrears 240 –
Inventory of refreshments 250 300
Creditors (refreshment suppliers) 1 034 1 140
Kits and equipment at valuation 5 000 8 104
2 The kits and equipment sold during the year were valued at $1 230 on 1 July 2012.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the depreciation on the kits and equipment for the year ended 30 June 2013. [5]
(b) Calculate the profit or loss on the sale of the old kits and equipment. [3]
(c) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 30 June 2013. Balance the account and
bring the balance down on 1 July 2013. [4]
(d) Prepare the refreshments income statement for the year ended 30 June 2013. [4]
(e) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 30 June 2013. [5]
(f) State one difference between an income and expenditure account and a receipts and payments
account. [2]

The Millennium Social Club provides a meeting place for members. The club also runs a café for the sale of
refreshments.
The treasurer of the Millennium Social Club does not maintain a full set of double entry records, but has
produced the following information for the year ended 30 April 2014.
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 30 April 2014
Balance b/d 2 250 General expenses 7 600
Subscriptions 5 800 Rent 4 000
Café takings 41 000 Payments to café suppliers 12 400
Donations 3 100 Wages & taxes of café manager 14 000
Bank loan 2 800
Purchase of equipment and fixtures 700
______ Balance c/d 9 650
52 150 52 150
Balance b/d 9 650
1 Balances at:
1 May 2013 30 April 2014
$ $
Subscriptions in arrears –– 600
Trade payables for café supplies 1 250 1 100
Inventory of café supplies 930 790
Heat and light due 520 720
Equipment and fixtures (at valuation) 11 200 10 100
8% Bank loan 10 000 ?
Café manager’s wages and employment taxes due –– ?
2 The café manager’s wages and employment taxes for the month of April 2014 were outstanding.
In April 2014 she had worked a total of 180 hours.
Employee’s tax and social security of $240 would be deducted from the gross pay.
The Millennium Social Club would pay 10% of the café manager’s gross pay as an employer’s
contribution to social security.
3 The 8% bank loan repayment included the interest due for the year.
4 Half of the heat and light relates to the café.
5 Half of the equipment and fixtures are used in the café.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the café manager’s net pay for April 2014 [3]
(b) Prepare the café income statement for the year ended 30 April 2014. [7]
(c) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 30 April 2014. [10]

The following information is available for the Axton Chess Club.
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 31 March 2015
$ $
Balance b/d 1 April 2014 230 Rent of clubroom 2 000
Subscriptions 3 260 Treasurer’s salary 250
Competition entry fees received 1 580 Purchase of fixtures and equipment 1 100
Donations 350 Competition prizes 750
Balance c/d 31 March 2015 1 930 Travelling expenses 1 900
_____ Other operating expenses 1 350
7 350 7 350
Balance b/d 1 April 2015 1 930
1 Balances at: 1 April 2014 31 March 2015
$ $
Subscriptions in advance – 450
Fixtures and equipment (valuation) 4 000 4 400
Rent of clubroom prepaid – 50
Rent of clubroom accrued 70 –
Other operating expenses accrued 190 20
Accumulated fund 4 500 ?
2 $280 of the subscriptions in arrears on 1 April 2014 were subsequently received.
3 Subscriptions not paid after 12 months were considered irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2015, showing the transfer to the
income and expenditure account. Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 April
2015. [5]
(b) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 31 March 2015. [8]
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 March 2015. [7]

(c) Café Trading account
For the month ended 30 April 2009
$ $
Sales ($9 850 + $770) 10 620
Cost of Sales
Purchases ($4 320 – $1 830 + $1 470) 3 960
Closing inventory 1 230 4 430
Gross Profit 6 190
Expenses
Wages (“b” part) 815
Repairs to cafe fixtures 165
Depreciation on café fixtures ($5 450  $5 400) 50 1 030
Café profit 5 160
(d) Receipts and payments account Income and expenditure account

It begins with an opening and ends with a There is no opening or closing balance.
closing balance of cash and bank (though However, it ends with surplus or deficit of the
sometimes they are merged) period concerned.
It records all amounts received or paid It includes revenue items (income and
whether relate to capital or revenue items. expenses) relating to the period only
It also includes non-cash incomes or expenses
It includes cash items only
of revenue nature.
It includes all cash and bank receipts and
It includes both cash and non-cash revenue
payments, whether they are related to current,
items related to the current year only.
past or future year.
Closing balance indicates surplus or deficit for
Closing balance indicates cash or bank balance
the period

(a) Calculation of Accumulated Fund
Assets $
Inventory of refreshments 2 200
Prepaid operating expenses 100
Equipment (net book value) 3 200
Subscriptions in arrears 270
Cash at bank 105
5 875
Liabilities
Subscriptions in advance 175
Accumulated fund 5 700
(b) Sandbury Sports Club

Refreshment Trading Account for the year ended 31 October 2011
$ $
Cost of Sales
21 200
Closing inventory (700)
Refreshment profit 4 500
(c) Sandbury Sports Club

Income and Expenditure Account
For the year ended 31 October 2011
Income $ $
Subscriptions ($3 200 + $175 + $90) 3 465
Profit on refreshments (‘b’ part) 4 500 7 965
Expenditure
Bad debts 120
Operating expenses($3 750 + $100 + $250) 4 100
Depreciation on equipment ($3 200 + $900 − $2 700) 1 400 (6 820)
Surplus 1 145
(d) (i) Current liabilities

They are creditors of the club as cash has been received in advance for services to be
provided in the future
(ii) Non-current assets
It is capital expenditure as will be used for more than one accounting period

(a) Trinity Social Club
Dr Cr
$ $
Donations received 150
Subscriptions 1 980
Rent 1 400
Bank overdraft 100
Accumulated fund _____ 200
4 930 4 930
(b) (i) Subscriptions account

2012 $ 2012 $
Apr 30 Income and expenditure 2 015 Apr 30 Bank 1 980
Apr 30 Balance c/d (in advance) 25 Apr 30 Balance c/d (in arrears) 60
2 040 2 040
May 01 Balance b/d (in arrears) 60 May 01 Balance b/d (in advance) 25
(ii) Refreshment Trading Account for the year ended 30 April 2012
$ $
Cost of sales
Purchases of refreshments ($1 150 + $75) 1 225
Closing inventory (430) 795
Profit on refreshments 1 705
(c) Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 30 April 2012
Incomes $ $
Subscriptions *b (i)+ 2 015
Profit on refreshments *b (ii)+ 1 705
Donations income for the year 150 3 870
Expenditures
Rent 1 400
General expenses ($780 + $170) 950
Depreciation on fixtures and fittings ($1 600 − $1 360) 240 2 590
Surplus 1 280
(b) Receipts and payments account Income and expenditure account

It begins with an opening and ends with a There is no opening or closing balance.
closing balance of cash and bank (though However, it ends with surplus or deficit of the
sometimes they are merged) period concerned.
It records all amounts received or paid It includes revenue items (income and
whether relate to capital or revenue items. expenses) relating to the period only
It also includes non-cash incomes or expenses
It includes cash items only
of revenue nature.
It includes all cash and bank receipts and
It includes both cash and non-cash revenue
payments, whether they are related to current,
items related to the current year only.
past or future year.
Closing balance indicates surplus or deficit for
Closing balance indicates cash or bank balance
the period

(a) Kits and Equipment Account
$ $
Balance b/f 5 000 Disposal 1 230
Bank (new purchase) 4 656 Depreciation (balancing figure) 322
____ Balance c/d 8 104
9 656 9 656
(b) Kits and Equipment Disposal Account

$ $
Kits and equipment 1 230 Bank 1 008
____ Loss on disposal (balancing figure) 222
1 230 1 230
(c) Subscriptions account
2012 $ 2013 $
Jul 01 Balance b/d 240 Jun 30 Bank 7 200
2013
Jun 30 Income and expenditure 6 420
Jun 30 Balance c/d 540 _____
7 200 7 200
Jul 01 Balance b/d 540
(d) Brown Lane Rovers Football Club
Refreshments Income statement for the year ended 30 June 2013
$ $
Cost of Sales
Opening Inventory 250
Purchases ($2 078 + $1 140  $1 034) 2 184
2 434
Closing inventory (300) (2 134)
(e) Brown Lane Football Club

Income and Expenditure account for the year ended 30 June 2013
INCOMES $ $
Subscriptions (‘c’ part) 6 420
Match day revenue 1 233
Profit on refreshments (‘d’ part) 4 700
Donation income 940 13 293
EXPENDITURES
Match expenses 3 680
Groundsman’s wages 1 940
Depreciation (‘a’ part) 322
Loss on disposal (‘b’ part) 222 (13 077)
Surplus of income over expenditure 216
(f) Income and expenditure Receipts and payments

Only records items of revenue nature. Includes both capital and revenue items
Similar to income statement. Similar to cash book.
Applies matching (accrual) concept. Record when cash is received or paid.
Shows a surplus/deficit. May have opening or (and) closing balances.
Includes non-cash items like depreciation. Only includes items involving receipts and
payments of cash

(a) Calculation of café manager’s net pay for April 2014
$
Gross wages [(160 hours @ $6) + (20 hours @ $9)] 1140
Net pay 900
(b) Millenium Social Club

Café Income Statement for the year ended
$ $
Revenue (Café takings) 41 000
Cost of Sales
Opening inventory 930
Purchases ($12 400 + $1 100 – $1 250) 12 250
13 180
Closing inventory (790) (12 390)
Expenses:
Wages and taxes *$14 000 + $1 140 (‘a’ part) + ($1 140 × 10%)+ 15 254
Heat and light [($1 000 + $720  $520) × /2]
1
600
1
Depreciation on equipment & fixtures [($11200+$700–$10100)× /2] 900 (16 754)
Profit on café 11 856
(c) Millenium Social Club

Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 30 April 2014
INCOMES $ $
Subscriptions ($5 800 + $750 – $400 + $600) 6 750
Profit on café 11 856
Donations 3 100 21 706
EXPENDITURES
Heat and light [($1 000 + $720  $520) × /2]
1
600
1
Depreciation on equipment & fixtures [($11 200 + $700 – $10 100)× /2] 900
Bank loan interest ($10 000 × 8%) 800
Rent 4 000 (13 900)
Excess of income over expenditure 7 806

(a) Subscriptions account
2014 $ 2015 $
Apr 01 Balance b/d (arrears) 530 Mar 31 Bank 3 260
2015 Mar 31 Bad debts ($530  $280) 250
Mar 31 Income and expenditure (*) 3 280 Mar 31 Balance c/d (arrears) 750
Mar 31 Balance c/d (advances) 450 ____
4 260 4 260
Apr 01 Balance b/d 750 1 April Balance b/d 450
(b) Axton Chess Club

Income and Expenditure Account for the year ended 31 March 2015
Income: $ $
Subscriptions 3 280
Competition profit ($1 580  $750) 830
Donations 350 4 460
Expenditures:
Rent ($2 000 –$70 – $50) 1 880
Treasurer’s salary 250
Travelling expenses 1 900
Other operating expenses ($1 350 – $190 + $20) 1 180
Depreciation on fixtures ($4 000 + $1 100  $4 400) 700
Bad debts 250 6 160
Deficit (1 700)
(c) Statement of Financial Position at 31 March 2015
Total assets $ $
Non-current asset
Fixtures and equipment 4 400
Current assets
Subscriptions in arrears 750
Other receivables - prepayments 50 800
Total assets 5 200
Accumulated fund
Balance at start 4 500
Less Deficit for the year (1 700) 2 800
Current liabilities
Subscriptions in advance 450
Other payables – accrued 20
Bank overdraft 1 930 2 400
Total accumulated fund & liabilities 5 200
Chapter 15 204 Manufacturing Accounts
CHAPTER 15 MANUFACTURING ACCOUNTS

Alison Brown is a manufacturer. The following balances were extracted from the books on 31 July 2009.
Alison Brown
Trial Balance at 31 July 2009
Inventory at 1 August 2005 $
Raw materials 34 760
Work in progress 4 820
Finished goods 8 300
Purchases of raw materials 396 300
Purchases of finished goods 11 340
Carriage on purchases of raw materials 1 200
Sales returns 6 400
Direct factory wages 198 600
Factory manager’s salary 18 600
Office salaries 43 330
Sundry factory expenses 24 360
Sundry office expenses 18 950
Distribution costs 23 460
Factory plant and machinery (cost) 96 000
Office equipment (cost) 17 400
Provision for depreciation of factory plant and machinery 42 000
Provision for depreciation of office equipment 6 000
Bank (Dr) 2 050
Capital 132 160
Drawings 12 300
Additional Information:
1 Inventory at 31 July 2009 was valued as follows:
$
2 At 31 July 2009:
(i) Direct factory wages, $16 550, were accrued.
(ii) Office salaries, $1860, were prepaid.
3 Depreciation is to be charged on factory plant and machinery at 25% per annum using the
diminishing (reducing) balance method.
4 Office equipment is to be depreciated using the straight-line method at 20% on cost. Office
equipment, $15 000, was purchased on 1 August 2004. Additional office equipment, $2 400, was
purchased on 30 April 2009. No other changes in non-current assets occurred in the year ended
31 July 2009. Depreciation is calculated for the time assets are held in the business.
5 A provision for doubtful debts is to be created at 2 % of trade receivables.

6 Alison withdrew finished goods, $960, from the business during the year. This has not been
included in the books.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account of Alison Brown for the year ended 31 July 2009. Show
clearly cost of raw materials consumed, prime cost and cost of production. *11+
(b) Prepare the income statement of Alison Brown for the year ended 31 July 2009. *13+
(c) Prepare the balance sheet of Alison Brown at 1 July 2009. *16+

Wang Yee is a manufacturer. The following balances were extracted from his books on 31 January 2010.
Inventories 1 February 2009 $
Rent 28 000
Factory management salaries 31 500
Revenue (sales returns) 1 250
Non-current liability (8% loan - repayable 31 December 2015) 40 000
Finance costs (loan interest) paid 2 400
Property (land and buildings) (cost) 80 000
Plant and machinery (cost) 90 000
Provision for depreciation of plant and machinery 32 000
Provision for depreciation of office equipment 12 000
Cash at bank (Cr) 33 030
Capital 110 000
Drawings 17 000
1. Inventories at 31 January 2010 were valued as follows:
$
2 At 31 January 2010
Direct factory wages, $1 120, were accrued.
Sundry office expenses, $630, were prepaid.
3
3 Rent is to be apportioned on the basis of area occupied. Three fifths ( /5) of the area is occupied
2
by the factory and two fifths ( /5) by the offices.
4 Depreciation is charged on plant and machinery at 20% per annum using the diminishing
(reducing) balance method.
5 Office equipment is depreciated using the straight-line method at 20% on cost.
Office equipment, $24 000, was purchased on 31 July 2006.
Additional office equipment, $6 000, was purchased on 30 September 2009.
No other changes in non-current assets occurred in the year ended 31 January 2010.
Depreciation is calculated for the time assets are held in the business.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account of Wang Yee for the year ended 31 January 2010. Show
clearly the cost of raw materials consumed, prime cost and cost of production. *11+
(b) Prepare the income statement of Wang Yee for the year ended 31 January 2010. *15+
(c) Prepare the balance sheet of Wang Yee at 31 January 2010. *14+

Yip Sin is a manufacturer. The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 April 2011.
Inventory at 1 May 2010 $
Royalties paid 10 000
Factory indirect expenses 23 450
Rent 30 000
Revenue 450 000
Advertising 20 940
General office expenses 11 300
6% Loan – repayable 31 December 2020 50 000
Plant and machinery (cost) 75 000
Provisions for depreciation: Plant and machinery 25 000
Bank Dr 4 200
Capital 100 000
Drawings 25 000
1 Inventory at 30 April 2011 $
2 At 30 April 2011 Direct factory wages, $4 040, were accrued. Advertising, $1 700, was prepaid.
4 1
3 Rent is to be apportioned four fifths ( /5) to the factory and one fifth ( /5) to the administration.
4 A purchase of office equipment, $2 000, had been debited in error to the general office expenses
account. No entries have been made in the books to correct the error.
Factory plant and machinery at 20% p.a. using the diminishing (reducing) balance method.
Office equipment at 10% on cost using the straight-line method.
A full year’s depreciation is to be charged on all non-current assets owned at the end of the year.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account of Yip Sin for the year ended 30 April 2011.
Show clearly the prime cost and cost of production. *14+
(b) Prepare the income statement of Yip Sin for the year ended 30 April 2011. *13+
(c) Prepare the balance sheet of Yip Sin at 30 April 2011. *13+

Sandar Manufacturing makes a single product. The following balances were extracted from the books at
the end of the financial year on 30 September 2012:
$
Inventory at 1 October 2011: Raw materials 17 500
Carriage 12 000
Production wages 75 000
Office wages 35 000
Production manager’s salary 20 500
Factory rent, rates and power 18 400
Royalties 9 000
General factory expenses 15 200
Premises maintenance 40 000
Factory machinery (at cost) 120 000
Factory machinery – provision for depreciation 70 000
Inventory at 30 September 2012: Raw materials 16 300
Additional information at 30 September 2012:

1 60% of the carriage relates to raw materials and 40% to goods sold.
2 General factory expenses owing $400.
3 70% of the maintenance relates to the factory premises and 30% to the office premises.
4 Factory machinery is depreciated at the rate of 15% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 30 September 2012. Clearly label the
prime cost and cost of production. *16+
(b) Explain the term direct cost. *2+
(c) Give one example of a direct cost from the list of balances given in the question. *2+

The following balances were extracted from the books of Khan, a manufacturer, on 31 July 2012:
$
Factory equipment (cost) 160 000
Provisions for depreciation: Factory equipment 56 000
Office equipment disposal account 500 Dr
Bank 9 700 Dr
Capital 200 000
Inventory at 1 August 2011: Raw materials 26 000
Work-in-progress 36 000
Direct factory expenses 38 000
Indirect factory expenses 19 700
Drawings 8 000
Production management salaries 63 000
Office wages and salaries 69 500
Revenue 680 000
8% Loan – repayable 31 December 2025 35 000
Additional information at 31 July 2012:

1 Inventory was valued as follows:
$
Work-in-progress 40 000
2 Production wages, $6500, were accrued. Marketing expenses, $1 350, were prepaid.
3 Rent and rates are to be apportioned on the basis of area occupied. Three-quarters of the area is
occupied by the factory and one-quarter by the administration.
4 Contained within the office wages and salaries is $8000 taken by Khan. He also took finished
goods for his own personal use, $1 500.
Factory equipment at 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method
Office equipment at 10% per annum on cost using the straight-line method.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 July 2012. Show clearly the prime cost
and cost of production. *14+
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2012. *13+
(c) Prepare the balance sheet at 31 July 2012. *13+

The following balances were extracted from the books of Paul Lee, a manufacturer, on 31 May 2013.
$
Capital 220 000
Drawings 10 800
Factory machinery (cost) 210 000
Provision for depreciation: Factory machinery 75 600
Inventory at 1 June 2012: Raw materials 33 000
Revenue 426 088
Transport costs 29 400
Lighting and heating 23 140
Selling and administration expenses 10 742
Bad debts 1 000
Bank 658 Cr
6% Loan (repayable on 23 June 2018) 50 000
1 Inventory values at 31 May 2013:
Raw materials $38 000
Work in progress $42 600
Finished goods $71 200
2 Transport costs are allocated 65% to raw materials and 35% to delivery of finished goods.
3 Wages and salaries include $56 000 for production managers’ salaries. The remaining balance is
split 40% direct labour, 35% indirect labour and 25% office salaries.
4 Rent and rates are apportioned factory 80% and office 20%.
5 Lighting and heating are apportioned factory 70% and office 30%. On 31 May 2013 these were in
arrears by $860.
6 On 31 May 2013 selling and administration expenses had been prepaid by $230.
7 A provision for doubtful debts, representing 4% of trade receivables, is to be created.
8 Factory machinery is depreciated at 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method. Office equipment is depreciated at 12% per annum on cost.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 May 2013. *15+
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 May 2013. *13+
(c) Prepare the balance sheet (statement of financial position) at 31 May 2013. *12+

Cadmore Limited is a manufacturing business. The following information is available for the month of
April 2014.
Inventory at 1 April 2014: $
Factory wages 60 690
Office wages 24 750
Depreciation of factory machinery 7 000
Depreciation of office equipment 5 000
Rent of factory building 2 000
Rent of office building 1 000
Royalties 7 500
Office management salaries 32 000
Revenue 290 450
Insurance 1 250
1 Inventory at 30 April 2014:
2 Insurance is to be apportioned 80% to the factory, 20% to the office.
3 General expenses: $5 000 relate to the factory and $3 000 to the office.
REQUIRED
(a) (i) Explain the term direct cost. [1]
(ii) State two direct costs incurred by Cadmore Limited. [2]
(b) Prepare the manufacturing account of Cadmore Limited for the month ended 30 April 2014. [11]

Nikolas is a manufacturer. The following balances were extracted from his books on 31 July 2014.
$
Capital 80 000
Drawings 20 000
Machinery (cost) 125 000
Provisions for depreciation: Machinery 75 000
Bank 27 700 Dr
Inventory at 1 August 2013: Raw materials 15 000
Revenue 505 000
Royalties 15 000
Insurance 6 200
Rent 11 000
Production managers’ salaries 38 250
8% Loan (repayable 31 May 2024) 60 000
$
2 Sundry office expenses prepaid $1 400.
3 Insurance included a payment of $4 800 for the year ended 31 October 2014.
4 Insurance and rent are to be apportioned 80% to the factory and 20% to the office.
(i) machinery at 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method
(ii) office fixtures at 10% using the straight-line method.
6 Nikolas took $7 500 of finished goods for his own use.
7 A debt of $3 000 was considered irrecoverable. A provision for doubtful debts is maintained at 4%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 July 2014. [14]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2014. [13]
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 July 2014. [13]

The following balances were extracted from the books of Spiron Manufacturing on 30 April 2015.
$
Factory machinery 60 000
Inventory at 1 May 2014
Revenue 310 000
Factory managers’ salaries 32 000
Rent 10 000
Insurance 8 000
Financial expenses 7 650
Bank 7 700 Dr
Capital 90 000
Drawings 16 600
Additional information at 30 April 2015
$
3 Financial expenses owing were $850.

4 Marketing expenses of $600 were prepaid.
(i) Factory machinery at 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method
(ii) Office fixtures at 15% using the straight-line method.
6 A debt of $1 900 was considered irrecoverable. A provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained
at 5%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 30 April 2015. Show clearly the prime cost
and the cost of production. [13]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 April 2015. [15]

The following balances were extracted from the books of Fairview Manufacturing on 31 October 2015.
$
Office wages 75 000
Factory packaging cost 55 000
Rent 38 400
Factory equipment (at cost) 245 000
Office equipment (at cost) 60 000
Factory equipment 105 000
Inventory 1 November 2014:
1 Inventory at 31 October 2015
$
2 Half of the carriage inwards is for raw materials and half for finished goods.
3 Factory wages owing are $9 000.

4 60% of factory packaging costs are direct and 40% indirect.
5 Rent is allocated to the factory and the office on the basis of floor area occupied:
Factory 5000 sq m and Office 3000 sq m
6 Factory equipment and office equipment are both depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum
using the diminishing (reducing) balance method.
REQUIRED
Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 October 2015. [13]

The following balances were extracted from the books of JT Manufacturing for the month of August 2016.

Raw materials 3 800
Raw materials returns outward 1 200
Rent 9 000
Direct factory expenses 800
Factory direct wages 9 350
Total gross pay of factory indirect labour 1 880
Employer’s social security contribution 270
Power 4 000
Depreciation on factory machinery 6 000
Depreciation on office computers 9 000
Additional information at 31 August 2016

1 Inventory
$
Raw materials 5 350
2 Rent and power are to be apportioned: 60% to the factory, 40% to the office.
REQUIRED
Prepare the manufacturing account of JT Manufacturing for the month ended 31 August 2016. [10]

The following balances were extracted from the books of Project Manufacturing on 30 September 2016.
$
Capital 140 000
Drawings 39 800

Royalties 8 000
Rent 16 400
Insurance 5 000
Administration and finance costs 9 500
Inventory at 1 October 2015
Raw materials 8 700

1 Inventory
$
Raw materials 9 750
2 Expenses are to be apportioned to the factory and the office as follows:

Factory Office
Insurance 80% 20%
Rent 75% 25%
Premises maintenance 60% 40%
3 Administration and finance costs owing were $750.

4 Advertising expenses of $1 200 were prepaid.
(i) factory machinery at 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method
(ii) office fixtures at 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
6 A provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at the rate of 5%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 30 September 2016. Show clearly the
prime cost and the cost of production. [15]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2016. [14]
(a) Alison Brown
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 July 2009
Cost of material consumed $ $
Opening inventory of raw material 34 760
Purchases of raw material 396 300
Carriage of raw material 1 200
432 260
Closing inventory of raw material 47 290 384 970
Direct wages ($198 600 + $16 550) 215 150
Prime cost 600 120
Factory Overheads
Factory manager’s salary 18 600
Sundry factory expenses 24 360
Depreciation of factory plant and machinery (96 000 – 42 000) × 25% 13 500 56 460
656 580
Add Decrease in work in progress 150
Production cost of goods completed 656 730
(b) Alison Brown
Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2009
$ $ $
Less sales returns 6 400 791 800
Less cost of sales
Opening inventory of finished goods 8 300
Less Drawings (960) 10 380
675 140
Closing inventory of finished goods 9 200 666 210
Office salaries ($43 330 – $1 860) 41 470
3
Depreciation of equipment *(20%×15 000)+(20%×2 400× /12 ) 3 120
Provision for doubtful debts (2% × 84 350) 1 687 88 687
(c) Alison Brown’s Balance Sheet at 31 July 2009
Depr’n to Book
Non-Current Assets Cost ($)
date ($) value ($)
Land and buildings 40 000 - 40 000
Factory plant and machinery 96 000 55 500 40 500
Office equipment 17 400 9 120 8 280
153 400 64 620 88 780
Current Assets $ $ $
Inventory : Raw materials 47 290
Finished goods 9 200 61 160
Less provision for doubtful debts 1 687 82 663
Other receivables (Prepayments) 1 860
Cash equivalents (Bank) 2 050
147 733
Current Liabilities
Other payables (Accruals) 16 550 80 710 67 023
155 803
Equity (Capital)
Capital at year start 132 160
Less Drawings ($12 300 + $960) (13 260) 155 803

(a) Wang Yee
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 January 2010
Cost of material consumed $ $
Opening inventory of raw material 14 700
Closing inventory of raw material (16 250) 74 050
Direct wages ($62 140 + $1 120) 63 260
Prime cost 137 310
Factory Overheads
3
Factory rent ($28 000 × /5) 16 800
Depreciation of factory plant (90 000–32 000) × 20% 11 600 59 900
197 210
Add Opening work in progress 23 570
Less Closing work in progress (18 780)
(b) Income Statement for the year ended 31 January 2010

$ $ $
Revenue (sales) 342500
Revenue (sales returns) (1 250) 341 250
Cost of sales
Purchases of finished goods 15 500 217 500
Closing inventory of finished goods (32 500) (220 000)
Expenses $ $
2
Rent ($28 000 × /5) 11 200
Office salaries 41600
Distribution costs 28650
Sundry office expenses ($9 870 – $630) 9 240
Finance costs ($40 000 × 8%) 3 200
4
Depreciation of equipment *(24 000×20%)+( 6 000×20%× /12) 5 200
Provision for doubtful debts *($45 000 × 4%) – $1 550+ 250 (99 340)
Profit for the year 21910
(c) Wang Yee
Balance Sheet at 31 January 2010
Cost ($) Deprn to Book
Non-Current Assets
date ($) value ($)
Property (land and buildings) () 80 000 80 000
Plant and machinery ($32 000 + $11 600) 90 000 43 600 46 400
139 200
Current Assets
Inventory: Raw materials 16 250
Trade receivables 45000
Less provision for doubtful debts ($45 000 × 4%) (1 800) 43 200
Other receivables (Prepayments) 630
111 360
Current Liabilities
Cash at bank (Cr) 33 030
Loan interest payable ($3 200 – $2 400) 800
Other payables (Accruals) 1 120 (95 650) 15 710
154 910
Equity (Capital)
Opening balance 110 000
Add Net Profit for the year 21 910
Non-current liability (8% loan - repayable 31 December 2015) 40 000 154 910

(a) Manufacturing Account for the year ended 30 April 2011
Raw Material Cost $ $
Cost of raw materials consumed 140 000
Direct factory wages ($85 960 + $4 040) 90 000
Royalties 10 000
Prime cost 240 000
Factory overheads: $ $
4
Rent ($30 000 × /5) 24 000
Depreciation of plant and machinery *($75 000 − $25 000) × 20%+ 10 000 93 450
333 450
Less Closing work in progress (34 250) (3 450)
Cost of production 330 000
(b) Income Statement for the year ended 30 April 2011

$ $
Revenue 450 000
Cost of Sales
370 750
Closing inventory of finished goods (42 350)
Expenses
1
Rent ($30 000 × /5) 6 000
Advertising ($20 940 – $1 700) 19 240
General office expenses ($11 300 – $2 000) 9 300
Loan interest ($50 000 × 6%) 3 000
Depreciation on office equipment *($24 000 + $2 000) × 10%+ 2 600
Increase in provision for doubtful debts *($64 000 × 5%) − $2 400+ 800 88 090
(c) Balance sheet as at 30 April 2011

$ $ $
Depn.
Non-Current Assets Cost NBV
to date
Plant and machinery ($25 000 + $10 000) 75 000 35 000 40 000
Office equipment ($24 000 + $2 000) ; ($9 000 + $2 600) 26 000 11 600 14 400
101 000 46 600 54 400
Current Assets
Less: provision for doubtful debts (3 200) 60 800
Other receivables (prepaid advertising) 1 700
Bank 4 200
171 400
Other payables (accrued expenses) *$4 040 + ($3 000 − $1 500)+ 5 540 67 290 104 110
158 510
6% loan repayable 31 December 2020 50 000
108 510
Equity
Capital 100 000
133 510

(a) Sandar Manufacturing
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 30 September 2012
Raw Materials Cost $ $ $
Opening inventory of raw materials 17 500
Carriage on raw materials ($12 000 × 60%) 7 200 89 800
107 300
Closing inventory of raw materials (16 300)
Royalties 9 000
PRIME COST 175 000
Factory overheads:
Production manager’s salary 20 500
Rent, rates and power 18 400
General factory expenses ($15 200 + $400) 15 600
Premises maintenance ($40 000 × 70%) 28 000
Depreciation on machinery *($120 000  $70 000) × 15%) 7 500 90 000
265 000
Work in progress: at 1 October 2011 24 000
at 30 September 2012 (29 000) (5 000)
PRODUCTION COST 260 000
(b) Direct cost is a cost which can be directly identifiable with reference to the product being
manufactured.
(c) Raw materials cost, Production wages and Royalties

(a) Khan
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 July 2012
Raw Materials Cost $ $

Inventory of raw materials at 1 August 2011 26 000
Less: Inventory of raw materials at 31 July 2012 (29 000)
Production wages ($164 500 + $6 500) 171 000
Prime cost 389 000
Factory Overheads
Production management salaries 63 000
Provision for depreciation of plant and machinery 20 800 120 000
509 000
Add Work in progress (opening) 36 000
Less Work in progress (closing) (40 000) (4 000)
Production Cost 505 000
(b) Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2012
$ $
Revenue 680 000
Cost of sales
Inventory of finished goods at 1 August 2011 48 000
Production cost ($505 000  $1 500) 503 500
Inventory of finished goods at 31 July 2012 (55 000) (496 500)
Expenses
Office wages and salaries ($69 500 – $8 000) 61 500
Marketing expenses ($27 850 – $1 350) 26 500
Loan interest ($2 100 + $700) 2 800
Depreciation on office equipment 4 000
Loss on disposal 500
Increase in provision for doubtful debts 1 500 (171 000)
(c) Balance Sheet at 31 July 2012

NON-CURRENT ASSETS COST ($) DEPN ($) NBV ($)
Factory equipment 160 000 76 800 83 200
Office equipment 40 000 30 000 10 000
200 000 106 800 93 200
CURRENT ASSETS

Less: provision for doubtful debts 4 500 70 500
Other receivables (Prepaid marketing) 1 350
Bank 9 700
205 550
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables - accrued expenses ($6 500 + $700) 7 200 (60 750) 144 800
238 000
NON CURRENT LIABILITIES 8% loan repayable 31 December 2025 (35 000)
203 000
EQUITY
Capital 200 000
Add: Profit for the year 12 500
Less: Drawings ($8 000 + $1 500) (9 500) 203 000

(a) Paul Lee
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 31 May 2013
Raw Material Cost $ $ $
Inventory of raw materials 1 June 2012 33 000
Add Transport cost ($29 400 x 65%) 19 110 152 797
Inventory of raw materials 31 May 2013 (38 000)
Direct labour ($140 600  $56 000) x 40% 33 840
Prime cost 181 637
Factory Overheads
Indirect labour ($140 600  $56 000) × 35% 29 610
Factory rent and rates ($28 000 x 80%) 22 400
Factory heat and light ($23 140 + $860) x 70% 16 800
Depreciation of machinery ($210 000  $75 600) × 20% 26 880 170 113
351 750
Work in progress 1 September 2012 36 000
Work in progress 31 August 2013 (42 600) (6 600)
(b) Income statement for the year ended 31 May 2013

$ $
Revenue 426 088
Cost of sales
Closing inventory of finished goods (71 200) (340 394)
Gross profit 85 694
Expenses $ $
Bad debts 1 000
Loan interest ($50 000 x 20%) 3 000
Selling and administration expenses ($10 742  $230) 10 512
Wages ($140 600  $56 000) × 25% 21 150
Lighting and heating *($23 140 + $860) x 30%+ 7 200
Rent and rates ($28 000 x 20%) 5 600
Transport ($29 400 x 35%) 10 290
Provision for doubtful debts ($34 400 x 4%) 1 376
Provision for depreciation of office equipment ($60 000 x 12%) 7 200 (67 328)
(c) Paul Lee

Statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet) as at 31 May 2013
Depn ($) Value ($)
Factory machinery ($75 600 + $26 880) 210 000 102 480 107 520
270 000 131 280 138 720
Current Assets
Inventory
Provision for doubtful debts ($34 400 x 4%) (1 376) 33 024
Other receivables (Selling & admin expenses) 230
185 054
Current Liabilities
Other payables (light & heat) 860
Loan interest due ($3 000  $2 000) 1 000
Bank overdraft 658 (46 208) 138 846
277 566
6% Loan repayable 23 June 2018 (50 000)
227 566
EQUITY
Capital 220 000
Add Net profit 18 366

(a) (i) Direct costs are manufacturing costs which are directly identifiable or traceable to the
product being manufactured.
(ii) Raw materials, Factory wages and Royalties
(b) Cadmore Limited

Manufacturing Account
For the month ended 30 April 2014
91 500
Raw materials consumed 79 100
Royalties 7 500
Prime cost 147 290
FACTORY OVERHEADS:
Insurance ($ 1250 × 80%) 1 000
General expenses 5 000 25 750
173 040
Add Opening Work in progress 12 700
Less Closing Work in progress (9 980) 2 720
Cost of Production 175 760

(a) Manufacturing Account
For the year ended 31 July 2014
Raw Materials Cost $ $
Opening Inventory of raw materials 15 000
147 500
Closing inventory of raw materials (17 500)
Factory wages (assumed to be direct) 90 800
Royalties 15 000
Prime cost 235 800
Factory overheads:
Rent ($11 000 x 80%) 8 800
1
Insurance [$6200 – ($4 800 × /4)] x 80% 4 000
Depreciation of machinery [($125 000  $75 000) × 20%] 10 000 73 800
Total Manufacturing Costs 309 600
Work in progress- Opening 31 400
Work in progress- Closing (26 000) 5 400
(b) Income Statement for the year ended 31 July 2014
$ $ $
Revenue 505 000
Cost of Sales
Opening Inventory of finished goods 40 000
Drawings of finished goods (7 500) 307 500
Closing Inventory of finished goods (42 500) (305 000)
EXPENSES
1
Insurance [$6200 – ($4 800 × /4)] x 20% 1 000
Rent ($11 000 x 20%) 2 200
Sundry office expenses ($19 800 – $1 400) 18 400
Loan interest ($60 000 × 8%) 4 800
Depreciation on office equipment ($55 000 × 10%) 5 500
Bad debts 3 000
Increase in prov. for doubtful debts [(55 000 × 4%)  1 500] 700 (142 700)
(c) Statement of Financial Position at 31 July 2014
NON-CURRENT ASSETS Accumulated Net Book
Cost ($)
Depn ($) Value ($)
Machinery ($75 000 + $10 000) 125 000 85 000 40 000
Office fixtures ($16 500 + $5 500) 55 000 22 000 33 000
180 000 107 000 73 000
CURRENT ASSETS
Inventory:
Less: provision for doubtful debts ($55 000 × 4%) 2 200 52 800
Other receivables: Sundry office expenses prepaid 1 400
1
Prepaid insurance ($4 800 × /4) 1 200 2 600
Bank 27 700
169 100
CURRENT LIABILITIES
Other payables – interest due ($4 800  $3 500) 1 300 (72 300) 96 800
169 800
NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES 8% loan (repayable 31 May 2024) (60 000)
109 800
EQUITY
Capital 80 000
Less Drawings ($20 000 + $7 500 ) (27 500) 109 800

(a) Spiron Manufacturing
Direct Material Cost $ $
Opening inventory 1 May 2014 10 150
95 150
Closing inventory 30 April 2015 (12 750)
Direct expenses 5 600
Prime cost 135 000
Factory Overheads:
Indirect expenses 9 800
Rent ($10 000 × 80%) 8 000
Insurance ($8 000 × 80%) 6 400
Depreciation – machinery [($80 000  $60 000) × 25%] 5 000 61 200
196 200
Add Work in progress: 1 May 2014 15 000
Less Work in progress: 30 April 2015 (16 200) (1 200)
(b) Income Statement for the year ended 30 April 2015
$ $
Revenue 310 000
Cost of Sales
Inventory of finished goods 1 May 2014 21 200
235 200
Inventory of finished goods - 30 April 2015 (18 700) (216 500)
Gross profit 93 500
Expenses
Rent ($10 000 × 20%) 2 000
Insurance ($8 000 × 20%) 1 600
Marketing ($12 400 – $600) 11 800
Financial expenses ($7 650 + $850) 8 500
Bad debts 1 900
Increase in prov for doubtful debts [($23 900  $1 900) × 5%]  $400 700
Depreciation - office fixtures ($20 000 × 15%) 3 000 (81 250)
(c) Statement of Financial Position at 30 April 2015

Accumulate Net Book

d Depn ($) Value ($)
Machinery ($60 000 + $5 000) 80 000 65 000 15 000
Office fixtures ($8 000 + $3 000) 20 000 11 000 9 000
100 000 76 000 24 000
Current Assets
Provision for doubtful debts ($22 000 × 5%) (1 100) 20 900
Other receivables (prepayments) 600
Bank 7 700 76 850
Capital & Liabilities
Capital 90 000
Current Liabilities
Other payables - Financial expenses owing 850 15 200
Total Liabilities & Capital 100 850

Fairview Manufacturing
For the year ended 31 October 2015
Inventory 1 November 2014 108 000
1
Carriage in on raw materials ($36 000 × /2) 18 000
Inventory 31 October 2015 (94 000)
Factory wages ($295 000 + $9 000) 304 000
Direct packaging cost ($55 000 × 60%) 33 000
Prime cost 855 000
Factory Overheads
Indirect packaging cost ($55 000 × 40%) 22 000
5
Rent ($38 400 × /8) 24 000
Management salaries 75 600
Indirect expenses 8 500
Depreciation – Factory equipment [($245 000  $105 000) × 25%] 35 000 165 100
1 020 100
Add Work in progress at 1 November 2014 84 300
Less Work in progress at 31 October 2015 (81 400) 2 900
Cost of Production 1 023 000

JT Manufacturing
Manufacturing Account for the month of August 2016
Raw Material Costs $ $
Purchases 15 600
19 400
Less Returns outwards (1 200)
18 200
Add Factory direct wages 9 350
Prime cost 23 000
Factory Overheads
Rent ($9 000  60%) 5 400
Factory indirect labour ($1 880 + $270) 2 150
Power ($4 000  60%) 2 400
Depreciation on factory machinery 6 000 30 500
53 500
Less Closing work in progress (7 500) (500)

(a) Project Manufacturing
Manufacturing Account for the year ended 30 September 2016
Raw Material Costs $ $
114 700
Other Direct Expenses :Royalties 8 000
Prime cost 185 950
Factory Overheads
Factory Managers’ salaries 29 000
Rent ($16 400 × 75%) 12 300
Insurance ($5 000 × 80%) 4 000
Depreciation -Machinery *($115 000  $50 000) × 20%+ 13 000 64 900
250 850
Add Work in progress: Opening 19 000
Less Work in progress: Closing (17 550) 1 450

(b) Project Manufacturing

$ $
Revenue 380 000
Cost of Sales
Finished Goods : Opening inventory 34 100
322 400
Finished Goods : Closing inventory (40 400)
Gross profit 98 000
Other Incomes
101 000
Expenses
Rent ($16 400 × 25%) 4 100
Insurance ($5 000 × 20%) 1 000
Advertising ($15 400 – $1 200) 14 200
Administration and finance costs ($9 500 + $750) 10 250
Increase in provision for doubtful debts *($32 000 × 5%)  $900+ 700
Depreciation – Office fixtures ($14 000 × 10%) 1 400 (86 050)
(b) Project Manufacturing

Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2016
Non-Current Assets Cost ($) Depn. ($) NBV($)
Machinery ($50 000 + $13 000) 115 000 63 000 52 000
Office fixtures ($6 200 + $1 400) 14 000 7 600 6 400
129 000 70 600 58 400
Current Assets
Other receivables : Advertising prepaid 1 200 99 300
157 700
Equity
Capital 140 000

154 950
Current Liabilities
Other payables : Administration and finance costs owing 750 42 550
157 700
Chapter 16 232 Company Accounts
CHAPTER 16 COMPANY ACCOUNTS

Loxton Ltd had the following capital structure on 1 September 2008.
Authorised and issued share capital $
50 000 ordinary shares of $0.50 each 25 000
100 000 10 % preference shares of $1 each 100 000
Reserves
General reserve 80 000
Retained profit 25 000
Debentures
5 % Debenture repayable 31 December 2015 80 000
REQUIRED
(a) State one similarity and one difference between preference shares and debentures. *4+
For the year ended 31 August 2009 Loxton Ltd made a net profit of $60 000 before calculating the
debenture interest. The directors made the following decisions:
1 On 1 March 2009 to make an interim dividend payment of
$0.10 on each ordinary share
$0.05 on each preference share
2 On 31 August 2009 to make a final dividend payment of $0.20 on each ordinary share pay the
remainder of the preference dividend
3 transfer $20 000 to the general reserve.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the profit and loss appropriation account of Loxton Ltd for the year ended 31 August
2009. *9+
(c) Suggest two reasons why a company might use a general reserve. *4+
Elodie has the following investments in Loxton Ltd:
1 500 ordinary shares of $0.50
$2 000 5 % debenture
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate Elodie’s total income from Loxton Ltd for the year ended 31 August 2009. *4+

The capital and reserves of Salvadore Ltd are as follows:
Salvadore Ltd
Balance Sheet (extract) at 31 July 2009
Capital and Reserves Authorised Called-up
$ $
Preference shares of $1 each 100 000 40 000
Ordinary shares of $0.50 each 100 000 50 000
200 000 90 000
Retained profits 43 900
REQUIRED
(a) Explain the difference between authorised and called-up share capital. *2+
(b) Explain two differences between preference shares and ordinary shares. *2+
(c) Explain why a company uses a general reserve. *1+
(d) Compare the capital structure, as disclosed in a balance sheet, of a limited company with that of
a partnership. *4+

SGC Ltd is a trading company. The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 April 2010.
$
Raw materials (Purchases) 178 000
Raw materials (Purchase) returns 9 000
Property (Land and buildings) at cost 250 000
Office fixtures and fittings (cost) 40 000
Provision for depreciation of computer equipment 28 000
Provision for depreciation of office fixtures and fittings 15 000
Other operating (Sundry) expenses 9 800
Advertising and marketing costs 24 000
Finance costs (Debenture interest) paid 3 000
Authorised and issued share capital
100 000 $0.50 ordinary shares 50 000
200 000 $1.00 8% preference shares 200 000
Non-current liabilities (12% debentures repayable 31 December 2020) 50 000
Profit and loss account 1 May 2009 1 300
Cash (Bank) Dr 3 450
1 Inventory at 30 April 2010 was $57 000.
2 At 30 April 2010
Office expenses, $450, were prepaid.
Office salaries, $1 800, were accrued.
3 Depreciation is to be charged on:
computer equipment at 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method;
office fixtures and fittings using the straight-line method at 20% on cost.
4 The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 5% of trade receivables (debtors).

5 On 30 April 2010 the directors of SGC Ltd
Transferred $20 000 to the general reserve.
Paid the full dividend on the preference shares.
Paid an ordinary share dividend of $0.10 per share.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and the appropriation account of SGC Ltd for the year ended 30
April 2010. *22+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet of SGC Ltd at 30 April 2010.s *18+
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (a to f)

Harland Ltd had the following balances in its accounts after the calculation of the profit for the year ended
31 October 2010:
Called up share capital: $
4% $1 Cumulative preference shares 200 000
$1 Ordinary shares 400 000
$
6% Debentures 100 000
Inventory 55 000
Profit for the year ended 31 October 2010 65 000
Retained profit 1 November 2009 75 000
Bank (Dr) 40 000
Interim preference dividend paid 5 000
1 Authorised share capital: $
4% $1 Cumulative preference shares 250 000
2 The directors have decided to:
Transfer $25 000 to the general reserve.
Pay the remainder of the cumulative preference share dividend for the year. An interim
dividend of 2½% was paid on 30 April 2010.
Pay a $0.05 final dividend on the ordinary shares. No interim dividend had been paid.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the appropriation account for Harland Ltd for the year ended 31 October 2010. *6+
(b) Prepare the balance sheet extract for the shareholders’ funds (capital and reserves) of Harland
Ltd at 31 October 2010. *5+
(c) State the amount of the capital employed by Harland Ltd at 31 October 2010. *1+
(d) Explain the difference between preference shares and cumulative preference shares. *2+
(e) State one difference between ordinary shares and debentures. *2+
(f) Explain two benefits of international accounting standards. *2+

Paulton Ltd is a company with the following capital structure:
Authorised Issued
share capital ($) share capital ($)
Ordinary shares of $1 100 000 50 000
5% Preference shares of $1 100 000 80 000
There were no changes to the number of shares in issue during the year.
The retained earnings brought forward on 1 May 2010 was $8 000.
During the year ended 30 April 2011, the company made a profit of $40 000.
On 30 April 2011 it was agreed to:
1 Transfer $20 000 to the general reserve
2 Pay the preference share dividend
3 Pay a final dividend of $0.05 per share on the ordinary shares.
An interim dividend of $0.02 per share had been paid to the ordinary shareholders on 31 December 2010.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the profit and loss appropriation account for the year ended 30 April 2011. *8+
(b) Distinguish between authorised share capital and paid up share capital. *2+
(c) Explain the term reserve. *2+
(d) Suggest one reason why a limited company might not distribute all of the profit for the year as
dividend. *2+

Dang Ltd had the following balances in its books after the calculation of the profit for the year ended 31
March 2012:
$
Profit for the year (before debenture interest) 60 000
Issued and called up share capital:
100 000 6% $0.50 Preference shares 50 000
100 000 $1 Ordinary shares 100 000
7% Debentures 31 December 2020 200 000
Retained profit 1 April 2011 21 000
The directors decided to:
1 transfer $25 000 to the general reserve
2 pay the preference share dividend
3 pay an ordinary share dividend of $0.10 per share.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the appropriation account for Dang Ltd for the year ended 31 March 2012. *8+
(b) Prepare balance sheet extract for the capital and reserves of Dang Ltd at 31 March 2012. *6+
(c) State one difference between ordinary shares and preference shares. *2+
(d) State one difference between preference shares and debentures. *2+
(e) State one reason why International Accounting Standards are used. *2+

Wing Limited had the following balances in its books after the calculation of the profit for the year ended
30 September 2014.
$
Profit from operations (before debenture interest) 78 000
50 000 8% $1 Preference shares 50 000
6% Debentures (31 December 2025) 100 000
Interim dividend paid 31 March 2014:
Preference 2 000
Ordinary 8 000
Retained profit 1 October 2013 35 000
On 30 September 2014, the directors decided to:
1 increase the general reserve to $80 000
2 pay the remaining preference dividend
3
pay a final ordinary share dividend of $0.25 per share.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the appropriation account for Wing Limited for the year ended 30 September 2014. [10]
(b) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position for the capital and reserves of Wing
Limited at 30 September 2014. [6]
(c) State two differences between ordinary shares and debentures. [2]
(d) State one reason for maintaining a general reserve. [1]
(e) State one reason why International Accounting Standards are important when preparing the
financial statements of a limited company. [1]

Warle Limited provided the following information after the calculation of the profit for the year ended 30
April 2015.
$
Profit for the year ended 30 April 2015 86 000
Authorised share capital:
Called up share capital:
Interim dividend paid 3 000
Retained profits 1 May 2014 14 000
The directors have:
1 transferred $50 000 to the general reserve
2 paid a final ordinary shares dividend of $0.15 per share.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 April 2015. [6]
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position extract for the equity and reserves of Warle Limited
at 30 April 2015. [5]
(c) State two differences between preference shares and debentures. [4]
(d) State two possible reasons why the directors of Warle Limited have transferred $50 000 to the
general reserve. [2]
(e) State two reasons why large companies prepare their published financial statements in
accordance with International Accounting Standards (IAS). [2]

Cam Limited provided the following information.
At 1 October 2015 $
Issued share capital $1 Ordinary shares 70 000
Debentures (Repayable 2025) 50 000
Interim dividend paid on ordinary shares 7 000
1 On 1 November 2015 an additional 30 000 ordinary shares of $1 each were issued.
2 On 30 September 2016 the directors:
transferred $80 000 to the general reserve,
paid a final ordinary dividend of $0.20 per share on all issued shares.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 September 2016.
Share Capital General Retained Total

($) Reserve ($) Profits ($) ($)
Balance at 1 October 2015 70 000 40 000 92 000 202 000
Share issue
Profit for the year
Transfer to general reserve
Dividend paid (interim)
Dividend paid (final)
Balance at 30 September 2016
[8]
(b) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position showing the equity, reserves and
non-current liabilities of Cam Limited at 30 September 2016. [6]
(c) Suggest two possible reasons why the directors of Cam Limited transferred $80 000 to the
(d) State two differences between ordinary shares and debentures. [4]
(a) Similarities
 Preference shares holders are paid dividends at a fixed rate whereas debenture holders are
paid interest at a fixed rate.
 Both do not have the right to vote at companies’ meetings.
 Both interest and preference dividends are paid before ordinary dividends
 Both are paid before Ordinary Shareholders upon liquidation
Differences
 Preference shareholders (unless redeemable) are owners, debenture holders are lenders or
trade payables of the company.
 Debenture holders are paid interest irrespective of the profit/loss made by the business.
Whereas payment of preference dividend is dependent on making of profit.
 Preference shareholders receive dividend, debenture holders receive interest
 Debenture interest must be paid before preference share dividend
(b) Loxton Ltd

Appropriation account
For the year ended 31 August 2009
$ $ $
Net profit after interest *$60 000 – ($80 000 × 5%)+ 56 000
Preference dividend
- interim (100 000 shares × $0.05) 5 000
- final *($100 000 × 10%) – $5 000+ 5 000 10 000
Ordinary dividend
- interim (50 000 shares × $0.10) 5 000
- final (50 000 shares × $0.20) 10 000 15 000
Transfer to General Reserve 20 000 45 000
Retained profit for the year 11 000
Last year retained profit b/f 25 000
Unappropriated profit c/f 36 000
(c) A general reserve is a form of profit retained for a non-specific purpose or to help the business to
strengthen its financial position. It may also be used to cover future shareholders dividend and
other business needs. It also helps in conserving cash and working capital.
(d) Calculation of Total Income for Elodie

Ordinary Dividends $
- interim dividend (1 500 shares × $0.10) 150
- final dividend (1 500 shares × $0.20) 300
Debenture interest ($2 000 × 5%) 100
Total income for Elodie 550

(a) Authorised share capital is the amount a company may issue whereas called-up share capital is
issued
(b)  Preference shares receive a fixed dividend: ordinary share dividends can vary.
 Preference share dividend is allocated out of profit before ordinary share dividend.
 Preference shareholders do not usually have a vote but ordinary shareholders do.
 Preference shareholders have priority rights in liquidation before ordinary shareholders.
(c) A general reserve separates retained profits which shareholders might expect to be distributed
from those which are likely to be kept long term in the company.
OR
By transferring funds to a general reserve the company indicates retained profits are being
reinvested long term.
(d)  Bother partnerships and companies may have fixed capital

 Partners also have current accounts within the capital structure
 The capital owned by each partner is shown on a partnership balance sheet but company
capital is not divided between each shareholder
 Retained profits and reserves are included in the capital and reserves of a company but not a
partnership
 Different types of ownership are shown in the capital structure of a company but not a
partnership

SGC Ltd
Income statement for the year ended 30 April 2010
$ $ $
Cost of Sales
Purchases 178 000
Less Purchase returns (9 000)
Add Carriage inwards 16 500 185 500
234 000
Expenses
Office expenses ($19 750 – $450) 19 300
Office salaries ($59 300 + $1 800) 61 100
Depreciation – Computer equipment *$80000– $28000)×25%)+ 13 000
Office equipment ($40 000 × 20%) 8 000
Other operating (Sundry) expenses 9 800
Advertising and marketing 24 000
Finance costs (debenture interest) ($50 000 × 12%) 6 000
Increase in provision for doubtful debts *($42 000×5%)–$1500+ 600 141 800
Less Appropriations: $ $
Transfer to the General Reserve 20 000
8% Preference dividend ($200 000 × 8%) 16 000
Ordinary dividend (100 000 shares @ $0.10) 10 000 46 000
Retained profit brought forward 1 300
Retained profit carried forward 6 500
SGC Ltd
Balance Sheet of at 30 April 2010
Non-current (fixed) assets Cost ($) Depr’n ($) NBV ($)
Property (Land and buildings) 250 000 250 000
Office fixtures and fittings ($15 000 + $8 000) 40 000 23 000 17 000
370 000 64 000 306 000
Current assets
Inventory 57 000
Other receivables (Prepaid office expenses) 450
Cash (bank) 3 450 ______
100 800 306 000
Current Liabilities
Other payables: (accrued office salaries) 1 800
Debenture interest *($50 000 × 12%) – $3 000+ 3 000 (40 300) 60 500
366 500
Non-current liabilities: 12% Debentures (50 000)
316 500
Capital and Reserves
Share capital (authorised and issued share capital)
100 000 $0.50 Ordinary shares 50 000
200 000 $1.00 8% preference shares 200 000
General reserve ($40 000 + $20 000) 60 000
Unappropriated profit and loss 1 May 2009 6 500 316 500
QUESTION 4 NOVEMBER 2010 P22 Q3 (a to f)
(a) Harland Ltd
Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 October 2010
$ $ $
Less Transfer to general reserve 25 000
Preference Dividends – paid ($200 000  2.5%) 5 000
Proposed *($200 000  4%) – $5 000+ 3 000 8 000
Ordinary dividends proposed (400 000 shares @ 0.05) 20 000 53 000
Add Retained profit brought forward 75 000
(b) Harland Ltd

Extract from Balance Sheet at 31 October 2010
Authorised Share Capital $ $
4% Cumulative preference shares of $1 each 250 000
Ordinary shares of $1 each 500 000 750 000
Issued Share Capital
4% Cumulative preference shares of $1 each 200 000
Ordinary shares of $1 each 400 000 600 000
Reserves
General reserve ($110 000 + $25 000) 135 000
Retained profits as per “a” part 87 000 222 000
Shareholders’ funds 822 000
(c) $
Share Capital and Reserves 822 000
6% Debentures 100 000
Capital employed 922 000
(d) If profits are not sufficient to pay full amount of dividends on preference shares in a particular year
then the amount of unpaid dividend is not carried forward to be paid in the subsequent years.
Cumulative preference shareholders have the right to receive any arrears of dividends in a
subsequent year before any dividend is paid to ordinary shareholders.
(e) Ordinary shares Debentures

(i) Shareholders are the owners of the business Debenture holders make a non-current loan of
capital to the business
(ii) Receive dividend Receive interest
(iii) Dividend is not guaranteed Interest on the loan must be paid
(iv) Dividend is an appropriation of profit made by Interest recorded in income statement as an
the directors expense
(f)  improve comparability between financial statements

 fewer rules make information more reliable
 practice of common set of rules throughout the world
 relevant to users’ needs

(a) Paulton Ltd
$ $ $
Retained profits of last year 8 000 48 000
Appropriations
Transfer to General Reserves 20 000
Preference Dividend ($80 000  5%) 4 000
Ordinary Dividend – Interim (50 000 shares @$0.02) 1 000
Final (50 000 shares @$0.05) 2 500 3 500 (27 500)
(b) Authorised share capital is the amount of share capital which a company is permitted or allowed
to issue. Paid-up share capital is that part of issued and authorised capital which has been paid by
the shareholders to the company upon the call of the company directors.
(c) Reserves are retained profits and are created to strengthen the financial position of the business
or to cover possible losses that have not yet been specifically identified.
(d) Companies usually retain part of their profits as reserves each year and payout only a portion of
the profits as dividends. These reserves are created to strengthen the financial position of the
company and can always be used to enable a dividend to be paid in a year when the company
makes little or no profit.
(e) 1 This is due to money measurement concept which states that financial accounting is
concerned only with the items which can be quantified and expressed in monetary
terms. That’s why the inclusion of the increased skill of the workforce will be normally
ignored in the financial statements, even though it might be of great worth to the
business of Paulton Ltd.
2 This is due to the consistency concept which states that a business should be consistent
in the way in which it applies the internal accounting policies. Transactions and valuation
methods are treated the same way from year to year, or period to period so when the
method for charging depreciation is changed from diminishing balance to straight line
then it must be explained that why the method is changed, and the effect it has had on
profits.

(a) Dang Ltd
Appropriation Account for the year ended 31 March 2012
$ $
Profit for the year *$60 000 – ($200 000 × 7%)+ 46 000
Less Transfer to the general reserve 25 000
Preference dividends paid ($50 000 × 6%) 3 000
Ordinary dividends paid (100 000 shares @ $0.10 each) 10 000 38 000
Add retained profit b/f at 1 April 2011 21 000
Retained profit c/f 29 000
(b) Balance Sheet (extract) at 31 March 2012

Issued Share capital $ $
100 000 6% $0.50 Preference shares 50 000
100 000 $1 Ordinary shares 100 000 150 000
Reserves
General reserve ($60 000 + $25 000) 85 000
Retained profit (‘a’ part) 29 000 114 000
Shareholders’ equity 264 000
(c) (i) Preference shareholders are paid dividends at a fixed rate whereas there is no fixed
rate to pay dividend to the ordinary shareholders.
(ii) Preference shareholders have no voting rights, ordinary shareholders do have voting
rights.
(iii) Preference receive dividend first, ordinary receive dividend last.

(iv) Preference receive payout first on winding up, ordinary receive payment last.
(e)  Preference holders are shareholders, debenture holders are long term loan creditors
 Debenture holders paid interest, preference holders receive dividend
 Debenture interest is an expense, preference dividend is an appropriation of profit.
 Debenture holders receive fixed amount of interest, preference may not receive dividend.
 Debenture holders are paid interest before payment of preference dividend.
(f)  improve comparability between financial statements

 fewer rules make information more reliable
 practice of common set of rules throughout the world
 relevant to users’ needs

(a) Wing Limited
Appropriation Account for the year ended 30 September 2014
$ $ $
Profit for the year [$78 000 – ($100 000 × 6%)] 72 000
Appropriations
Transfer to the general reserve ($80 000  $55 000) 25 000
Interim dividends: Preference 2 000
Ordinary 8 000 10 000
Final dividends: Preference [($50 000 × 8%) – $2 000] 2 000
Ordinary (80 000 shares @ $0.25 per share) 20 000 22 000 57 000
Add Retained profit brought forward from 2011 35 000
(b) Statement of Financial Position at 30 September 2014

Issued share capital: $ $
80 000 $1 Ordinary shares 80 000 130 000
Reserves
Retained profit 50 000 130 000
Shareholders’ equity 260 000
(c)
Ordinary shares Debentures:
1 Owners Creditors (lenders)
2 receive dividend receive interest
3 Dividends at varying rate Interest at fixed rate
4 No repayment date Repayment date
(d) To strengthen the financial position of the business
To provide for unforeseen future expenses of the business
(e) Use of international accounting standards improve

 the ability to compare financial statements of different companies in different countries
on fair basis
 reliability of financial statements produced in different countries
 understanding of financial statements produced in different countries

(a) Warle Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 April 2015
Share General Retained Total
Capital Reserve Profits
$ $ $ $
Balance at 1 May 2014 100 000 20 000 14 000 134 000
Profit for the year 86 000 86 000
Transfer to general reserve 50 000 (50 000) 0
Dividend paid (interim) (3 000) (3 000)
Dividend paid (final) _______ ______ (15 000) (15 000)
Balance at 30 April 2015 100 000 70 000 32 000 202 000
(b) Statement of Financial Position extract at 30 April 2015
Share capital $ $
Ordinary shares of $1 each 100 000
Reserves
Retained profits 32 000 102 000
Shareholders’ funds 202 000
(c) Differences between Preference shares and Debentures
Preference shares Debentures
Paid dividend Paid interest
Part of company’s equity Loans to the company (shown as a liability)
Though they may be redeemable but usually have no Always have predetermined redeemable date
fixed repayment date
Dividend is only paid when profits are available Interest must be paid even if losses are incurred
unless shares are cumulative
(d) General reserves are created to conserve working capital or to retain for major expenditure such
as purchasing non-current assets. Profits may be ‘ploughed back’ for business to grow.
(e) Consistency: Accounts prepared in different countries in a consistent way.
Reliability: Accounting information is more reliable despite prepared in different countries
Uniformity: Same standard framework for preparing accounts in different countries
Comparability: Accounts prepared in different countries and for different industries can be
compared with relative ease.

(a) Cam Limited
Statement of Changes in Equity for the year ended 30 September 2016
Share General Retained Total

Capital ($) Reserve ($) Profits ($) ($)
Interim ordinary dividend paid (7 000) (7 000)
Issue of ordinary shares 30 000 30 000
Transfer to general reserve 80 000 (80 000) -
Dividend paid (final) (100 000 shares @ $0.20) ______ ______ (20 000) (20 000)
Balance at 30 September 2016 100 000 120 000 60 000 280 000
(b) Extract from the Statement of Financial Position extract at 30 September 2016
Equity and Reserves $ $
Ordinary shares of $1 each 100 000
Reserves
Retained profit 60 000 180 000
Total equity and shares 280 000
330 000
(c) General reserves are created to strengthen the financial position of the business or profits may
be retained to use for future uses such as future dividend payments etc.
(d) Ordinary shares Debentures

(i) Ordinary shareholders are owners of the Debenture holders are lenders of the
business business
(ii) Payment of dividend is dependent on profits
Guaranteed interest
and directors’ policy
(iii) There is no fixed rate of dividend interest is paid at a fixed rate
(iv) This is permanent capital for the business as Borrowed for a specific period and have to
there is no repayment date be paid back at a future date
Chapter 17 246 Ratio Analysis
CHAPTER 17 RATIO ANALYSIS

QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q4 (d & e)
The information below relates to the partnership of Bell and Hayward. Bell and Hayward provided the
following information.
Year ended 30 April 2009
$
Purchases 238 000
Sales 300 000
REQUIRED
(d) (i) Calculate the rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 30 April 2009. Show your
workings. *4+
(ii) Calculate the gross profit to sales percentage. Show your workings. *4+
The figures for the previous year ended 30 April 2008 were as follows:
Rate of inventory turnover 9 times
Gross profit to sales percentage 30 %
REQUIRED
(e) Suggest two possible reasons for the changes in the figures between 30 April 2008 and 30 April
2009. *4+

Jamal Mohsin has been provided with some information about a general trading business, Easisell, which
buys and sells goods on credit. The following information relates to the year ended 30 September 2009.
$
Sales 120 000
Purchases 91 000
Inventory at 30 September 2009 28 000
Expenses 15 000
Capital 150 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate, to two decimal places, the following ratios. Show your workings.
(i) Gross profit to sales percentage *3+
(ii) Rate of inventory turnover *3+
(iii) Net profit to capital percentage *3+
(iv) Working capital ratio (current ratio) *3+
Jamal Mohsin obtained the following ratios for a similar business:

1 Gross profit to sales percentage 40 %

2 Rate of inventory turnover 6 times
3 Net profit to capital percentage 12 %
4 Working capital ratio (current ratio) 1.8 : 1
REQUIRED
(b) Using the information above and your answer to (a) compare and comment upon the
performance of Easisell under the following headings.
(i) Controlling inventory *4+
(ii) Net profit to capital percentage *4+
(iii) Ability to pay trade payables *4+
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (a & b)

The following information was extracted from the books of Jack Lightbourne for the year ended 31 July
2009.
$
Sales 174 600
Purchases 89 150
Drawings 6 984
Current assets 24 600
Current liabilities 16 400
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate, to one decimal place, the following ratios. Show your workings in the box provided.
Workings
(i) Gross profit/sales %
(ii) Net profit/sales %
(iii) Rate of inventory turnover
(iv) Current (working capital)ratio
(v) Quick ratio (acid test) *10+
Jack Lightbourne’s main competitor generates gross profit/sales of 100% and net profit/sales of 15%.
REQUIRED
(b) Suggest how Jack could improve his ratios for gross profit/sales and net profit/sales to a
competitive level. *3+

Zaynah is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following balances were extracted from her
books on 30 April 2010
$
Expenses 65 000

Loans repayable within 12 months (Bank overdraft) 5 000
Closing capital 100 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate, to one decimal place, the following ratios for the year ended 30 April 2010.
Clearly show all workings.
(i) Gross profit to revenue (sales) percentage *3+
(ii) Working capital ratio (current ratio) *3+
(iii) Quick ratio (acid test) *4+
(iv) Profit for the year to capital percentage *4+
(b) Comment on the following ratios at 30 April 2010:
(i) Quick ratio (acid test) *2+
(ii) Profit for the year to capital percentage. *2+
In the previous year, ended 30 April 2009, the business of Zaynah achieved the following ratios:
Gross profit to revenue (sales) percentage 50%

Working capital ratio (current ratio) 1.7:1
REQUIRED
(c) Suggest one possible reason for the change over the year ended 30 April 2010 in the:
(i) gross profit to sales percentage; *2+
(ii) working capital ratio (current ratio). *2+

Paula Urn supplied the following information relating to her financial year ended 30 April 2010.
$
Gross profit to sales 40%
Profit for the year to sales 8%
REQUIRED
Calculate the following for the year ended 30 April 2010. Show all your workings.
(a) Cost of sales *3+
(b) Raw materials (purchases) *4+
(c) Expenses *3+
(d) Rate of inventory (rate of inventory) turnover *3+

Windy Ltd is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following balances were taken from the
books of Windy Ltd.
Year ended Year ended

30 September 2009 30 September 2010
Non-current assets 80 000 200 000
Inventory 55 000 60 000
Amount due in more than one year(long-term loan) - 50 000
Bank 15 000 -
Bank overdraft - 45 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following. Give your answers to two decimal places. Show your workings.
(i) Current ratio at 30 September 2009 and at 30 September 2010 *4+
(ii) Quick (acid test) ratio at 30 September 2009 and at 30 September 2010 *4+
(b) Suggest one reason for the change in liquidity between 30 September 2009 and 30 September
2010. *2+
(c) Suggest four actions which Windy Ltd might take to improve its bank balance. *8+

George is a trader who buys and sells goods on credit. He provided the following information:
For the year ended 30 April 2010 ($) 2011 ($)
Sales 220 000 180 000
Gross profit 110 000 72 000
Expenses 66 000 63 000
At 30 April 2010 ($) 2011 ($)
Inventory 46 000 35 000
Capital 160 000 180 000
Bank 20 000 (overdraft) 15 000
Ratios/percentages 2010 2011

Percentage profit for the year/sales ? 5%
Percentage profit for the year/capital ? 5%
Working capital ratio (current ratio) 1.2:1 ?
Quick ratio (acid test) 0.6:1 ?
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following to one decimal place.
(i) Percentage profit for the year/sales for the year ended 30 April 2010 *3+
(ii) Percentage profit for the year/capital for the year ended 30 April 2010 *3+
(iii) Working capital ratio (current ratio) on 30 April 2011 *3+
(iv) Quick ratio (acid test) on 30 April 2011 *3+
(b) Suggest two possible reasons for the change in the profit for the year between the two years. *4+
(c) Suggest two possible reasons for the change in bank balance in the year ended 30 April 2011. *4+

Mary is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following information was available at 30 April
2011.
$
Capital 30 April 2011 75 000
Operating expenses for the year 23 500
Purchases for the year 72 000
Mark-up 50%
REQUIRED
(i) Revenue (sales) *3+
(ii) Rate of inventory turnover (correct to one decimal place) *3+
(iii) Profit for the year *2+
(iv) Percentage profit for the year /revenue (correct to one decimal place) *3+
(v) Percentage profit for the year / capital (correct to one decimal place). *3+
(b) Explain why businesses with a high rate of inventory turnover often have a low percentage net
profit to revenue. *2+
(c) Mary is considering ways in which she might increase her rate of inventory turnover.
For each of the options below, place a (✓) to indicate whether the option would increase or decrease the
rate of inventory turnover.
Increase rate of Decrease rate of
inventory turnover inventory turnover
(i) Hold a ‘Sale’ and reduce prices by 20%.
(ii) Increase the inventory by $20 000.
(iii) Raise selling prices by10%. *3+

The following information relates to the business of Samara, a wholesaler.
$
Revenue (sales) for year ended 30 September 2011 200 000
At 30 September 2011
Inventory 36 000
Mark up 25%
Profit for the year / sales 6%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate for the year ended 30 September 2011:
(i) purchases *3+

(ii) expenses *3+
(b) Calculate at the 30 September 2011:
(i) working capital ratio (current ratio), correct to one decimal place *3+
(ii) quick ratio (acid test), correct to one decimal place. *3+
(c) Explain why the quick ratio (acid test) is a more accurate measure of the liquidity of a business
than the working capital ratio (current ratio). *3+
(d) State three actions that Samara could take to improve his bank balance. *3+

The following information was extracted from the books of Anika.
$
Revenue (sales) for the year ended 30 September 2011 80 000
Purchases for the year ended 30 September 2011 58 000
Bank overdraft at 30 September 2011 2 000
Trade payables at 30 September 2011 14 000
Trade receivables at 30 September 2011 16 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following:
(i) cost of sales *3+
(ii) rate of inventory turnover . *3+
(b) (i) Calculate the gross profit/sales percentage . *3+
(ii) Anika's gross profit/sales percentage for the year ended 30 September 2010 was 40%.
Suggest two possible reasons for the change in the gross profit/sales percentage
between 30 September 2010 and 30 September 2011. *2+
(c) Calculate the working capital (current) ratio correct to one decimal place. *3+

Ashok provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2012:
$
Inventory 31 March 2012 26 500
Gross profit/sales 20%
Profit for the year/sales 8%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate for the year ended 31 March 2012:
(i) Cost of sales *3+
(ii) Purchases *3+
(iii) Expenses *3+
(b) Calculate to two decimal places the rate of inventory turnover for the year ended 31 March 2012. *3+
(c) Suggest two ways in which Ashok might increase his rate of inventory turnover. *2+
Ashok is investigating a possible error in the valuation of the closing inventory on 31 March 2012. The
revised valuation may be $30 000.
(d) Calculate the profit for the year if the closing inventory is valued at $30 000. *3+
(e) State three disadvantages of holding too much inventory. *3+

Jones is a trader, buying and selling goods on credit. The following balances were available on 30 April
2012.
$
Capital 350 000
Revenue 200 000
Expenses 40 000
Profit for the year/sales 15%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the cost of sales. Show your workings. *5+
(b) Calculate, to two decimal places, the following ratios:
(i) Percentage profit for the year/capital *3+
(ii) Working capital ratio (current ratio) *3+
(iii) Quick ratio (acid test) *3+
Jones has been considering how he might improve his working capital ratio (current ratio).
The following proposals have been made.
1 Obtain a long term loan from the bank, $5 000.
2 Pay half the trade payables in exchange for a cash discount of 4%.
3 Sell non-current assets with a net book value of $12 000 for $8 000.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the following table showing the effect on the current assets, current liabilities and the
working capital ratio (current ratio). The first item has been completed as an example.
Current assets Current liabilities Working capital ratio
1 +$5 000 No effect Increase
2
3
*6+
The trial balance of Maya, after the calculation of the gross profit, was as follows:
Maya
Trial Balance at 30 September 2012
Dr ($) Cr ($)
Non-current assets (cost) 400 000
Non-current assets (provision for depreciation) 82 000

Cash 5 000
Bank loan (repayable 31 October 2012) 35 000
Capital ______ 320 000
642 000 642 000
Additional information for the year ended 30 September 2012:
1 Mark-up on cost of sales, 25%.
2 Depreciation for the year on non-current assets, $15 000.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 30 September 2012:
(i) Revenue (sales) *3+
(ii) Net profit/sales percentage *3+
(iii) Net profit/capital percentage *3+
(iv) Quick ratio (acid test) *3+
(b) Explain to Maya why the quick ratio (acid test) is a better measure of liquidity than the working
capital ratio (current ratio). *2+
(c) Comment upon the adequacy of Maya’s cash for the next three months. Give one reason for your
comment. *3+
(d) Suggest three ways in which Maya might increase the cash in the business. *3+

Chow is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following information was available:
$
Expenses 60 000
Mark up 25%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 30 September 2012.
(i) Profit for the year *3+
(ii) Rate of turnover of inventory *3+
(iii) Gross profit to sales percentage *3+
(iv) Net profit to sales percentage *3+
(v) Working capital ratio (current ratio) *3+
(b) Chow’s rate of turnover of inventory last year was 4 times. Suggest two possible reasons for any
change between the years. *2+
(c) Comment upon Chow’s working capital ratio (current ratio) at 30 September 2012. *2+
(d) Suggest one way in which Chow could improve his liquidity. *1+
QUESTION 15 MAY 2013 P21 Q2 (c to e)

Tay supplied the following information for year ended 30 April:
1 2013 $
Revenue 60 000
2 2012
Revenue 58 000
Gross profit to sales ratio 33.3%
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate Tay’s gross profit to sales ratio for the year ended 30 April 2013. *2+
(d) Compare the gross profit to sales ratio in 2012 with your answer in (c) and suggest three possible
causes for any changes that may have taken place. *6+
(e) Make two suggestions on how Tay may use the gross profit to sales ratio. *4+

The following balances were extracted from the books of Alex Penn on 31 March 2013.
$
Equipment (net book value) 40 000
Delivery vans (net book value) 22 000
Inventory 10 670
6% Bank loan (repayable 23 May 2016) 15 000
Capital 31 March 2013 70 000
Drawings 10 000
During the year Penn had purchased non-current assets to the value of $20 000.
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the working capital. *2+
(b) Calculate the following to two decimal places:
(i) Working capital ratio (current ratio) *2+
(ii) Quick ratio (acid test ratio) *2+
For the year ended 31 March 2012 Penn’s working capital ratio (current ratio) was 3:1 and his quick ratio
(acid test ratio) was 1:1.
(c) Suggest three reasons why Penn’s liquidity position may have changed. *6+
(d) Suggest two courses of action Penn could take to improve his liquidity. *6+

Baljit provided the following information for the year ended 30 April 2013.
$
Cost of goods sold 90 000
Capital employed 1 May 2012 101 250
Mark up 25%
REQUIRED
(i) Sales *2+
(ii) Purchases *2+
(iii) Profit for the year *2+
(b) Calculate the following ratios. Comparative figures for the previous year are shown in the last
column.
Workings 30 April 2013 30 April 2012
Gross profit margin (gross profit to sales) 25%
Net profit margin (net profit to sales) 11%
8 times /
Rate of inventory turnover
45.6 days
Return on capital employed (ROCE) 12%
*8+
(c) Give two comments on the performance of Baljit’s business over the two years. *6+
(d) Suggest three actions Baljit may take to improve her rate of inventory turnover. *6+
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2013 P22 Q 4

Shaw’s accounting year ends on 30 April. The following information is supplied for 2011, 2012 and 2013.
2011 ($) 2012 ($) 2013 ($)

Revenue (Sales) 150 000 225 000 300 000
Gross profit 37 500 56 250 75 000
Profit for year (Net profit) 18 750 23 400 27 990
Capital 150 000 195 000 240 000
Gross profit margin 25% 25% ?
Net profit margin 12.50% 10.40% ?
Percentage of expenses to sales 12.50% 14.60% 15.67%
Return on capital employed 12.5% 12% ?
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate, to two decimal places, the following ratios at 30 April 2013:
Gross profit margin
Net profit margin
Return on capital employed [3]
(b) Using the ratios calculated in (a) comment on the profitability over the three years. [8]

Wenger’s trial balance on 30 April 2013 was as follows:
Trial Balance as at 30 April 2013
Account Debit Credit
$ $
Bank 1 750
Capital 113 500
Cash 250
Inventory 20 000
Long-term loan 30 000
Other payables 6 860
Trade receivables 16 600 ______
162 500 162 500
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following correct to two decimal places, at 30 April 2013:
Working capital (current) ratio;
Quick (acid test) ratio. *3+
Wenger’s working capital (current) ratio and quick (acid test) ratio at 30 April 2012 were 4:1 and 2:1
respectively.
REQUIRED
(b) (i) Comment on the change in the ratios between 2012 and 2013. *2+
(ii) State three possible causes for any changes that have taken place. *6+
(c) Advise Wenger on two measures he may take to improve his working capital. *4+

Demetris is a trader, buying and selling goods on credit. The following information was available on 31
March 2014.
$
Revenue 300 000
Purchases 170 000
Capital 100 000
Bank 5 000 Dr
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the:
(i) Cost of goods sold. [2]
(ii) Inventory at 1 April 2013. [3]
(b) Suggest two possible effects of holding too much inventory. [2]
(c) Calculate, to two decimal places, the:

(i) Working capital ratio (current ratio) [3]
(ii) Quick ratio (acid test ratio) [3]
(d) Comment upon the sufficiency of the working capital ratio (current ratio). [2]
During the year ended 31 March 2014, Demetris took the following actions.
1 Repaid a $40 000 long term bank loan.
2 Purchased $20 000 of non-current assets on credit.
3 Sold inventory for $20 000 on credit (cost $15 000).
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the following table showing the effect on the current assets, current liabilities and the
working capital ratio (current ratio) for each of the actions 1 to 3 above. The first item has been
Current Working capital ratio

Current assets
liabilities (current ratio)
Repaid a $40 000 long
1 Decreased $40 000 No effect Decreased
term bank loan.
Purchased $20 000 of
2 non-current assets on
credit.
Sold inventory for $20 000
3
on credit (cost $15 000).
[6]
Najla provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2014.
$
Revenue 168 000
Purchases 122 000
Capital 100 000
Bank 1 500 Dr
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the:
Cost of goods sold
Gross profit/sales percentage
Working capital ratio (current ratio) [10]
In the previous year, ended 31 March 2013, Najla calculated the following ratios:
Gross profit /sales percentage 20%
REQUIRED
(b) Comment upon the performance of Najla under the following headings, using the information
above and your answer in (a).
Controlling inventory
Ability to pay trade payables [4]
(c) Suggest two possible reasons for the change in gross profit/sales percentage. [2]
Najla is considering the following proposals to improve his working capital.
1 Sell obsolete inventory costing $1 000 for cash $500.
2 Sell non-current assets for $3 000 cash.
3 Allow trade receivables to pay debts of $4 000 less 5% cash discount.
4 Bring $5 000 additional capital into the business: Motor vehicle $3 000 and cash $2 000.
REQUIRED
(d) Complete the following table showing the changes to working capital. The first proposal has been
Working capital Amount of change

Proposals
increase decrease ($)
1 ✔ $500
2
3
4
[6]

Lai Yee provided the following information.
$
Profit from operations (before bank loan interest) 36 000
Capital 200 000
Bank 60 000 Dr
Revenue 600 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate to one decimal place:
Ratio Workings Answer
Percentage gross profit/sales
Percentage net profit/sales
Return on capital employed (ROCE)
Working capital ratio (Current ratio)
[12]
(b) Comment upon the sufficiency of the working capital ratio (current ratio). [2]
Lai Yee is considering ways in which she might improve her return on capital employed (ROCE).
She is considering the following proposals.
1 Introduce additional capital of $10 000.
2 Repay half of the 8% bank loan.
3 Sell $20 000 non-current assets, saving $3 000 in depreciation.
4 Convert $25 000 of the 8% bank loan into a bank overdraft at 12% interest per annum.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the following table, by placing a tick (√) in the appropriate box, to show the effect on
the profit for the year and the capital employed.
Profit for the year Capital employed

Proposals
increase decrease no effect increase decrease no effect
1
2
3
4
[6]
Lai Yee is also considering improving her profit for the year by:
1 revaluing her business premises to the market value of $120 000 (cost $100 000)
2 removing the provision for doubtful debts.
REQUIRED
(d) Name which accounting concept would not be complied with if Lai Yee implemented her proposals. [2]

The following information relates to the business of Lili.
$
Revenue 200 000
Inventory 30 September 2014 24 500
Net profit/sales 7%
REQUIRED
Workings Answer
cost of sales
purchases
percentage gross profit to sales
expenses
profit for the year
*14+
Lili’s inventory of $24 500 needs to be adjusted for the following.

1 5 items costing $10 each had been omitted from the inventory.
2 10 items costing $25 each were damaged and could only be sold for $15 each.
3 4 items were included in the inventory at the list price of $300 each, having been marked up by
50%.
4 1 item costing $20 was recorded in error in the inventory as $200.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table showing the effect that each adjustment will have upon the
inventory valuation at 30 September 2014. The first item has been completed as an example.
Effect on inventory value Value

Adjustment
increase decrease $
1 √ 50
2
3
4
*6+
John provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2015.
$
Revenue 900 000
Expenses 105 000
Long term loan 150 000
Mark up 20%
REQUIRED
(i) Cost of goods sold [2]
(ii) Profit for the year [2]
(b) Calculate the following ratios.
Workings 31 March 2015 31 March 2014
Profit margin (profit for the year to revenue) 5%
Rate of inventory Turnover 7 times
[6]
(c) Give two comments on the performance of John’s business over the two years. [6]

Xever provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2015.
$
Capital 40 000
Bank loan (repayable 1 Jan 2020) 10 000

Mark up 20%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 31 March 2015.
(i) Revenue [2]
(ii) Purchases [2]
(iii) Expenses for the year [2]
(b) Calculate the following ratios, correct to two decimal places. The previous year’s ratios are
shown in the last column.

Gross profit margin (gross profit to
25.61%
revenue)
Return on capital employed (ROCE) 12.00%
Rate of turnover of inventory 2.82 times
Quick ratio (acid test ratio) 0.91:1
[8]
(c) Comment on the changes to Xever’s business over the two years under the following headings.
(i) Profitability [3]
(ii) Liquidity [3]

Galenia buys and sells goods on credit. The following information was available on 30 September 2015.
$
Bank 2 800 debit
Mark up 40%
REQUIRED
(i) Revenue [2]
(ii) Purchases [2]
(b) Calculate the following ratios to two decimal places. Comparative figures for the previous year
are shown in the last column.
30 September 30 September
Workings
2015 2014
Profit margin (profit for the year to revenue) 12.13%
Rate of inventory turnover 2.00 times
[8]
(c) Comment on the performance of Galenia’s business over the two years under the following
headings.
(i) Inventory turnover [3]
(ii) Ability to pay trade payables [3]

Danish provided the following information.
$
Revenue 380 000
Purchases 295 000
Gross profit margin 25%
At 31 July 2015
$
Inventory 65 000
Bank 13 000 debit
Expenses accrued 8 000
REQUIRED
Workings Answer
Inventory at 1 August 2014
Rate of inventory turnover (to two decimal places)
Expenses paid in the year ended 31 July 2015
Working capital ratio (current ratio)
Quick ratio (acid test ratio)
[12]
Danish is considering the following proposals to improve his working capital.
1 Sell excess non-current assets for $4 000
2 Sell old inventory costing $15 000, for $9 000 cash
3 Allow a trade receivable 5% cash discount for early payment of a debt of $10 000
4 Pay expenses accrued of $8 000
5 Bring additional capital into the business, motor vehicle $5 000 and cash $1 000
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table, to show the effect on the working capital of each proposal. The first one has
Working capital
Amount
Proposal (Increase, decrease,
$
no effect)
1 Sell excess non-current assets for $4 000 Increase 4 000
2 Sell old inventory costing $15 000, for $9000 cash
3 Allow a trade receivable 5% cash discount for early payment
of a debt of $10 000
5 Bring additional capital into the business, motor vehicle $5
000 and cash $1 000
[8]

Lache’s accounting year ends on 31 December. The following information is available.
2015($) 2014 ($)
Revenue 750 000 600 000
Expenses 200 000 175 000
Capital 250 000 250 000
Bank loan repayable 30 December 2014 ----- 120 000
Bank loan repayable 30 December 2020 80 000 -----
Inventory 60 000 260 000
Other receivables 1 500 2 500
Other payables 8 500 3 500
Bank 28 000 Debit 40 000 Credit
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following ratios for 2015. Comparative figures for 2014 are shown. Your answers
should be calculated to one decimal place.
Workings Answer 2014
Gross profit to revenue (Gross profit margin) 37.5%
Return on capital employed (ROCE) based on
20%
profit for the year
Current ratio (Working capital ratio) 2.9:1
*12+
(b) Using the ratios calculated in (a) and the information provided, comment on the:
(i) profitability over the two years *4+
(ii) liquidity over the two years. *4+

Ng provided the following information for the year ended 30 September 2016.
$
Bank 20 000 Credit

REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 30 September 2016. Comparative figures for the
previous year are shown.
Year ended 30 September 2016 Year ended 30

Workings Answer September 2015
Revenue $220 000
1.93:1
(to two decimal places)
1.12:1
[8]
(b) Comment on the liquidity position of Ng over the two years. [3]
On 31 October 2016 Ng had $15 000 in his business bank account. He is considering ways to further
improve his working capital.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the table showing the effect on the working capital of the following proposals.
Proposal Effect on
Current Current Working
assets liabilities capital
Sell $15 000 non-current assets for cash. + $15 000 No effect +$15 000
Introduce additional capital of $10 000, consisting of $5000 in
cash and $5000 non-current assets.
Obtain an additional bank loan for $30 000, repayable in equal
instalments over five years.
Offer trade receivables a cash discount of 10% for quick
payment. Credit customers owing $60 000 will accept this offer.
[9]
Zahin is a trader, buying and selling goods on credit. The following information is available on 31 August
2016.
$
Capital 60 000
Bank loan (repayable 2020) 20 000
Inventory 31 August 2016 31 000
Purchases 170 000
Percentage of gross profit to revenue (Gross profit margin) 25%

Percentage of profit for the year to revenue (Profit margin) 5%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 31 August 2016. Comparative figures for the previous
year are shown.
Year ended 31 August 2016 Year ended

Workings Answer 31 August 2015
Revenue for the year $200 000
Percentage mark-up 27%
Expenses for the year $36 000
21%
based on profit for the year
[10]
(b) Give three comments about the performance of Zahin’s business over the two years. [6]
QUESTION 1 MAY 2009 P2 Q4 (d & e)
Cost of Sales
(d) (i) Inventory turnover rate =
Average Inventory
Cost of Sales
=
(Opening Inventory:Closing Inventory)/2
$ 7 :$238 ;$ 5
= = 15 times
($ 7 :$ 5 )/2
Gross Profit
Gross profit rate = × 100
Sales revenue
$6
= × 100 = 20%
$3
(e) Gross profit ratio has reduced from 30% to20%. This may be due to price cuts for disposing off old
inventory or to increase sales volume. This can be evidenced by looking at increase in inventory
turnover rate from 9% to 15%. Sales prices may have been reduced to combat competition. There
may be increase in cost of sales without corresponding increase in sales prices as a result
inventory turnover rate was increased. Reduction in inventory levels or increased advertising
could also be reasons for this improvement in turnover rate.
$ 2 ;( 2 :9 ;28 )
(a) (i) Gross profit to sales percentage = × 100
2
= $45
×100
2
= 37.50%
= $ 2 :$9 ; $28
(ii) Rate of inventory turnover × 100
($ 2 : $28 )/2
= $75
× 100
$2
= 3.75 times
= $45 ;$ 5
(iii) Net profit to capital percentage × 100
$ 5
= $3
× 100
$ 5
= 20.00%
= $28 : $3
(iv) Working capital (current ratio)
$43 :$ 5
= $58
$58
= 1:1
(b) (i) Controlling inventory
Despite of low gross profit percentage Easisell has a worse turnover rate than its
competitor. This may be due to abnormal increase in inventory level over the year as
inventory has more than doubled in the year. The accumulation of inventories indicates
slow movements in inventory items or obsolescence may be due to rapid changes in
taste or fashion etc.
(ii) Net profit to capital percentage

Easisell’s return on capital is significantly better than its competitor. This means that a
greater net profit has been earned in relation to capital investment within the business.
Though Easisell has a lower gross profit to sales % than its competitor but its better net
profit percentage reveals that Easisell has a better and efficient control on its operating
expenses.
(iii) Ability to pay trade payables
Easisell has a worse working capital ratio than its competitor as it is slightly better
than half of the competitor. The low current ratio is mainly due to bank overdraft
which will make it difficult to pay the trade payables as and when due. Delayed or no
payments to trade payables may result in refusal by the trade payables to future supply
of goods.
QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (a & b)

(a) Jack Lightbourne
$ 74 6 – ($6 35 : $89 5 – $8 2 )
(i) Gross profit/sales × 100 50%
$ 74 6
$87 3 – $69 84
(ii) Net profit/sales × 100 10%
$ 74 6
$6 35 :$89 5 –$ 8 2
(iii) Rate of inventory turnover × 365 30.4 days
($6 35 :$8 2 )/2
$24 6
(iv) Working capital (current) ratio 1.5 : 1
$ 64
$24 6 ;$8 2
(v) Quick ratio (acid test) 1:1
$ 64
(b) Increase the sales price for his goods

Buy goods more cheaply from suppliers
Reduce expenses

Gross Profit
(a) (i) Gross profit to revenue (sales) percentage =  100
Net sales
$2 ;$ 3
=  100
$2
= 35.00%
Current Assets
(ii) Working capital ratio (current ratio) =
Current Liabilities
$6 :$ 6
=
$35 :$5
= 1.90:1
Current Assets;Inventory
(iii) Quick ratio (acid test) =
Current Liabilities
$ 6
=
$35 :$5
= 0.40:1
Profit for the year

(iv) Profit for the year to capital percentage =  100
Capital
$2 ;$ 3 ;$65
=  100
$
= 5.00%
(b) (i) Quick ratio is quite low at 0.4:1 especially for a business trading on credit. Increase in
inventory levels are resulting in high trade payables. Due to more purchases business is
facing shortage of cash to pay trade payables
(ii) Profit for the year to capital percentage of 5% is quite low as it makes business more
risky and less profitable.
(c) (i) Reduction in selling price
Increased in purchase price without corresponding increase in sales price
(ii) Higher inventory levels

Difficulty in collecting from trade receivables.

(a) Cost of Sales = Sales – Gross Profit
= $250 000 – $250 000 × 40%
= $250 000 – $100 000
= $150 000
(b) Purchases = Cost of sales + Closing Inventory – Opening Inventory

= $150 000 + 25 000 – $10 000
= $165 000
(c) Expenses = Gross Profit – Profit for the year

= $100 000 – $250 000 × 8%
= $80 000
Inventory Cost of Sales
(d) =
turnover rate (Opening Inventory:Closing Inventory)/2
= $ 5
($ :$25 )/2
= 8.57 times
Current Assets
(a) Current ratio =
Current Liabilities
$55 :$5 :$ 5
30 September 2009 =
$3
$ 2
= = 4.0:1
$3
$6 :$9
30 September 2010 =
$75 :$45
$ 5
= = 1.25:1
$ 2
O Level Accounting 269 Index
Liquid Assets
Liquid ratio =
Current Liabilities
$5 :$ 5
30 September 2009 =
$3
$65
= = 2.17:1
$3
$9
30 September 2010 = = 0.75:1
$75 :$45
(b) (i) Purchase of non-current (fixed) assets

(ii) Increased inventory levels
(iii) More credit sales
(c) (i) Issue of more shares

(ii) Borrow additional long-term loans
(iii) Dispose off non-current assets
(iv) Try to extend the credit period to trade payables
(v) Reduce inventory levels

Profit for the year
(a) (i) Profit for the year/sales percentage =  100
Net Sales Revenue
$44
=  100
$22
= 20.00%
Profit for the year
(ii) Profit for the year/capital percentage =  100
Capital
$ ;$66
=  100
$ 6
= 27.50%
Current Assets
(iii) Working capital (current )ratio =
Current Liabilities
$35 :$4 :$ 5
=
$6
= 1.50:1
(iv) Quick ratio (acid test) =
Current Liabilities
$4 :$ 5
=
$6
= 0.9:1
(b) Reduction in sales revenue by $40 000 resulted in decrease in Gross profit ratio from 50% to 40%.
On the other hand operating expenses have reduced, but not sufficient to increase profit for the
year ratio.
(c)  New cash capital investment by owner

 Improved collection from trade receivables
 Reduction in inventory perhaps due to low purchases
 Reduction in expenses.

(a) (i) Calculation of Revenue $
Purchases 72 000
Gross profit ($70 000  50%) 35 000
Revenue (sales) for the year 105 000
Cost of Sales
(ii) Inventory turnover rate =
Average Inventory
$7
=
($5 5 :$7 5 )/2
= 10.8 times
(iii) Profit for the year ($) = Gross Profit – Operating expenses
= $35 000 – $23 500
= $11 500
Profit for the year
(iv) Profit for the year /Revenue (%) =  100
Net sales
$ 5
=  100
$ 5
= 11%
Profit for the year
(v) Profit for the year / Capital (%) =  100
Capital
$ 5
=  100
$75
= 15.3%
(b) In order to increase sales volume and higher turnover rate the sellers usually reduce their profit
margins by charging a low selling price or through extensive advertising.
(c) Increase rate of Decrease rate of
inventory turnover inventory turnover
(i) Hold a ‘Sale’ and reduce prices by 20%. ✓
(ii) Increase the inventory by $20 000. ✓
(iii) Raise selling prices by 10%. ✓

(a) (i)
$
Purchases (balancing figure) 178 000
196 000
Closing Inventory (36 000)
25
Cost of Sales [$200 000 – ($200 000 × /125) 160 000
(ii) Gross profit ($160 000 × 25%) $40 000
Profit for the year ($200 000 × 6%) (12 000)
Expenses 28 000
Current Assets
(iii) Working capital ratio (current ratio) =
Current Liabilities
$36 :$24
=
$ :$4
= 1.20:1
(iv) Quick ratio (acid test) =
Current Liabilities
$24
=
$5
= 0.5:1
(c) The quick ratio (acid test) includes liquid assets only. It excludes inventory in the calculation
which is the least liquid current asset as it may take a long time to sell. Moreover if it is sold on
credit then credit customers may take even more time to pay cash.
.
(d)  More sales on cash basis.
 Offering cash discounts to trade receivables for receive early cash payments.
 Injection of more capital
 Reduction in drawings.
 Reduction in expenses.
 Disposal of surplus non-current assets.
 Borrowing new loan.

(a) (i) Cost of sales = Opening Inventory + Purchases – Closing Inventory
= $6 000 + 58 000 – $8 000
= $56 000
Cost of Sales
$56
=
($6 :$8 )/2
= 8 times
Gross Profit
(b) (i) Gross profit /Sales (%) =  100
Net sales
$8 ;$56
=  100
$8
= 30%
(ii) Gross profit /Sales (%) has reduced from 40% to30%. This may be due to reduction in
sales price to increase sales volume or for disposing off old inventory. There may be
increase in cost of sales without corresponding increase in sales prices as a result
inventory turnover rate was increased.
$8 :$ 6
(c) Working capital (current ratio) =
$2 :$ 4
$24
=
$ 6
= 1.50:1

(a) (i) Cost of Sales = Sales – Gross Profit
= $120 000– ($120 000  20%)
= $120 000 – $24 000
= $96 000
(ii) Purchases = Cost of sales + Closing inventory – Opening inventory
= $96 000 + $26 500 – $22 500
= $100 000
(iii) Expenses = Gross Profit – Profit for the year
= ($120 000  20%) – ($120 000  8%)
= $24 000 – $9 600
= $14 400
Cost of Sales
(b) Inventory turnover rate =
$96
=
($22 5 :$26 5 )/2
$96
=
$24 5
= 3.92 times
(c) Inventory turnover rate may be increased by
 reducing sale prices;
 advertising and other promotions;
 reducing the inventory to an optimum level provided it does not result in inventory outs;
 offering cash discounts to encourage sales.
(d) $
Existing profit 9 600
Add Increase in inventory ($30 000 – $26 500) 3 500
Revised profit 13 100
(e)  High carrying and storage costs
 Risk of obsolescence
 Increased interest expense paid on capital tied up in huge inventories
 More money tied up in stock
 Risk of theft
 Deterioration of inventory

(a) Statement to calculate the cost of sales
$
Revenue 200 000
Cost of sales ($200 000 − $70 000) 130 000
Gross profit ($30 000 + $40 000) 70 000
Expenses 40 000
Profit for the year ($200 000 × 15%) 30 000
$3
(b) (i) Profit for the year/capital (percentage)= × 100 = 8.57%
$35
$25 :$47
(ii) Working capital ratio (current ratio) = = 1.2:1
$5 :$
$47
(iii) Quick ratio (acid test) = = 0.78:1
$6
(c) Current assets Current liabilities Working capital (current) ratio
2 –$24 000 –$25 000 Increase

(a) (i) Revenue (Sales) = Cost of Sales + Gross Profit
= $ 2
( ) + $120 000
25%
= $600 000
Profit for the year
(ii) Profit for the year /Revenue (%) =  100
Net sales
$ 2 ;$57 ;$
=  100
$6
$48
=  100
$6
= 8%
Profit for the year
(iii) Profit for the year / Capital (%) =  100
Capital
$48
=  100
$32
= 15%
Current Assets excluding inventory
(iv) Quick ratio (acid test ratio) =
Current Liabilities
$55 :$5
=
$85 :$35
= 0.50:1
(b) Quick ratio (acid test) excludes inventory from the calculation as it is the least liquid current asset.
Moreover inventory is not very easy to sell it and is difficult to convert it into cash within a short
period of time.
(c) As Maya has to repay the $35 000 loan within a month so she needs sufficient amount of cash to
pay this loan and to meet its working capital needs. The current cash balance of $5 000 seems
insufficient in this regard.
(d)  Injection of more capital by the owner
 Arranging a long term loan
 Try to get extended payment period from the suppliers
 Press trade receivables for swift payment through offering them a cash discount
 Sell some inventory for cash or offer trade discounts on cash sales
 Sale of surplus non-current assets

(a) (i) Revenue (Sales) = Cost of Sales + Gross Profit
= $ 2
( ) + $120 000
25%
= $600 000
Cost of Sales
Average Invemtory
$32
=
($25 :$65 )/2
= 7.1 times
Gross Profit
(ii) Gross profit/sales percentage =  100
Net sales
$8
=  100
$4
= 20%
Profit for the year
(iii) Net profit to sales percentage =  100
Net Sales
$2
=  100
$4
= 15%
Current Assets
(iv) Working capital (current) ratio =
Current Liabilities
$65 :$7
=
$75 :$ 5
= 1.50:1
(b) Reduced mark-up/selling price on goods Increased advertising and market awareness Improved
quality of the goods purchased Improved the range of goods for sale
(c) The ratio is below the recommended 2:1, but is within an acceptable range.
(d) Sell surplus non-current assets
Obtain long term loan Introduce additional capital
QUESTION 15 MAY 2013 P21 Q2 (c to e)

Gross profit
(c) Gross profit to sales ratio = × 100
Revenue (sales)
$6 ;$48
= × 100
$6
= 20%
(d) Gross profit ratio has fallen from 33.3% to 20% in 2013. Though there is an increase in sales
revenue by $2 000 (3.45%) but the decrease in gross profit ratio implies that an increase in sales
in absolute terms does not guarantee a rise in profitability of sales.
The following could be the reasons for decrease in gross profit ratio.
 A decrease in selling price without any or relatively low proportionate decrease in cost of
sales
 An increase in cost of sales without any or relatively low increase in selling price
 Over valuation of opening inventory
 Under valuation of closing inventory
(e)  It shows the gross profit earned in proportion to sales revenue

 To Help a business to determine that how well it has performed in terms of its trading
operations.
 To compare the trading performance of current year with previous years
 To compare the trading performance with other like businesses within same industry

(a) Statement to calculate working capital
Current Assets $ $
Inventory 10 670
Current Liabilities
Working capital 13 000
Current assets
(b) (i) Working capital (Current) ratio =
Current liabilities
$26
=
$ 3
= 2:1
Current assets; Inventory
(ii) Quick ratio (acid test) =
Current liabilities
$26 ;$ 76
=
$ 3
= 1.17:1
(c)  Purchase of non-current assets amounting to $20 000

 Cash withdrawals amounting to $10 000
 Bank overdraft amounting to $4 200 used in part settlement of non-current assets
 Accumulation of trade receivables due to delayed payments
 Fall in cash sales
(d)  Injection of more capital by the owner

 Arranging a long term loan
 Try to get extended payment period from the suppliers
 Press trade receivables for swift payment through offering them a cash discount
 Sell some inventory for cash or offer trade discounts on cash sales
 Sale of surplus non-current assets
 Reduction in drawings
(a) (i) Sales = Cost of Sales + Gross Profit
= *$90 000 + ($90 000 × 25%)+
= $112 500
(ii) Purchases = Cost of sales + Closing inventory  Opening Chemistry

= $90 000 + $21 159  $14 841
= $96 318
(iii) Profit = Sales  Cost of Sales  Expenses
= $112 500  $90 000  ($4 890+ $7 485)
= $10 125
(b) 30 April 30 April

Workings
2013 2012
Gross profit
Gross profit margin (gross profit/ sales) × 100
Revenue (sales)
$22 5
× 100 20% 25%
$ 25
Profit for the year
Net profit margin (Net profit / sales) × 100
Revenue (sales)
$ 25
× 100 9% 11%
$ 25
Cost of Sales
Average Inventory
$9
5 times 8 times
($ 4 84 :$2 59)÷2
Profit for the year
Return on capital employed (ROCE) × 100
Capital Employed
$ 25
× 100 10% 12%
$ 25
(c) Profitability was higher in 2012 compared to 2013.

The gross profit margin has fallen from 25% in 2012 to 20% in 2013.
The net profit margin has increased to 11% for 2012 which was higher than 9% of 2013.
The return on capital employed was 2% better in 2012 than 2013 (12% compared to 10%).
The rate of inventory turnover has fallen from 8 times in 2012 to 5 times in 2013.
It takes 73 days to turn over inventory in 2013 compared to 45.6 days in 2012.
(d) Reduce inventory levels by cutting purchases
Promote sales by offering cash discounts
Reduce mark up from 25%
Sales promotions
QUESTION 18 NOVEMBER 2013 P22 Q 4

$75
(a) Gross profit/sales × 100 25.00%
$3
$27 99
Net profit/sales × 100 9.33%
$3
$27 9
Return on capital employed × 100 11.66%
$24
(b) Though Gross profit has increased in monetary terms but Gross profit/sales (margin) has
remained constant showing a consistent performance on trading activities.
Like Gross profit the amount of net profit has also increased in monetary terms but Net profit
margin has fallen despite an increase in sales. This shows increase in operating expenses at a
faster rate than sales.
Return on capital employed has also decreased marginally indicating that business was unable to
fully utilize the amount of capital employed within the business.

Current assets
(a) Working capital (current) ratio =
Current liabilities
$2 :$ 6 6 :$ 4 : $ 75 :$25
=
$ 9
$4
=
$ 9
= 2.11:1
Current assets;Inventory
Quick ratio (acid test) =
Current liabilities
$4 ;$2
=
$ 9
= 1.05:1
(b) (i) The working capital (current) ratio has fallen from 4:1 in 2012 to 2.10:1 in 2013. The
quick (acid test) ratio has fallen from 2:1 in 2012 to 1.05:1 in 2013. The liquidity ratios
show business is less liquid in 2013 than in 2012. Both ratios are though decreasing but
are within acceptable parameters i.e. the working capital (current) ratio is slightly better
than acceptable parameters i.e. 2:1 and the quick (acid test) ratio is also slightly better
than acceptable parameters i.e. 1:1.
(ii) Reduction in liquidity ratios may be due to the following

 A loss in 2013
 Purchase of new non-current assets
 Drawings by the owner for personal use
 Repayment of long-term loan
 Decrease in rate of inventory turnover
 Increase in collection period for trade receivables
 Reduction in payment period for trade payables
(c)  Sale of surplus non-current assets
 Injection of additional capital within the business
 Reduction in personal cash and stock drawings

(a) (i) Gross Profit = Sales  Cost of Sales
Cost of Sales = Sales  Gross Profit
= $300 000 $300 000 × 20%
= $240 000
(ii)
$
Purchases 170 000
290 000
Closing inventory at 1 April 2013. (balancing figure) (50 000)
Cost of Sales 240 000
(b)  High carrying cost

 More chances of Inventory becoming obsolete
 Deterioration/damage of inventory
 Higher risk of theft or pilferage
 Liquidity issues due to tying up of liquid resources in inventory.
$5 : :5
(c) (i) Working capital ratio (current ratio) =
6
66
=
6
= 1.1:1
$ :5
(ii) Quick ratio (acid test ratio) =
6
$ 6
=
6
= 0.27:1
(d) The working capital ratio (current ratio) is low compared to the yardstick of 2:1. This may be
mainly due to a high level of trade payables
(e)
Working capital
Current assets Current liabilities
(current) ratio
1 Repaid a $40 000 long term bank
Decreased $40 000 No effect Decreased
loan.
2 Purchased $20 000 of non-current
No effect Increased $20 000 Decreased
assets on credit.
3 Sold inventory for $20 000 on
Increased $5 000 No effect Increased
credit (cost $15 000).

(a) Calculation of Cost of Sales
$
142 000
Cost of Sales 126 000
Gross Profit
Gross profit/sales (%) = × 100
Revenue
$ 68 – $ 26
= × 100
$ 68
= 25%
Cost of sale
Rate of mentor turnover =
Average inventory
$ 26
=
($2 :$ 6 )/2
= 7 times
Current Asset
Working capital (current) ratio =
Current liabilities
$ 6 : $24 5 : $ 5
=
$35
= 1.2:1
(b) Najla was well able to control her inventory level as her closing inventory is lower than opening
inventory. As a result, the inventory turnover rate has improved from 6 to 7 times.
Najla’s ability to pay her trade payables has deteriorated as her working capital (current) ratio
has reduced from 1:7:1 to 1.2:1. Moreover her trade payables are more than the total liquid
assets ($24 500 + $1 500). In addition, her bank balance is also very low.
(c) Increase in selling prices, reduction in purchase prices and more sales of higher margin items etc.
(d)
Proposals Working capital
Amount of change ($)
increase decrease
1  $500 ($1 000 – $500)
2  $3 000
3  $200 ($4 000 × 5%)
4  $2 000

$6 ;$48
Percentage gross profit/sales × 100 20%
$6
$36 ;($ ×8%)
Percentage net profit/sales × 100 4.7%
$6
$36
Return on capital employed (ROCE) × 100 12%
$2 :$
$75 :$45 :$6
Working capital ratio (Current ratio) 3.6:1
$5
(b) The usual accepted standard of an ideal current ratio is 2:1.The current ratio (working capital
ratio) of Lai Yee is higher than it ought to be. The too high ratio reveals the overinvestment
within working capital funds more than actually required.
(c) Proposals Profit for the year Capital employed

1  
2  
3  
4  
(d) Proposal 1 Historical cost

Proposal 2 Prudence

(a) Workings Answer
$ 55 : $24 5
Cost of sales x8 $160 000
2
Purchases $160 000 + $24 500 – $15 500 $169 000
$2 ;$ 6
Percentage gross profit to sales × 100 20%
$2
Expenses *$200 000 x (20%  7%)+ $26 000
Net profit $200 000 x 7% $14 000
(b) Adjustment Effect on inventory value Value

increase decrease
1  $50
2  $100 (10 units @ $10)
3  $400 (4 units @ $100)
4  $180 ($200  $20)

(a) (i) Cost of goods sold = Sales  Gross profit
X = $900 000  0.20x
1.20x = $900 000
X = $750 000
(ii) Profit for the year = Gross Profit  Expenses
= ($750 000 × 20%)  ($105 000
= $45 000
(b) Workings 31 March 2015 31 March 2014

$45 ×
Profit margin (profit for the year to revenue) 5% 5%
$9
$75
Rate of inventory turnover 15 times 7 times
($65 :$35 )/2
$45
Return on capital employed (ROCE) 10% 4%
$3 :$ 5
(c) The net profit margin has remained unchanged at 5%. It reveals consistent performance of the
business. It also signifies that cost of sales and expenses as a proportion of sales have remained
unchanged.
Rate of inventory turnover has increased substantially. This shows that business was able to
increase the frequency with which inventory is turned into sales. There was also a reduction in
inventory level and is under control
Return on capital employed has improved. It signifies more efficient use of long-term funds in
2015. This could also be due to higher total amount of profits.

(a) (i) Sales = Cost of sales + Gross profit
= $125 000 + ($125 000 × 20%)
$150 000
(ii) Purchases = Cost of sales + Closing inventory  Opening inventory
= $125 000 + $35 000  $15 000
= $145 000
(iii) Expenses = Gross Profit  Profit for the year
= ($125 000 × 20%)  ($150 000 × 5%)
= $17 500
(b) Workings 31 March 2015 31 March 2014
$25
Gross profit margin (gross profit to revenue)  100 16.67% 25.61%
$ 5
$7 5
Return on capital employed (ROCE)  100 15.00% 12.00%
$4 :$
$ 25
Rate of turnover of Inventory 5.00 times 2.82 times
($ 5 :$35 )/2
$25
Quick ratio (acid test ratio) 0.25:1 0.91:1
$7 :$3
(c) Profitability
Gross profit margin has deteriorated from 25.61% to 16.67%, whereas ROCE has improved during
the same period. Selling prices may have been cut to increase sales volume resulting in higher
inventory turnover rate. Better ROCE may also indicate that expenses have been better
controlled in 2015.
Liquidity
Quick or liquid ratio has deteriorated to a very low level. The inventory levels have significantly
increased in the year. Trade payables are very high but due to bank overdraft of $30 000; no cash
is available to pay trade payables. This may result in the risk of bankruptcy because of not paying
to trade payables.

(a) (i) Sales = Cost of sales + Gross profit
= $90 000 + ($90 000 × 40%)
$126 000
(ii) Purchases = Cost of sales + Closing inventory  Opening inventory
= $90 000 + $37 000  $11 000
= $116 000
(iii) Expenses = Gross Profit  Profit for the year
= ($90 000 × 40%)  $18 900
= $17 100
(b)
Workings 30 Sept 2015 30 Sept 2014
Profit margin (profit for the year to $ 89
× 100 15.00% 12.13%
revenue) $ 26
$9
Rate of inventory turnover 3.75 times 2.00 times
($ : $37 )/2
$37 :$ 4 2 :$2 8
Working capital ratio (current ratio) 2.00:1 2.60:1
$27
$ 42 :$2 8
27
(c) (i) Inventory turnover has increased from2 times to 3.75 times. It reveals that inventory is
being sold at a faster rate. This is perhaps due to substantial increase in inventory levels
as closing inventory is $26 000 more than the opening inventory. There should be an
optimum inventory level keeping in view the sales demands.
(ii) Both liquidity ratios have fallen in the year. Although the current ratio is at the
benchmark level of 2:1, but the quality of current assets does not seem to be good as
almost 69% of the current assets comprise of inventory (which is considered as the least
liquid current asset). Quick ratio is lower than the yardstick of 1:1 but is still at an
acceptable level. However, the cash position looks very weak; so unless business has
consistent and regular cash flow from inventories and trade receivables, it may face
problems in paying off its trade payables as and when they fall due.

(a)
Workings Answer
Cost of sales [$380 000  ($380 000 × 25%)]+ Closing
Inventory at 1 August 2014 = $55 000
inventory ($65 000)  Purchases ($295 000)
$285
Rate of inventory turnover = 4.75 times
$55 (a):$65 )/2
Gross profit ($380 000 × 25%) – Profit for the year ($35
Expenses paid for the year = $52 000
000) = Expenses ($60 000)  Accrued ($8 000)
$65 : $42 :$ 3
Working capital (current) ratio = 2:1
$52 : $8
$42 :$ 3
Quick ratio (acid test ratio) = 0.92:1
$52 : $8
(b)
Working capital Amount
Proposal
(Increase, decrease, no effect) $
2 Sell old inventory costing $15 000, for $9 000 cash Decrease 6 000
3 Allow a trade receivable 5% cash discount for
Decrease 500
early payment of a debt of $10 000
4 Pay expenses accrued of $8 000 No effect Nil
5 Bring additional capital into the business, motor
increase 1 000
vehicle $5 000 and cash $1 000

$ : $2
Gross profit/sales percentage x 100 40% 37.5%
$75
$
Return on capital employed (ROCE) x 100 30.3% 20%
$25 : $8
$6 :$22 :$ 5 :$28
Working capital ratio (current ratio) 1.9:1 2.9:1
$5 :$8 5
$22 :$ 5 :$28
$5 :$8 5
(b) (i) Profitability

There has been an improvement in ‘Gross profit to sales ratio’ in 2016. This may be due
to increase in selling prices or more efficient/bulk buying.
The ROCE has significantly increased in 2016 from 20% to 30.3%. Lache controlled his
expenses in a better way in 2016.
The profit for the year has doubled in 2016 with the increase in long term capital
employed of the business.
(ii) Liquidity
Despite the Working capital ratio has reduced, the liquidity of the business has
improved as can be seen in the improvement of quick ratio from a critical level of 0.4 to
0.9 which is good from short term solvency’s point of view.
Inventory level has significantly reduced indicating the reduction in Inventory holding
period which is favourable sign for the business.
Trade receivables have also reduced revealing early collection from them.
Negative bank balance has converted into a positive bank balance indicating better
ability of the business to meet working requirements of the business.

(a)
Year ended 30
September 2015
$24 ×
Revenue 320 000 $220 000
75
$ 2 :$ 3
Working capital ratio (Current ratio) 1.25:1 1.93:1
$ 8 :$2
$ 2
$ 8 :$2
(b) There has been significant increase in revenue in 2016. Though increase in revenue usually brings
more profits for the business but may also result in liquidity issues. This is due to increase in
working capital requirements as can be seen in high levels of inventory, trade receivables and
trade payables with negative bank balance.
Working capital ratio has deteriorated from an acceptable level of 1.93:1 to below par level of
1.25:1.
Quick ratio has also deteriorated to 0.60:1 which is again below the accepted ‘yardstick’ for
liquidity. This indicates poor ability of the business to meet its current obligations in due course
of time as the business had no cash to pay expenses and trade payables.
(c)
Effect on
Proposal Current Current Working
Introduce additional capital of $10 000, consisting of $5 000 in
+$5 000 No effect +$5 000
cash and $5 000 non-current assets.
Obtain an additional bank loan for $30 000, repayable in equal +$6 000
+$30 000 1 +$24 000
instalments over five years. ( /5 )
Offer trade receivables a cash discount of 10% for quick payment.
$6 000 No effect $6 000
Credit customers owing $60 000 will accept this offer.

(a)
Comparative figures
Workings Answer
for previous year
$ 68 (W ) ×
Revenue for the year $224 000 $200 000
75
$56 (W 2)
Percentage mark up × 100 33.33% 27%
$ 68 (W )
$56 000 (W 1) – $11 200 (W 3) Or
Expenses for the year $44 800 36 000
$224 000 (Revenue) × 20% (25%  5%)
$ 2 (W 3)
Return on capital employed (ROCE) × 100 14% 21%
$6 :$2
WORKINGS
(W 1) Cost of Sales = Opening Inventory + Purchases  Closing Inventory
= $29 000 + $170 000  $31 000
= $168 000
(W 2) Gross Profit = Revenue (Sales)  Cost of Sales
= $224 000 (‘a’ part)  $168 000 (W 1)
= $56 000
(W 3) Profit for the year = Revenue (Sales) × 5%
= $224 000 (‘a’ part) × 5%
= $11 200
(b) Revenue has increased by 12% in 2016 despite increase in mark-up percentage. This may be due
to intensive sales and marketing efforts.
The percentage mark-up has also increased in 2016, this may be due to increase in sales prices or
decrease in buying costs.
There has been an increase in operating expenses both in value and in proportion to revenue
indicating higher sales and administrative expenses
The return on capital employed (ROCE) has decreased in the current year, this may be due to
proportionately higher expenses or increase in capital employed in current year which has not yet
been fully used up.
May 2014 285 Paper 21
MAY 2014 - PAPER 21

QUESTION 1
Akma received the following bank statement on 30 April 2014:
Debit Credit Balance

Date Details
$ $ $
1 April Balance 88 614 Dr
2 April Cheque – Stanning 702 Dr
10 April Cash receipt 1204 502 Cr
12 April Cheque – Chong 640 138 Dr
18 April Paying in – Trinity Stores 780 642 Cr
20 April Cheque – Pang 94 548 Cr
22 April Charges 16 532 Cr
25 April MDA Electricity – S.O. 104 428 Cr
28 April Dividend receipt 41 469 Cr
Akma compared the bank statement with her cash book.
REQUIRED
(a) Bring the cash book of Akma up to date. Balance the cash book and bring down the balance.
Cash Book (bank columns)
$ $
8 April Sales 1204 1 April Balance b/d 614
18 April Trinity Stores 780 2 April Stanning 88
23 April Xain 73 8 April Chong 640
24 April Li Ye 37 23 April Zaine 59
27 April Pang 94
[5]
(b) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement at 30 April 2014. [4]
(c) State the meaning of the accounting abbreviation S.O. [1]
On 1 April, Trinity Stores owed Akma $800. During the month of April, Akma recorded the following
transactions with Trinity Stores.
8 April Akma supplied goods to Trinity Stores with a list price of $900, less 20% trade discount.
10 April Trinity Stores returned goods supplied by Akma on 8 April with a list price of $100.
18 April Trinity Stores paid the balance due on 1 April less 2½% cash discount.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the account of Trinity Stores in the books of Akma. Balance the account and bring down
the balance. [6]
(e) Name the document that Akma would issue to Trinity Stores on 10 April. [1]
(f) State two reasons why Akma might give Trinity Stores trade discount. [2]
May 2014 286 Paper 21
QUESTION 2
Ghani is preparing his financial statements. He provided the following information.
1 April 2013 Balances b/d Insurance $500 Dr

Commission receivable $250 Cr
Cash book entries 1 April 2013 to 31 March 2014:

Insurance paid by cheque $4 000
Commission received by cheque $1 200
On 31 March 2014:
1 Insurance of $150 was prepaid
2 Commission receivable of $200 was due to Ghani.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the following ledger accounts, for the year ended 31 March 2014, showing the transfer
to the income statement. Balance the accounts and bring down the balances. [8]
On reviewing his purchases account, Ghani found the following errors.
1. Goods purchased for cash, $450, had not been recorded in the books.
2. Goods purchased on credit from C Maxley, $950, had been recorded in the books as
$590.
3. A purchase of a motor vehicle, $6 000, had been recorded in the purchases account.
4. Goods purchased from Y Li, $820, had been credited to the purchases account and
debited to Y Li’s account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare journal entries to correct the errors in 1 to 4 above. Narratives are not required. [6]
(c) Complete the table below naming the type of error and the effect on the gross profit of
correcting the error. The first item has been completed as an example.
Type of Effect on gross

error Profit
Goods purchased for cash, $450, had not been
Goods purchased on credit from C Maxley, $950, had
2
been recorded in the books as $590.
A purchase of a motor vehicle, $6 000, had been
3
recorded in the purchases account.
Goods purchased from Y Li, $820, had been credited to
4
the purchases account and debited to Y Li’s account.
[6]
May 2014 287 Paper 21
QUESTION 3
The Millennium Social Club provides a meeting place for members. The club also runs a café for the sale of
refreshments.
The treasurer of the Millennium Social Club does not maintain a full set of double entry records, but has
produced the following information for the year ended 30 April 2014.
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 30 April 2014
Balance b/d 2 250 General expenses 7 600
Subscriptions 5 800 Rent 4 000
Café takings 41 000 Payments to café suppliers 12 400
Donations 3 100 Wages & taxes of café manager 14 000
Bank loan 2 800
Purchase of equipment and fixtures 700
______ Balance c/d 9 650
52 150 52 150
Balance b/d 9 650
1 Balances at:
1 May 2013 30 April 2014
$ $
Subscriptions in arrears –– 600
Trade payables for café supplies 1 250 1 100
Inventory of café supplies 930 790
Heat and light due 520 720
Equipment and fixtures (at valuation) 11 200 10 100
8% Bank loan 10 000 ?
Café manager’s wages and employment taxes due –– ?
2 The café manager’s wages and employment taxes for the month of April 2014 were outstanding.
In April 2014 she had worked a total of 180 hours.

Employee’s tax and social security of $240 would be deducted from the gross pay.
The Millennium Social Club would pay 10% of the café manager’s gross pay as an employer’s
contribution to social security.
3 The 8% bank loan repayment included the interest due for the year.
4 Half of the heat and light relates to the café.
5 Half of the equipment and fixtures are used in the café.
May 2014 288 Paper 21
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the café manager’s net pay for April 2014 [3]
(b) Prepare the café income statement for the year ended 30 April 2014. [7]
(c) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 30 April 2014. [10]
QUESTION 4
Demetris is a trader, buying and selling goods on credit. The following information was available on 31
March 2014.
$
Revenue 300 000
Purchases 170 000
Capital 100 000
Bank 5 000 Dr
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the:
(i) Cost of goods sold. [2]
(ii) Inventory at 1 April 2013. [3]
(b) Suggest two possible effects of holding too much inventory. [2]
(c) Calculate, to two decimal places, the:

(i) Working capital ratio (current ratio) [3]
(ii) Quick ratio (acid test ratio) [3]
(d) Comment upon the sufficiency of the working capital ratio (current ratio). [2]
During the year ended 31 March 2014, Demetris took the following actions.
1 Repaid a $40 000 long term bank loan.
2 Purchased $20 000 of non-current assets on credit.
3 Sold inventory for $20 000 on credit (cost $15 000).
REQUIRED
(e) Complete the following table showing the effect on the current assets, current liabilities and the
working capital ratio (current ratio) for each of the actions 1 to 3 above. The first item has been
Current Working capital ratio

Current assets
liabilities (current ratio)
Repaid a $40 000 long term
1 Decreased $40 000 No effect Decreased
bank loan.
2 Purchased $20 000 of non-
May 2014 289 Paper 21
current assets on credit.

Sold inventory for $20 000
3
on credit (cost $15 000).
[6]
QUESTION 5
Chan and Fong are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 2:1. Interest is allowed on capital
at the rate of 5% per annum and is charged on drawings at the rate of 5% per annum. Fong receives a
salary of $10 000 per annum. The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 April 2014.
$
Revenue 480 500
Purchases 209 000
Capital accounts:
Chan 60 000
Fong 40 000
Current accounts:
Chan 1 500 Cr
Fong 4 000 Cr
Drawings
Chan 6 000
Fong 10 000
8% Loan repayable 30 March 2016 200 000
Bank 34 500 Dr
May 2014 290 Paper 21
2 The motor vehicle expenses are to be apportioned one quarter to collecting goods for resale and
three quarters to delivery of goods to customers.
3 At 30 April 2014:
(i) Heat and light, $750, was accrued
(ii) Office expenses, $4 000, were prepaid.
4 Half of Fong’s $10 000 salary had been paid to him and posted to the wages and salaries account.
5 Fixtures and fittings costing $2 000 purchased by cheque on 20 April 2014 had not been recorded
in the books.
6 Depreciation is to be charged on all non-current assets owned at the end of the year:
method
(ii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% using the straight-line method.
7 Trade receivables contains a debt of $7 500, which is considered irrecoverable. The provision for
REQUIRED
May 2014 291 Paper 22
MAY 2014 - PAPER 22

QUESTION 1
(a) (i) Explain the difference between book-keeping and accounting. [2]
(ii) Explain the accounting entity principle. [2]
Fashran sells goods to Hajar. On 1 April Hajar owed Fashran $2 100. The following transactions occurred in
April 2014.
5 April Fashran sold goods on credit to Hajar, list price $2 000, less 20% trade discount.
7 April Hajar returned goods purchased on the 5 April, list price $240.
18 April Hajar paid the balance of her account at 1 April and was allowed 2% cash discount.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the account of Hajar in the ledger of Fashran for April 2014. Balance the account and
bring down the balance. [5]
(c) Name the document that Fashran will issue on the following dates:
Date Document
5 April Fashran sold goods on credit to Hajar
7 April Hajar returned goods to Fashran purchased on the 5 April
30 April Fashran issues a summary of Hajar’s account for the month of April
[3]
(d) State the sub division of the ledger in which the account of Hajar would appear. [1]
The following balances were extracted from the books of Fashran on 30 April 2014.
$
Revenue 68 400
Purchases 29 800
Expenses 22 350
Bank overdraft 830
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare the trial balance showing Fashran’s capital at 30 April 2014. [5]
QUESTION 2
On 1 April 2014, Yee’s sales ledger control account showed the following balances: $20 450 debit and
$600 credit.
May 2014 292 Paper 22
During April the following transactions were recorded:

$
Credit sales 50 500
Cash sales 10 000
Returns from credit customers 700
Refunds to credit customers 750
Bad debt written off 800
On 1 May 2014, Yee’s sales ledger control account showed a credit balance of $180. The debit balance is
to be determined.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the sales ledger control account for the month of April 2014. Balance the account and
bring down the balances. [7]
On inspection of her ledger, Yee discovered the following errors:

1 A cheque received from D Moy, $450, had been posted to the account of D Kay.
2 An invoice for goods received from G Fallen, costing $790, had been recorded in the
3 Discount received, $45, had been debited to the discount received account and credited to F
Tay.
4 Repairs to fixtures and fittings, $800, had been recorded in the fixtures and fittings account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the journal entries to correct the errors in 1 to 4 above. Narratives are not required. [8]
(c) Complete the following table to name the type of error in 1 to 4 given above. The first item has
Type of error
1 A cheque received from D Moy, $450, had been posted to the account
Commission
of D Kay.
2 An invoice for goods received, costing $790, had been recorded in the
3 Discount received, $45, had been debited to the discount received
account and credited to F Tay.
4 Repairs to fixtures and fittings, $800, had been recorded in the fixtures
and fittings account.
[3]
(d) State two reasons why a suspense account would be used. [2]
May 2014 293 Paper 22
QUESTION 3
Cadmore Limited is a manufacturing business. The following information is available for the month of
April 2014.
Inventory at 1 April 2014: $

Office wages 24 750
Depreciation of office equipment 5 000
Rent of office building 1 000
Royalties 7 500
Revenue 290 450
Insurance 1 250
1 Inventory at 30 April 2014:
2 Insurance is to be apportioned 80% to the factory, 20% to the office.
3 General expenses: $5 000 relate to the factory and $3 000 to the office.
REQUIRED
(a) (i) Explain the term direct cost. [1]
(ii) State two direct costs incurred by Cadmore Limited. [2]
(b) Prepare the manufacturing account of Cadmore Limited for the month ended 30 April 2014. [11]
One of the factory workers of Cadmore Limited worked a total of 220 hours in April 2014.
20 hours were paid at double time
Tax and social security of $240 was deducted from the factory worker’s gross pay.
REQUIRED
(c) Calculate the factory worker’s net pay for April 2014. [3]
May 2014 294 Paper 22
Cadmore Limited must pay an additional 10% of the factory worker’s gross pay for employer’s tax and
REQUIRED
(d) Calculate the total employee’s and employer’s tax and social security payment to the tax
authorities for the factory worker in April 2014. [3]
QUESTION 4
Najla provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2014.
$
Revenue 168 000
Purchases 122 000
Capital 100 000
Bank 1 500 Dr
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the:
Cost of goods sold
Gross profit/sales percentage
Working capital ratio (current ratio) [10]
In the previous year, ended 31 March 2013, Najla calculated the following ratios:
Gross profit /sales percentage 20%
REQUIRED
(b) Comment upon the performance of Najla under the following headings, using the information
above and your answer in (a).
Controlling inventory
Ability to pay trade payables [4]
(c) Suggest two possible reasons for the change in gross profit/sales percentage. [2]
Najla is considering the following proposals to improve his working capital.

1 Sell obsolete inventory costing $1 000 for cash $500.
2 Sell non-current assets for $3 000 cash.
3 Allow trade receivables to pay debts of $4 000 less 5% cash discount.
4 Bring $5 000 additional capital into the business: Motor vehicle $3 000 and cash $2 000.
REQUIRED
May 2014 295 Paper 22
(d) Complete the following table showing the changes to working capital. The first proposal has been
Working capital
Proposals Amount of change ($)
increase decrease
1 ✔ $500
2
3
4
[6]
QUESTION 5
Franco is in business as a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from his books on 31 January
2014.
$
Bank 17 430 Dr
Revenue 362 500
Purchases 172 400
Inventory at 1 February 2013 17 970
Insurance 5 900
Drawings 20 000
Capital 80 000
Additional information at 31 January 2014

May 2014 296 Paper 22
2 Wages and salaries includes $15 000 drawings by Franco.

3 Marketing expenses, $6 750, were prepaid.
4 No interest had been paid on the bank loan.
5 Computer equipment costing $8 000 was purchased by cheque on 25 January 2014.
No entries had been made in the books.
6 Depreciation policy is as follows:
(i) The buildings are depreciated at the rate of 2% per annum using the straight line
method. Land and buildings consists of land, cost $50 000, and buildings, cost $100 000.
No depreciation is charged on the land.
(ii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 15% per annum using the straight line method.
balance method.
7 Trade receivables, $3 000, were considered irrecoverable. A provision for doubtful debts of 5% is
to be maintained.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 January 2014. [24]
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 January 2014. [16]
November 2014 - 297 - Paper 21
NOVEMBER 2014 - PAPER 21

QUESTION 1
Adil’s transactions in August 2014 included the following.
August 2 Purchased goods on credit from Tiara, $1 500, less 20% trade discount.
August 5 Returned goods to Tiara, list price $300.
August 7 Paid a cheque to Tiara, $500, after deducting $6 cash discount.
August 9 Sold non-current assets on credit to D Costa, at book value, $4 000.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following table for the above transactions. The first item has been completed as an
example.
Effect on owner’s
Date Source document Book of prime entry
capital
August 5
August 7
August 9
[9]
(b) State the sub division of the ledger containing each of the following accounts:

Purchases
Tiara
Non-current assets
D Costa
[4]
On 31 August 2014 Adil had the following balances in his books. He was aware that there were
$
Inventory 3 850
Purchases 14 400
Revenue 22 000
Bank loan 2 000
Capital 3 000
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the trial balance at 31 August 2014, balancing the trial balance by the use of an
QUESTION 2
The following information relates to the delivery vehicles of Swift Limited.

30 June 2014 Disposed of delivery vehicle 1 and received a cheque for $8 000.
Depreciation is charged at the rate of 20% using the diminishing (reducing) balance method.
REQUIRED
(a) State two causes of depreciation of a delivery vehicle. [2]
(b) Complete the following table to show the depreciation charged for the years ended 30 June 2013
and 30 June 2014.

$ $ $
30 June 2013
30 June 2014
Total
[3]
(c) Prepare the provision for depreciation of delivery vehicles account for the year ended 30 June
2014. Balance the account and bring down the balance. [4]
(d) Prepare the journal entries to record the disposal of delivery vehicle 1. Narratives are not
required. [6]
(e) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position at 30 June 2014, showing the delivery
vehicles. [2]
Swift Limited are considering the following expenditure on delivery vehicle 2.

1 Replacement tyres
2 A new trailer
3 An annual maintenance service.
REQUIRED
(f) State whether each of the items 1, 2 and 3 above is capital expenditure or revenue expenditure. [3]
QUESTION 3
Wing Limited had the following balances in its books after the calculation of the profit for the year ended
30 September 2014.
$
Profit from operations (before debenture interest) 78 000
6% Debentures (31 December 2025) 100 000
Interim dividend paid 31 March 2014:
Preference 2 000
Ordinary 8 000
Retained profit 1 October 2013 35 000
On 30 September 2014, the directors decided to:
1 increase the general reserve to $80 000
2 pay the remaining preference dividend
3
pay a final ordinary share dividend of $0.25 per share.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the appropriation account for Wing Limited for the year ended 30 September 2014. [10]
(b) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position for the capital and reserves of Wing
Limited at 30 September 2014. [6]
(c) State two differences between ordinary shares and debentures. [2]
(d) State one reason for maintaining a general reserve. [1]
(e) State one reason why International Accounting Standards are important when preparing the
financial statements of a limited company. [1]
QUESTION 4
Lai Yee provided the following information.
$
Profit from operations (before bank loan interest) 36 000
Capital 200 000
Bank 60 000 Dr
Revenue 600 000
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate to one decimal place:

Percentage gross profit/sales
Percentage net profit/sales
[12]
(b) Comment upon the sufficiency of the working capital ratio (current ratio). [2]
Lai Yee is considering ways in which she might improve her return on capital employed (ROCE).
She is considering the following proposals.

1 Introduce additional capital of $10 000.
2 Repay half of the 8% bank loan.
3 Sell $20 000 non-current assets, saving $3 000 in depreciation.
4 Convert $25 000 of the 8% bank loan into a bank overdraft at 12% interest per annum.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the following table, by placing a tick (√) in the appropriate box, to show the effect on
the profit for the year and the capital employed.
Profit for the year Capital employed

Proposals
1
2
3
4
[6]
Lai Yee is also considering improving her profit for the year by:
1 revaluing her business premises to the market value of $120 000 (cost $100 000)
2 removing the provision for doubtful debts.
REQUIRED
(d) Name which accounting concept would not be complied with if Lai Yee implemented her proposals. [2]
QUESTION 5
Nikolas is a manufacturer. The following balances were extracted from his books on 31 July 2014.
$
Capital 80 000
Drawings 20 000
Machinery (cost) 125 000

Machinery 75 000
Bank 27 700 Dr
Inventory at 1 August 2013:
Revenue 505 000
Royalties 15 000
Insurance 6 200
Rent 11 000
8% Loan (repayable 31 May 2024) 60 000

$
2 Sundry office expenses prepaid $1 400.
3 Insurance included a payment of $4 800 for the year ended 31 October 2014.
(i) machinery at 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method
(ii) office fixtures at 10% using the straight-line method.
6 Nikolas took $7 500 of finished goods for his own use.
at 4%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 July 2014. [14]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 July 2014. [13]
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 July 2014. [13]

QUESTION 1
Maria had the following assets and liabilities on 1 May 2014.
$
Inventory 1 950
Amount payable – Midland Telecoms 400
Bank 550 Dr
REQUIRED
(i) Owner’s capital *1+
The following related to the purchase of telephone services for the three months to 31 July 2014.
31 May Paid Midland Telecoms’ balance on 1 May 2014 by cheque.

26 June Received a telephone bill from Midland Telecoms $1 200.
15 July Paid telephone bill received on 26 June by cheque less 2% cash discount.
31 July Prepared an income statement for the three months to 31 July 2014. It was
estimated that $130 was owing.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the following ledger accounts for the three months to 31 July 2014.
(i) Midland Telecoms account *5+
(ii) Telephone expenses account *4+
(c) Name and explain the accounting concept applied in estimating the telephone expenses owing
on 31 July 2014. *3+
The following were some of the transactions which took place in July.
5 July Purchased inventory on credit.

10 July Goods returned by a credit customer.
20 July Paid wages in cash.
25 July Disposed of fixtures and fittings on credit.
REQUIRED
(d) Complete the following table for the above transactions naming the source document prepared
by Maria and the book of prime entry used. The first item has been completed as an example.
10 July
20 July
25 July *6+
QUESTION 2
Ajib commenced business on 1 October 2014 delivering parcels to customers’ homes. He purchased a
motor van on that date, the details are as follows.
Purchase price $9 600
Life of motor van 3 years
Residual value $1 200
Ajib is undecided whether to use the straight-line method or diminishing (reducing) balance method to
depreciate the motor van.
If Ajib uses the diminishing (reducing) balance method the annual rate of depreciation charged would be
50%.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table to show the depreciation to be charged for the years ended 30
September 2015, 2016 and 2017 using the straight-line method and the diminishing (reducing)
balance method. *6+
(c) State one advantage of Ajib using the straight-line method when depreciating the motor van. *1+
(d) State one advantage of Ajib using the diminishing (reducing) balance method when depreciating
the motor van. *1+
Ajib is considering:
Proposal 1 Charging the total purchase price of the motor van to the 2015 income statement.
Proposal 2 Using the diminishing (reducing) balance method to charge depreciation on the
motor van in 2015, and then to change to the straight line method for 2016 and
2017.
REQUIRED
(e) Name and explain which accounting concept would not be complied with if Ajib implemented his
proposals. *6+
Ajib also incurred the following expenditure.
1 Delivery of motor van from manufacturer
2 Fuel for motor van
3 Signwriting his business name on the motor van
4 Motor van insurance
REQUIRED
(f) State whether each of the items above is capital expenditure or revenue expenditure. *4+
QUESTION 3
Basir is the owner of the Korner Café. He does not maintain full double entry books, but has provided the
following information for the year ended 30 September 2014.
Bank Account
$ $
Balance b/d 4 000 Rent of café 5 500
Takings banked 43 200 Payments to credit suppliers 17 800
Bank loan interest 250
_____ Balance c/d 9 600
47 200 47 200
Balance b/d 9 600
1 All takings were in cash and were banked on the same day with the exception of:
$
Staff wages 14 900
Drawings 8 000
Cash purchases 950
2 Balances at: 1 October 2013 30 September 2014

$ $
Inventory 350 720
Rent of café prepaid 500 –
Rent of café accrued – 1 000
7 % Bank loan 5 000 5 000
Bank loan interest accrued – 100
Fixtures and fittings (at valuation) 2 250 2 200
REQUIRED
(a) State two advantages of maintaining full double entry records. *2+
(b) Calculate the total purchases for the year ended 30 September 2014. *5+
(c) Calculate the revenue for the year ended 30 September 2014. *3+
(d) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2014. *10+
QUESTION 4
The following information relates to the business of Lili.
$
Revenue 200 000

Net profit/sales 7%
REQUIRED
Workings Answer
cost of sales
purchases
percentage gross profit to sales
expenses
profit for the year
*14+
Lili’s inventory of $24 500 needs to be adjusted for the following.
1 5 items costing $10 each had been omitted from the inventory.
2 10 items costing $25 each were damaged and could only be sold for $15 each.
3 4 items were included in the inventory at the list price of $300 each, having been marked up by
50%.
4 1 item costing $20 was recorded in error in the inventory as $200.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table showing the effect that each adjustment will have upon the
inventory valuation at 30 September 2014. The first item has been completed as an example.
Effect on inventory value Value

Adjustment
increase decrease $
1 √ 50
2
3
4
*6+
QUESTION 5
Darius and Edgar are in partnership. The partnership agreement states that they share profits and losses in
the ratio 3:2. Interest on capital is allowed at the rate of 5% per annum. Edgar is entitled to a salary of $12
000 per annum. The following balances were extracted from the books on 31 July 2014.
$
Leasehold buildings (cost) 75 000
Leasehold buildings 18 000
Bank 31 400 Dr
Capital accounts:
Darius 40 000
Edgar 40 000
Current accounts at 1 August 2013:
Darius 500 Cr
Edgar 900 Cr
Drawings:
Darius 12 000
Edgar 12 000
Purchases 148 300
Revenue 256 000
Inventory at 1 August 2013 25 800
Rent payable 12 000

2 Other operating expenses prepaid $1 800.
3 Rent receivable of $1 500 was outstanding.
(i) an appropriate amount is to be charged on the leasehold buildings which are held on a
25 year lease
(ii) motor vehicles at the rate of 30% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
(iii) fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
maintained at 4%.
6 On 31 January 2014 the partners had agreed to allow Edgar to increase his capital by $20 000.
Edgar paid a cheque into the partnership bank account on that date.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account for the year ended 31 July 2014. *23+
(b) Prepare the current accounts for the year ended 31 July 2014. *4+
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 July 2014. *13+
May 2015 308 Paper 21
MAY 2015 - PAPER 21

QUESTION 1
Mira prepared a trial balance using the following information on 31 March 2015. The trial balance failed
to balance.
$
General expenses (prepaid) 1 520
Inventory 7 800
Capital 16 000
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the trial balance at 31 March 2015, including an appropriate balancing entry. [4]
On inspecting the books, Mira found the following errors:

1 A payment for general expenses, $750, had been correctly entered in the bank account, but had
been recorded in the general expenses account as $570.
2 General expenses, $1 000, had been recorded in the office fixtures account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the entries in the general journal to correct items 1 & 2. Narratives are not required. [4]
The following were some of the transactions completed in April 2015.

April 9 Sold goods on credit to Yash.
April 11 Yash returned goods sold on 9 April as they were damaged.
April 19 Purchased office fixtures on credit from Equip Limited.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the following table. The first item has been completed as an example.
Source Book of Account Account

Date Transaction
April 9 Sold goods on credit to Yash. Sales invoice Sales journal Yash Sales
April 11 Yash returned goods sold on 9
April as damaged.
April 19 Purchased office fixtures on
credit from Equip Limited.
[12]
May 2015 309 Paper 21
QUESTION 2
The following information was obtained from the books of Arden.
$
1 February 2015 Trade receivables balance 14 900 Dr
28 February 2015 Cheques received from trade receivables 45 800

Cheque from trade receivable later dishonoured 200
Cheques paid to trade payables 32 500
Bad debts 1 800
Cash sales 10 500
1 March 2015 Trade receivables balance 12 600 Dr
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the purchases ledger control account showing the credit purchases made in the month
of February 2015. [6]
(b) Prepare the sales ledger control account showing the credit sales made for the month of
February 2015. [7]
1 Payments for February $

Wages 15 200
2 Balances at 1 February 28 February

2015 2015
$ $
Non-current assets (at valuation) 18 000 17 200
General expenses owing 2 300 1 600
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the income statement for the month ended 28 February 2015. [6]
(d) State two benefits to Arden of using Information Communication Technology (ICT) in his
bookkeeping and accounting. [2]
QUESTION 3
Warle Limited provided the following information after the calculation of the profit for the year ended 30
April 2015.
May 2015 310 Paper 21
$
Profit for the year ended 30 April 2015 86 000
Authorised share capital:
Called up share capital:
Interim dividend paid 3 000
Retained profits 1 May 2014 14 000
The directors have:
1 transferred $50 000 to the general reserve
2 paid a final ordinary shares dividend of $0.15 per share.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 April 2015. [6]
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position extract for the equity and reserves of Warle Limited
at 30 April 2015. [5]
(c) State two differences between preference shares and debentures. [4]
(d) State two possible reasons why the directors of Warle Limited have transferred $50 000 to the
(e) State two reasons why large companies prepare their published financial statements in
accordance with International Accounting Standards (IAS). [2]
QUESTION 4
John provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2015.
$
Revenue 900 000
Expenses 105 000
Long term loan 150 000
Mark up 20%
REQUIRED
(i) Cost of goods sold [2]
(ii) Profit for the year [2]
(b) Calculate the following ratios.
Rate of inventory Turnover 7 times
[6]
May 2015 311 Paper 21
(c) Give two comments on the performance of John’s business over the two years. [6]
John is considering the following proposals to improve his profit for the year.
1 Change the depreciation methods for non-current assets.
2 Remove the provision for doubtful debts from the financial statements.
3 Value the inventory at market price.
4 Place a value on the skill of the workforce in the financial statements.
5 Exclude expenses owing from the income statement.
REQUIRED
(d) Name the accounting principle/concept which would not be complied with if each proposal was
implemented. The first one has been completed as an example.
Proposal Accounting principle/concept

1 Change the depreciation methods for non-current Assets Consistency
2 Remove the provision for doubtful debts from the financial
statements
3 Value the inventory at market price
4 Place a value on the skill of the workforce in the financial
statements
5 Exclude expenses owing from the income statement
[4]
QUESTION 5
The following balances were extracted from the books of Spiron Manufacturing on 30 April 2015.
$
Inventory at 1 May 2014
Revenue 310 000
Rent 10 000
May 2015 312 Paper 21
Insurance 8 000
Financial expenses 7 650
Bank 7 700 Dr
Capital 90 000
Drawings 16 600
Additional information at 30 April 2015

$
3 Financial expenses owing were $850.
4 Marketing expenses of $600 were prepaid.
(i) Factory machinery at 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method
(ii) Office fixtures at 15% using the straight-line method.
at 5%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 30 April 2015. Show clearly the prime cost
and the cost of production. [13]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 April 2015. [15]
May 2015 313 Paper 22
MAY 2015 - PAPER 22

QUESTION 1
The following balances were available from the books of Priya on 1 April 2015.
$
Putil 3 000 credit
Wages 1 750 debit
The following transactions took place in April 2015.
April 5 Paid Putil half of his outstanding balance on 1 April by cheque, less 2% cash discount
April 8 Bought goods on credit from Putil, $800, less 20% trade discount
April 23 Returned goods, list price $200, purchased on 5 April
April 26 Sold a non-current asset at book value, $2 000, on credit
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the following table. The first item has been completed as an example. Where the
owner’s capital is not affected, write ‘No effect’.
Book of Effect on
Source
Date Transaction prime owner’s
document
entry capital ($)
April 5 Paid Putil half of his outstanding balance on 1 Cheque
April by cheque, less 2% cash discount Counterfoil Cash book +30
April 8 Bought goods on credit from Putil, $800, less
20% trade discount
April 23 Returned goods, list price $200, purchased on 8
April
April 26 Sold a non-current asset at book value, $2000,
on credit
[12]
(b) Prepare the account of Putil for the month of April 2015. Balance the account and bring down
the balance on 1 May 2015. [5]
Priya prepared her income statement on 30 April 2015. She calculated that wages, $150, were prepaid at
that date.
REQUIRED
(c) Prepare the wages account for the month of April 2015 including the transfer to the income
statement. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 May 2015. [3]
QUESTION 2
Atto Electrical had the following non-current assets on 31 March 2013.
Net book value ($)
Premises (cost $50 000) 48 000
Motor vehicles (cost $16 000) 12 000
Computers 6 000
May 2015 314 Paper 22
Atto Electrical has the following depreciation policy.
Premises are depreciated at the rate of 2% per annum by straight-line method.

Motor vehicles are depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum by diminishing (reducing) balance
method.
Computers are depreciated by revaluation method.
A full year’s depreciation is charged on all non-current assets owned at the end of the financial year.
1 There were no purchases or sales of non-current assets during the year ended 31 March 2014.
2 The following purchases of non-current assets were made during the year ended 31 March 2015.
Payments were made by cheque.
$
Premises 30 000
Computers 3 200
3 Computers were valued as follows:
$
31 March 2014 4 200
31 March 2015 6 000
REQUIRED
(a) Explain the term depreciation. [2]
(b) State one cause of depreciation of a computer. [1]
(c) Complete the table to show the depreciation to be charged to the income statement for each of
the years ended 31 March 2014 and 31 March 2015.
Year ended 31 March 2014 Year ended 31 March 2015

$ $
Premises
Motor vehicles
Computers
[6]
(d) Prepare the following ledger accounts for each of the years ended 31 March 2014 and 31 March
2015. Balance the accounts and bring down the balances on 1 April.
Motor vehicles account [4]
Motor vehicles provision for depreciation account [5]
(e) Identify which two of the following accounting principles/concepts support the charging of
depreciation in an accounting year.
Accruals/Matching
Dual aspect
Going concern
Materiality
Money measurement [2]
May 2015 315 Paper 22
QUESTION 3
The following information is available for the Axton Chess Club.
Receipts and Payments Account for the year ended 31 March 2015
$ $
Balance b/d 1 April 2014 230 Rent of clubroom 2 000
Subscriptions 3 260 Treasurer’s salary 250
Competition entry fees received 1 580 Purchase of fixtures and equipment 1 100
Donations 350 Competition prizes 750
Balance c/d 31 March 2015 1 930 Travelling expenses 1 900
_____ Other operating expenses 1 350
7 350 7 350
Balance b/d 1 April 2015 1 930
1 Balances at: 1 April 2014 31 March 2015
$ $
Subscriptions in advance – 450
Fixtures and equipment (valuation) 4 000 4 400
Rent of clubroom prepaid – 50
Rent of clubroom accrued 70 –
Other operating expenses accrued 190 20
Accumulated fund 4 500 ?
2 $280 of the subscriptions in arrears on 1 April 2014 were subsequently received.
3 Subscriptions not paid after 12 months were considered irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the subscriptions account for the year ended 31 March 2015, showing the transfer to the
income and expenditure account. Balance the account and bring down the balances on 1 April
2015. [5]
(b) Prepare the income and expenditure account for the year ended 31 March 2015. [8]
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 March 2015. [7]
QUESTION 4
Xever provided the following information for the year ended 31 March 2015.
$
Capital 40 000
Bank loan (repayable 1 Jan 2020) 10 000
Mark up 20%
May 2015 316 Paper 22
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 31 March 2015.
(i) Revenue [2]
(ii) Purchases [2]
(b) Calculate the following ratios, correct to two decimal places. The previous year’s ratios are
shown in the last column.

Gross profit margin (gross
25.61%
profit to revenue)
Return on capital employed
12.00%
(ROCE)
Rate of turnover of inventory 2.82 times

[8]
(c) Comment on the changes to Xever’s business over the two years under the following headings.
(i) Profitability [3]
(ii) Liquidity [3]
QUESTION 5
Farah and Hana are in partnership. The partnership agreement states that they share profits and losses
equally. Interest on capital is allowed at the rate of 4% per annum. Interest is charged on drawings made
during the year at the rate of 5% per annum. No salaries are paid to the partners.
$
Premises (cost) 60 000
Delivery vehicles (cost) 30 000
Premises 3 600
Delivery vehicles 10 000
Hana 30 000
Current accounts at 1 May 2014: Farah 3 250 Cr
Hana 1 850 Cr
Drawings: Farah 6 000
Hana 6 000
May 2015 317 Paper 22
Purchases 81 250
Revenue 190 000
The following information was available 30 April 2015.
2 Advertising expenses prepaid were $800.
3 Heat and light $150 was outstanding.
Premises at the rate of 2% on cost per annum
Delivery vehicles at the rate of 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
Office fixtures at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
5 The provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at 4%.
6 A cheque payment of $550, made to a credit supplier on 15 April, had not been recorded in the
books.
REQUIRED
November 2015 318 Paper 21

QUESTION 1
The following balances were taken from the books of Krul Limited on 1 July 2015.
$
Carston Garages account 200 credit
Motor van expenses account 3 200 debit
The following transactions took place in July 2015.

July 12 Paid Carston Garages their outstanding balance by cheque, deducting 3% cash discount
July 15 Purchased fuel for the motor van, on credit, from Carston Garages, $120
July 23 Paid motor van repairs by cheque, $200
July 26 Purchased new motor van tyres from Carston Garages on credit, $400, less 15% trade discount
1 Krul Limited prepared financial statements on 31 July 2015.
2 Motor van expenses, $125, were accrued on 31 July 2015.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the Carston Garages account for the year ended 31 July 2015. Balance the account and
bring down the balance on 1 August 2015. [5]
(b) Prepare the motor van expenses account for the year ended 31 July 2015. Make the transfer to
the income statement. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 August 2015. [5]
(c) Name the subdivision of the ledger containing each of the following accounts.

Sales
T Wong (credit customer)
[2]
(d) Explain each of the following accounting terms.
(i) Revenue expenditure [2]
(ii) Capital receipt [2]
(e) Indicate by placing a tick () whether each of the following transactions is revenue expenditure,
revenue receipt, capital expenditure or capital receipt.
Revenue Revenue Capital Capital
Transaction
Sale of motor van
Purchase new motor van tyres
Cash discount received
Purchase a new motor van
[4]
QUESTION 2
Martino’s trial balance at 30 September 2015 did not agree and a suspense account was opened.
The following errors were discovered.
1 The total of the purchases journal had been undercast by $950.
2 Discount received, $85, had been debited to the discount received account.
3 A payment of rent, $750, had been correctly entered in the cash book, but recorded in the rent
account as $570.
4 A purchase of office fixtures, $2 300, had been recorded in the general expenses account.
REQUIRED
(a) Show the entries in the general journal to correct items 1 to 4. Narratives are not required. [8]
(b) Prepare the suspense account at 30 September 2015 showing the original difference on the trial
balance. [4]
(c) Complete the following table to show the effect on the profit for the year of correcting each
error.
Increase/Decrease/ Amount
Error
No effect $
1 The total of the purchases journal had been undercast
Decrease 950
by $950.
2 Discount received, $85, had been debited to the
3 A payment of rent, $750, had been correctly entered in
the cash book, but recorded in the rent account as
$570.
4 A purchase of office fixtures, $2 300, had been
[6]
(d) Explain why an error of commission would not be revealed by the trial balance. [2]
QUESTION 3
Aina and Barry are in partnership. The partnership agreement states the following:
Interest is charged on drawings at the rate of 6% per annum
Interest is paid on capital at the rate of 4% per annum
Interest is paid on partners’ loans at the rate of 5% per annum
Barry receives a salary of $8 000 per annum
3 2
Profits and losses are shared /5 Aina and /5 Barry.
The following information was available on 1 May 2014.
$
Capital account Aina 50 000
Barry 20 000
Current account Aina 800 debit
Barry 6 500 credit
Loan to partnership Barry 40 000
Additional information for the year ended 30 April 2015

1 Barry increased his capital in the partnership by $20 000 on 1 November 2014.
2 Drawings during the year were:
$
Aina 7 500
Barry 10 000
3 Profit for the year before loan interest was $19 800.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the appropriation account of the partnership for the year ended 30 April 2015. [8]
(b) Prepare the current accounts of the partners for the year ended 30 April 2015. Balance the
accounts and bring down the balances on 1 May 2015. [6]
(c) State two advantages of a partnership. [2]
Aina and Barry are considering ways to improve the profit for the year of the business. They suggest the
following changes.
REQUIRED
(d) Name the accounting principle/concept which would not be complied with if Aina and Barry
implemented the suggestions.
Accounting
Suggestions
principle/concept
[4]
QUESTION 4
Galenia buys and sells goods on credit. The following information was available on 30 September 2015.
$
Bank 2 800 debit
Mark up 40%
REQUIRED
(i) Revenue [2]
(ii) Purchases [2]
(b) Calculate the following ratios to two decimal places. Comparative figures for the previous year
are shown in the last column.
30 September 30 September
Workings
2015 2014
Profit margin (profit for the year to revenue) 12.13%
Rate of inventory turnover 2.00 times
[8]
(c) Comment on the performance of Galenia’s business over the two years under the following
headings.
(i) Inventory turnover [3]
(ii) Ability to pay trade payables [3]
QUESTION 5
Cheng is a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from his books on 30 September 2015.
$
Revenue 315 000
Purchases 165 000
Rent 15 000
Cash and bank 19 500 debit
Capital 15 000
Drawings 18 000
Provision for depreciation:

1 On 26 September 2015 goods had been purchased for $3 000 cash. The transaction had not been
3 The rent included a payment of $6 000 for the six months ending 31 December 2015.
4 Other operating expenses accrued $1 100.
method
(ii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 15% per annum, using the straight-line method.
maintained at 5% on the remaining trade receivables.
REQUIRED

QUESTION 1
The following extract was taken from Abbie’s cash book on 30 September 2015.
Cash Book (Bank Columns)
2015 $ 2015 $
Sept 01 Balance b/d 290 Sept 08 Husna 102
09 L Lee 475 17 Yang Stores 849
15 Ng 150 23 Lam 364
21 JG Supplies 980 26 Xevera 500
29 Sampson 625 30 Balance c/d 705
2 520 2 520
Abbie received the following bank statement on 1 October 2015.
Date Details Debit Credit Balance
2015 $ $ $
Sept 01 Balance 290 Cr
09 L Lee 475 765 Cr
10 Husna 102 663 Cr
15 Ng 150 813 Cr
22 JG Supplies 980 1793 Cr
23 Bank charges 35 1758 Cr
24 Ng – Dishonoured 150 1608 Cr
25 YJ Electric 250 1358 Cr
Abbie compared the bank statement with her cash book.

REQUIRED
(a) Bring Abbie’s cash book up to date. Balance the cash book and bring down the balance on 1
October 2015. [4]
(b) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement at 1 October 2015. [5]
Abbie supplied the following information related to a credit customer, Izzat.

October 1 Balance owed by Izzat to Abbie $750
5 Sold goods on credit to Izzat, $1 800, less 20% trade discount
6 Izzat returned goods, list price $350
21 Received a cheque from Izzat, $800
22 The remaining balance on Izzat’s account was written off as irrecoverable.
REQUIRED
(c) (i) Name the subdivision of the ledger containing Izzat’s account. [1]
(ii) Name the document issued by Abbie to Izzat on 5 October 2015. [1]
(d) Prepare the account of Izzat in the books of Abbie. [5]
(e) Prepare the general journal entry for the transaction on 22 October. A narrative is required. [3]
(f) State three benefits to Abbie of using Information Communication Technology (ICT) to record her
transactions. [3]
QUESTION 2
The following information is available from the books of Yana for August 2015.
$
Trade receivables at 1 August 2015 27 520
Credit sales 32 400
Cash sales 19 970
Sales returns from credit customers 1 700
Cheques received from credit customers 40 150
Interest charged on overdue accounts 600
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the sales ledger control account for August. Balance the account and bring down the
balance on 1 September 2015. [8]
After preparing the sales ledger control account, Yana discovered the following errors.
1 Goods sold on credit to Tong, $560, had not been recorded in the books.
2 Proceeds of sale of fixtures and fittings, $800, had been recorded as cash sales.
3 Discount allowed to R Biggs, $56, had been debited to his account and credited to the
discount allowed account.
4 A sale of goods to Mia, $75, had been recorded in the account of Mason.
REQUIRED
(b) Name the type of error in each of 1–4. Error 1 has been completed as an example. [3]
(c) Prepare the general journal entries to correct the errors in 1–4. Narratives are not required. [8]
(d) State one reason why a trader may use a suspense account. [1]
QUESTION 3
The following balances were extracted from the books of Fairview Manufacturing on 31 October 2015.
$
Office wages 75 000
Factory packaging cost 55 000
Rent 38 400
Factory equipment (at cost) 245 000
Office equipment (at cost) 60 000
Factory equipment 105 000
Inventory 1 November 2014:

1 Inventory at 31 October 2015
$
2 Half of the carriage inwards is for raw materials and half for finished goods.
3 Factory wages owing are $9 000.
4 60% of factory packaging costs are direct and 40% indirect.
5 Rent is allocated to the factory and the office on the basis of floor area occupied:
Factory 5000 sq m and Office 3000 sq m
6 Factory equipment and office equipment are both depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum
using the diminishing (reducing) balance method.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 31 October 2015. [13]
Hong works in the office of Fairview Manufacturing. For the month of March she was paid for 140 hours
at $6 per hour and 28 hours at time and a quarter. Deductions from gross pay were $250 tax and social
security and $60 for pension contributions.
REQUIRED
(b) Calculate the net pay of Hong for the month of October 2015. [4]
(c) Name the document that Hong will receive which details the calculation of her net pay. [1]
QUESTION 4
Danish provided the following information.
$
Revenue 380 000
Purchases 295 000
At 31 July 2015
$
Inventory 65 000
Bank 13 000 debit
Expenses accrued 8 000
REQUIRED
Workings Answer
Inventory at 1 August 2014
Rate of inventory turnover (to two decimal places)
Expenses paid in the year ended 31 July 2015
Working capital ratio (current ratio)
[12]
Danish is considering the following proposals to improve his working capital.
1 Sell excess non-current assets for $4 000
2 Sell old inventory costing $15 000, for $9 000 cash
3 Allow a trade receivable 5% cash discount for early payment of a debt of $10 000
5 Bring additional capital into the business, motor vehicle $5 000 and cash $1 000
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the table, to show the effect on the working capital of each proposal. The first one has
Working capital
Amount
Proposal (Increase, decrease,
$
no effect)
2 Sell old inventory costing $15 000, for $9000 cash
3 Allow a trade receivable 5% cash discount for early payment
of a debt of $10 000
5 Bring additional capital into the business, motor vehicle $5
000 and cash $1 000
[8]
QUESTION 5
Ning is a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from his books on 30 September 2015.
$
Revenue 248 200
Purchases 104 750
Electricity 4 230
Insurance 5 000

Leasehold premises (cost) 80 000
Computer equipment (at cost) 75 000
Bank 5 300 credit
8% Bank loan 50 000
Drawings 25 000

2 Distribution expenses accrued were $2 600.
3 Advertising expenses includes an advertising campaign costing $1 500 which runs from 1 August
to 31 December 2015.
4 The 8% Bank loan is repayable in 5 equal payments on 1 October each year.
5 The depreciation policy is as follows.
(i) The lease on the premises is for 20 years. An appropriate amount should be charged
each year.
(ii) Computer equipment at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
(iii) Fixtures and fittings at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
No depreciation is charged in the year of disposal.
6 Trade receivables, $6 400, are irrecoverable. A provision for doubtful debts of 5% is to be
maintained.
REQUIRED
May 2016 328 Paper21 & 22
MAY 2016 - PAPER 21 & P22

QUESTION 1
Faara had the following assets and liabilities on 1 May 2015.
$
Inventory 2 850
Trade receivable – Jaafar 600
Other payables – Electricity 200
Bank 450 Credit
5% Bank loan (30 September 2020) 5 000
Motor vehicle 4 500
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate Faara’s capital. *1+
The following transactions related to the account of Jaafar for the month ended 31 May 2015.
May 04 Sold goods to Jaafar, list price $1 500, allowed 15% trade discount.
05 Jaafar returned goods purchased on 4 May, list price $120.
16 Jaafar paid the amount owing on 1 May by cheque and was allowed 2% cash
discount.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the ledger account of Jaafar for the month of May 2015. Balance the account and bring
down the balance on 1 June 2015. *6+
(c) State two possible reasons why Faara allowed trade discount to Jaafar. *2+
The following information related to the electricity account for the month ended 31 May 2015.
May 17 Paid for electricity by cheque $440
31 Prepared the income statement. It was estimated that $55 was owed for electricity
at that date.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the electricity account for the month of May 2015. Balance the account and bring down
the balance on 1 June 2015. *4+
(e) Name the accounting concept applied to the calculation of electricity expense when preparing
the income statement at 31 May 2015. *1+
(f) Complete the following table for the transactions shown. Name the source document prepared
by Faara and the book of prime entry used, and state the effect of the transaction on her capital.
The first item has been completed as an example. *6+
document prime owner’s
entry capital ($)
May 9 Sold goods on credit for $900, Sales Sales +300
(cost $600) invoice journal
14 Customer returned goods, bought
by him on 9 May for $300.
21 Paid wages in cash $150.
May 2016 329 Paper21 & 22
QUESTION 2
The following balances were recorded in the books of Sofea on 1 March 2015.
$
Motor vehicles account (at cost) 50 000
Motor vehicles - Provision for depreciation account 18 400
1 On 31 May 2015 a motor vehicle costing $16 000 and with an accumulated depreciation of $7000
2 On 30 June 2015 a motor vehicle costing $20 000 was purchased on credit.
3 The depreciation policy of Sofea is as follows:
Motor vehicles are depreciated at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
A full year’s depreciation is charged in the year of purchase.
No depreciation is charged in the year of sale.
REQUIRED
(a) State the meaning of the accounting term depreciation. *2+
(b) Identify by ticking the appropriate box (✓) whether each statement about depreciation is true or
false. The first one has been completed as an example.
Statement Statement False

There is only one method of charging depreciation. ✓
Depreciation is the cash set aside for non-current asset
replacement.
Depreciation is an application of the going concern concept.
*2+
(c) Calculate the:
(i) profit or loss on the sale of the motor vehicle on 31 May 2015. *1+
(ii) motor vehicles depreciation charge for the year ended 29 February 2016. *2+
(d) Prepare the motor vehicles provision for depreciation account for the year ended 29 February
2016. Balance the account and bring down the balance on 1 March 2016. *5+
Sofea provided the following information about her trade receivables.

1 On 28 February 2016 Wade Designs, which owed Sofea $5 100, was declared bankrupt.
A cheque for $1 800 was received. The balance of the debt was irrecoverable.
2 On 29 February 2016 the remaining trade receivables were:

Age of debt (Months) Amount ($) Provision for doubtful debts percentage (%)
Up to 1 month 18 000 2
1 to 3 months 12 200 5
3 to 6 months 3 300 10
Over 6 months 2 200 20
35 700
On 1 March 2015 the provision for doubtful debts account was $2 050.
May 2016 330 Paper21 & 22
REQUIRED
(e) Prepare the general journal to record the entries for Wade Designs on 28 February 2016.
A narrative is not required. *3+
(f) Calculate the provision for doubtful debts on 29 February 2016. *1+
(g) Prepare the provision for doubtful debts account for the year ended 29 February 2016. *3+
(h) Name one accounting concept applied by Sofea in providing for doubtful debts. *1+
QUESTION 3
Alif is a trader. He does not maintain a full set of accounting records but the following information is
available.
1. Summarised bank transactions for the year ended 31 March 2016

Trade receivables 32 000 Trade payables 29 000
Cash sales banked 7 400 Purchase of equipment 2 500
Interest receivable 600 Rent 8 000
2
All cash sales were banked on the day of receipt with the exception of the following which were paid out
of cash receipts.
$
Wages 9 000
Drawings 11 500
3
Balances at: 1 April 31 March
2015 2016
$ $
Inventory 12 000 11 500
Wages owing 300 450
Rent prepaid 500 700
Bank 3 950 ?
Capital 35 000 ?
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate, for the year ended 31 March 2016, the value of the following:
(i) revenue (sales) *4+
(ii) purchases. *2+
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 31 March 2016. *8+
(c) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 March 2016. *6+
May 2016 331 Paper21 & 22
QUESTION 4
Lache’s accounting year ends on 31 December. The following information is available.
2015 2014
$ $
Revenue 750 000 600 000
Expenses 200 000 175 000
Capital 250 000 250 000
Bank loan repayable 30 December 2014 ----- 120 000
Bank loan repayable 30 December 2020 80 000 -----
Inventory 60 000 260 000
Other payables 8 500 3 500
Bank 28 000 Debit 40 000 Credit
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following ratios for 2015. Comparative figures for 2014 are shown. Your answers
should be calculated to one decimal place.

Gross profit to revenue
37.5%
(Gross profit margin)
20%
Current ratio
2.9:1
(Working capital ratio)
Quick ratio
0.4:1
(acid test ratio)
*12+
(b) Using the ratios calculated in (a) and the information provided, comment on the:
(i) profitability over the two years *4+
(ii) liquidity over the two years. *4+
QUESTION 5
Suria is in business as a sole trader. The following balances were extracted from her books on 31 March
2016.
$
Revenue 287 000
Purchases 143 800
May 2016 332 Paper21 & 22

Capital 70 000
Drawings 28 000
Leasehold premises at cost (25 year lease) 100 000
Computers at cost 44 000
Office furniture at cost 15 500
Computers 16 600
Computer maintenance 12 200
Advertising 12 600
Cash and bank 520 Debit

3 Advertising included a payment of $5 700 for a series of advertisements being published in the
six months ending 31 July 2016.
4 General expenses accrued were $2 400.
5 A computer costing $8 000 had been recorded in the computer maintenance account.
(i) an appropriate amount on the leasehold premises.
(ii) computers at the rate of 25% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance
method
(iii) office furniture at the rate of 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
maintained at 4%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement of Suria for the year ended 31 March 2016. *24+
(b) Prepare the statement of financial position at 31 March 2016. *16+

QUESTION 1
Gabi is in business buying and selling goods on credit. The following details relate to the account of her
customer, Kacela, for the month of September 2016.
$
September 1 Opening balance owed by Kacela to Gabi 900
9 Invoice sent to Kacela 730
14 Credit note sent to Kacela 25
30 Cheque received and banked by Gabi 860
30 Discount allowed by Gabi 40
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the account of Kacela in the books of Gabi. Balance the account and bring down the
balance on 1 October. [6]
(b) Name the sub-division of Gabi’s ledger which will contain the account of Kacela. [1]
On 30 September 2016 the balance on the bank account in the books of Gabi was $450 debit.
Gabi received a bank statement for September 2016. The differences between the bank account and the
bank statement were as follows:
1 A cheque for $50 paid to J Simpson had not been presented for payment.
2 Bank charges, $230, had been charged to Gabi’s account but were not recorded in Gabi’s books.
3 The bank had received a dividend payment, $120, which was not recorded in Gabi’s books.
4 The cheque received from Kacela, $860, was not recorded on the bank statement.
REQUIRED
(c) Update the bank account of Gabi. Balance the account and bring down the updated balance on 1
October . [3]
(d) Prepare the bank reconciliation statement on 1 October 2016. Start with the updated bank
account balance. [4]
(e) Complete the table for the transactions shown. Name the source document and the book of
prime entry used by Gabi. The first item has been completed as an example.

Sold goods on credit Sales invoice Sales journal
Paid wages in cash
Purchased office fixtures on credit
Goods returned by a credit customer
[6]
QUESTION 2
Valda prepares a monthly control account for her sales ledger.
The following information relates to the month of August 2016.
Debit Credit
$ $
Sales ledger control account balances 1 August 2016 18 410 720
Sales ledger control account balances 1 September 2016 ? 580
$
Cheques received 40 500
Dishonoured cheque (included in cheques received) 800
Cash sales 8 950
Bad debt written off 2 750
Credit sales 39 600
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the sales ledger control account for the month of August 2016. Balance the account and
bring down the balances on 1 September. [8]
(b) State two reasons for preparing control accounts. [2]
Valda later found the following errors in her books.

1 A cheque received from Fatin, $930, had been correctly entered in the cash book but
had been credited to the account of Martin.
2 The total of the discount allowed column in the cash book, $970, had been credited to
the discount received account.
3 Returns inwards of $390 had been correctly recorded in Ann’s account, but had been
recorded as $930 in the returns inwards account.
REQUIRED
(c) Name the type of error that Valda made by crediting Martin’s account. [1]
(d) Prepare the general journal entries to correct errors 1, 2 and 3. Narratives are not required. [7]
Valda is considering the use of Information and Communications Technology (ICT) to prepare her books of
account.
REQUIRED
(e) State two benefits to Valda of using Information and Communications Technology (ICT). [2]
QUESTION 3
The following is an extract from the wages book of JT Manufacturing for August 2016 showing the wages
paid to factory indirect labour.
Wages book
Employee’s Employer’s
Rate
Hours social social Voluntary Net
Employee per Tax
worked security security Contributions pay
hour
contribution contribution
$ $ $ $
Nazim 160 $5 210 80 120 0 ?
Pabla 180 $6 250 110 150 50 ?
Total 340 460 190 270 50
REQUIRED
(a) Give one example of a voluntary contribution. [1]
(b) Calculate the net pay for:

Nazim [3]
Pabla [3]
(c) Calculate the total wages cost for factory indirect labour. [3]
The following balances were extracted from the books of JT Manufacturing for the month of August 2016.

Raw materials 3 800
Raw materials returns outward 1 200
Rent 9 000
Factory direct wages 9 350
Factory indirect labour [calculated in part(c) ] ?
Power 4 000
Depreciation on factory machinery 6 000
Depreciation on office computers 9 000
Additional information at 31 August 2016
1 Inventory
$
Raw materials 5 350
2 Rent and power are to be apportioned: 60% to the factory, 40% to the office.
REQUIRED
(d) Prepare the manufacturing account of JT Manufacturing for the month ended 31 August 2016.[10]
QUESTION 4
Ng provided the following information for the year ended 30 September 2016.
$
Bank 20 000 Credit
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 30 September 2016. Comparative figures for the
previous year are shown.
Year ended 30 September 2016 Year ended 30

Workings Answer September 2015
Revenue $220 000
1.93:1
1.12:1
[8]
(b) Comment on the liquidity position of Ng over the two years. [3]
On 31 October 2016 Ng had $15 000 in his business bank account. He is considering ways to further
improve his working capital.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the table showing the effect on the working capital of the following proposals.
Proposal Effect on
Current Current Working
Introduce additional capital of $10 000, consisting of $5000 in
cash and $5000 non-current assets.
Obtain an additional bank loan for $30 000, repayable in equal
instalments over five years.
Offer trade receivables a cash discount of 10% for quick
payment. Credit customers owing $60 000 will accept this offer.
[9]
QUESTION 5
Li and Yang are in partnership sharing profits and losses in the ratio 3:2. Interest is allowed on capital at
the rate of 4% per annum and is charged on drawings at the rate of 10% per annum.
Partners are entitled to annual salaries, Li $8 000 and Yang $5 000.
The following balances were extracted from the books on 30 September 2016.
Capital accounts $
Li 50 000
Yang 50 000
Current accounts
Li 4 300 Credit
Yang 2 900 Credit
Drawings
Li 15 000
Yang 9 000
Computing equipment (cost) 60 000

Computing equipment 20 000
Revenue 625 000
Purchases 295 000
Returns to supplier 4 850
Bank 25 600 Credit
1 Inventory at 30 September 2016 was $57 900.
2 A sale of goods made on credit on 26 September, $2 800, had not been recorded in the books.
3 At 30 September 2016 marketing expenses, $1 100, were accrued whereas administration
expenses $250, were prepaid.
4 The partners’ salaries had been paid to Li and Yang. These had been posted to the wages and
salaries account.
5 Office fixtures costing $5 000 and with an accumulated depreciation of $3 000 had been sold for
$2 000. A cheque was received on 20 August 2016. No entries had been recorded in the books.
(i) buildings at the rate of 2% per annum. The buildings have a cost of $100 000. No
depreciation is charged on land.
(ii) computing equipment at the rate of 30% per annum using the diminishing (reducing)
balance method.
(iii) office fixtures at the rate of 20% per annum using the straight-line method.
7 Trade receivables include a debt of $4 000 which is considered irrecoverable. The provision for
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the income statement and appropriation account for the year ended 30 September
2016. [19]
(b) Prepare the current accounts for the year ended 30 September 2016. Balance the accounts and
bring down the balances on 1 October 2016. [5]

QUESTION 1
The following balances remained in the books of Fabio at 30 June 2016. He was aware that there were
$
Motor vehicle 9 500
Inventory 4 850
Purchases 14 400
Bank loan 2 000
Capital 3 000
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the trial balance at 30 June 2016, balancing the trial balance by the use of an
On inspection of his books, Fabio located the following errors.
1 A sale of goods, $850, had been correctly recorded in the account of a credit customer, but had
been recorded in the revenue (sales) account as $580.
2 A purchase of goods, $700, had been correctly entered in the account of a credit supplier, but
had been credited to the purchases account.
REQUIRED
(b) Prepare the general journal entries to correct errors 1 and 2. Narratives are not required. [4]
(c) Complete the following table for each of Fabio’s transactions in July 2016. If the capital is not
affected write ‘No effect’. The first transaction has been completed as an example.
Transaction Book of Account to Account to Effect on

prime entry be debited be credited capital $
Sold goods costing $900 on credit to Noah for Sales Journal Noah Revenue +$600
the list price of $1 500. (Sales)
Noah returned goods with a list price of $100
Paid Sophie a cheque for $610.
A debt, $230, owed by Zain was written off.
[12]
QUESTION 2
Lyana is preparing her financial statements. She provides the following information.
1 October 2015 Rent receivable account $2 500 Credit
The bank account contained the following entries.

Receipts
31 December 2015 Rent received by cheque $6 700
30 April 2016 Rent received by cheque $3 100
Payments
31 January 2016 Refund for overpayment of rent receivable $700
The rent receivable amounts to $12 000 a year.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the rent receivable account for the year ended 30 September 2016. Make the transfer to
the income statement and bring down the balance on 1 October 2016. [5]
After preparing the draft income statement, which showed a profit for the year of $24 000, Lyana
discovered some errors.
REQUIRED
(b) Complete the following table showing the effect on the profit for the year of correcting each
error. Calculate the revised profit for the year.
$ $ $
Purchases of $500 had not been recorded in the books.
Goods, $800, had been counted twice in the closing inventory.
No adjustment had been made for prepaid insurance $950.
Discount allowed, $1600, had been added to gross profit.
Equipment costing $15 000 (accumulated depreciation $6600) had been
depreciated by 20% on cost. The reducing (diminishing) balance method
should have been used at a rate of 20%.
statement.
Revised profit for the year

[8]
(c) Define the term ‘revenue receipt’. [2]
(d) Complete the following table by inserting a () showing whether each transaction is revenue
expenditure, a revenue receipt, capital expenditure or a capital receipt. The first one has been
Sold office computer 
Received interest on deposit account
Took out a 5-year bank Loan
Paid property insurance
Bought motor vehicle to deliver goods
Received commission
[5]
QUESTION 3
Cam Limited provided the following information.
At 1 October 2015 $
Issued share capital $1 Ordinary shares 70 000
Interim dividend paid on ordinary shares 7 000
1 On 1 November 2015 an additional 30 000 ordinary shares of $1 each were issued.
2 On 30 September 2016 the directors:
transferred $80 000 to the general reserve,
paid a final ordinary dividend of $0.20 per share on all issued shares.
REQUIRED
(a) Complete the statement of changes in equity for the year ended 30 September 2016.
General Retained
Share Capital Total
Reserve Profits
$ $
$ $
Share issue
Profit for the year
Transfer to general reserve
Dividend paid (interim)
Dividend paid (final)
Balance at 30 September 2016
[8]
(b) Prepare an extract from the statement of financial position showing the equity, reserves and
non-current liabilities of Cam Limited at 30 September 2016. [6]
(c) Suggest two possible reasons why the directors of Cam Limited transferred $80 000 to the
(d) State two differences between ordinary shares and debentures. [4]
QUESTION 4
Zahin is a trader, buying and selling goods on credit. The following information is available on 31 August
2016.
$
Capital 60 000
Bank loan (repayable 2020) 20 000
Inventory 31 August 2016 31 000
Purchases 170 000
Percentage of gross profit to revenue (Gross profit margin) 25%

Percentage of profit for the year to revenue (Profit margin) 5%
REQUIRED
(a) Calculate the following for the year ended 31 August 2016. Comparative figures for the previous
year are shown.
Year ended 31 August 2016 Year ended

Workings Answer 31 August 2015
Revenue for the year $200 000
Percentage mark-up 27%
Expenses for the year $36 000
21%
[10]
(b) Give three comments about the performance of Zahin’s business over the two years. [6]
Zahin is considering changes to his accounting policies.
REQUIRED
(c) Complete the table naming one principle or concept which has not been complied with if each
proposed action is implemented. The first item has been completed as an example.
Proposed action Principle or concept

Revalue his premises, recording the increase in market value as a profit Historic cost
Include a value for business reputation in his income statement
Record his drawings in the income Statement
Stop charging depreciation on non-current assets for the year
Do not provide for trade debts which are probably irrecoverable
[4]
QUESTION 5
The following balances were extracted from the books of Project Manufacturing on 30 September 2016.
$
Capital 140 000
Drawings 39 800
Royalties 8 000
Rent 16 400
Insurance 5 000

Administration and finance costs 9 500
Inventory at 1 October 2015
Raw materials 8 700

1 Inventory
$
Raw materials 9 750
2 Expenses are to be apportioned to the factory and the office as follows:

Factory Office
Insurance 80% 20%
Rent 75% 25%
Premises maintenance 60% 40%
3 Administration and finance costs owing were $750.
4 Advertising expenses of $1 200 were prepaid.
(i) factory machinery at 20% per annum using the diminishing (reducing) balance method
(ii) office fixtures at 10% per annum using the straight-line method.
6 A provision for doubtful debts is to be maintained at the rate of 5%.
REQUIRED
(a) Prepare the manufacturing account for the year ended 30 September 2016. Show clearly the
prime cost and the cost of production. [15]
(b) Prepare the income statement for the year ended 30 September 2016. [14]

O-Level Accounting Paper 2 Topical and y

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

O-Level Accounting Paper 2 Topical and y

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

O-Level Accounting Paper 2 Topical and y

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

Muhammad Nauman Malik

9-F, Main Market Gulberg II, Lahore.

Title O-Level Accounting Paper 2 (Topical/Yearly)

Author Muhammad Nauman Malik

Published by Read & Write Publications

Printed by Sadaat Printers Urdu Bazar Lahore

Composed by Asif Bernard, Yasir Abbas Fraz

Title designed by Mukhtar Ali

Legal Advisor Mian Tariq Ahmad (Advocate Supreme Court)

5 BURHANI BOOK CENTRE 6 MARYAM ACADEMY

Muhammad Nauman Malik

TABLE OF CONTENTS (TOPICAL)

QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2012 P21 Q1 ............................................................................................... 31

QUESTION 26 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q1 (A TO C) .................................................................................... 54

QUESTION 9 MAY 2013 P22 Q3 ........................................................................................................... 69

QUESTION 5 MAY 2012 P21 Q1 (D) ...................................................................................................... 92

QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2013 P21 Q5 ............................................................................................. 137

QUESTION 11 MAY 2014 P22 Q2 (B TO D) ) ........................................................................................... 161

QUESTION 8 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q2 (A & B) .................................................................................. 180

QUESTION 11 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q3 (D) ........................................................................................ 214

QUESTION 8 MAY 2011 P22 Q4 ......................................................................................................... 250

QUESTION 23 NOVEMBER 2014 P22 Q4 ............................................................................................. 280

TABLE OF CONTENTS (YEARLY)

2009 MAY P2 Q1 (e) ............................................................. 18, 22

Q5 ................................................................. 91, 104 Q4 .............................................................. 254, 275

Q2 (a to d)....................................................... 76, 83 Q5 ................................................................ 98, 111

CHAPTER 1 ACCOUNTING BASICS

QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (c & d)

QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q5 (e)

QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P22 Q1

In the first days of trading, Leung completed the following transactions.

Book of prime Effect on current Effect on current

Assets Liabilities Capital

(Increase, decrease, Amount of

QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P21 Q2 (d)

QUESTION 10 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q3 (d)

QUESTION 11 MAY 2015 P21 Q4 (d)

Proposal Accounting principle/concept

QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q2 (e)

QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q4 (c)

Proposed action Principle or concept

QUESTION 2 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q4 (c & d)

QUESTION 3 SPECIMEN 2010 P2 Q5 (e)

QUESTION 4 MAY 2010 P22 Q1

(b) Book of prime Effect on current Effect on current

(c) Trial balance at 31 May 2010

QUESTION 6 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q1 (e)

QUESTION 7 NOVEMBER 2011 P22 Q4 (d)

QUESTION 8 MAY 2014 P22 Q1 (a & e)

QUESTION 9 MAY 2015 P21 Q2 (d)

QUESTION 10 NOVEMBER 2015 P21 Q3 (d)

QUESTION 11 MAY 2015 P21 Q4 (d)

QUESTION 12 NOVEMBER 2016 P21 Q2 (e)

QUESTION 13 NOVEMBER 2016 P22 Q4 (c)

CHAPTER 2 BOOKS OF ORIGINAL ENTRY

QUESTION 2 NOVEMBER 2009 P2 Q1

The following transactions took place: